GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Reference Manual

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

MELSOFT

Human Machine Interface

Reference Manual

Art. no.: 136204

01 05 2002

SH (NA)-080117-H

GT Works Version5/

GT Designer Version5

SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E

SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE(V)


INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

•

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

•

(Always read these instructions before using this equipment.)

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.

The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system, please read the CPU module user's manual.

In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".

!

DANGER

!

CAUTION

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.

Note that the

!

CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances.

Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[Test Operation Instructions]

!

DANGER

•

Before performing test operation (bit device on/off, word device's present value changing, timer/counter's set value and present value changing, buffer memory's present value changing) for a user-created monitor screen, system monitoring, special module monitoring or ladder monitoring, read the manual carefully to fully understand how to operate the equipment.

During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system.

False output or malfunction can cause an accident.

A - 1 A - 1

Precautions for using this software (important)

1. Memory of the personal computer used

Processing may be terminated by Microsoft

®

Windows

®

95 operation systm, Microsoft

® operation systm, Microsoft

®

WindowsNT

Edition Operating system, Microsoft

®

®

Workstation4.0 operation systm, Microsoft

Windows

®

98

®

Windows

®

Millennium

Windows

®

2000 Professional Operating System on some personal computer models having main memory of not more than 32M bytes. Therefore, use them after increasing the main memory to 32M bytes or more.

2. Free space on the hard disk

While this software is running, free space of at least 50M byte is required on the hard disk.

Since free space of 50M byte is required by Windows

Windows

®

Me, Windows

®

®

95, Windows

®

98, WindowsNT

2000 Professional as the swap area, Windows

®

®

95, Windows

Workstation4.0,

®

98, WindowsNT

®

Workstation4.0, Windows

®

Me, Windows

®

2000 Professional may forcibly terminate the program if that free space is used up while the drawing software is running. Produce a sufficient amount of free space on the hard disk before using the drawing software. If you have to use the drawing software with an amount of free space that is barely above the requirement, save project data as often as possible.

When GT Simulator is used with GX Developer or GX Simulator, free space is required separately.

Refer to the GX Developer or GX Simulator Operating Manual for the free space required for use of GX

Developer or GX Simulator.

3. Using a spin box in a dialog box

• Do not enter into a spin box a numerical value with a number of digits that drastically exceeds the maximum number of digits that can be entered into the spin box. Entering a number of digits that drastically exceeds the maximum allowable number of digits may cause a forcible termination of the program.

• On the [Action] tab selectable from the [Touch key] dialog box, the spin box provided for selecting a key code does not display the key codes in the order of valid key codes when it displays the key codes for the special keys used by such functions as the alarm history display, data list display, and alarm list (user alarm) display. When you keep on clicking the button, therefore, the key codes will not be scrolled forward or backward in the order of the valid key codes. (Clicking the button when the spin box displays "FFEF", for example, will not display "FFB0" as the valid key code that comes next in the order.)

To specify such a key code for a special key associated with an object, use the keyboard the type the key code into the spin box instead of making a selection from the spin box.

4. Operation on a table in a dialog box

To select a line on a table when specifying a object display range, for example, click on any part of the line except the number display column. Clicking on the number display column on a line does not select the line.

If you clicked on the number display column on a line, that line is displayed in reverse video; click on the number display column again to resume the display in normal video.

5. Instructions for displaying any line other than a continuous line (such as a dotted line) in boldface type

When any line other than a continuous line is drawn in boldface type, the personal computer screen may not display the line type properly. However, it is displayed properly on the GOT and there are no problems in data.

6. Measures against the year 2000 (Y2K) problem

The GOT reads and displays the clock information from the PLC. When the GOT is connected to the

Mitsubishi PLC/Mitsubishi motion controller or is used with the A9GT-RS2T, continuous operation or restart of the GOT will present no problem since the PLC/motion controller/A9GT-RS2T itself will perform 1999-to-

2000 roll-over operation and leap compensation properly. (No measures required) When connected to a third party PLC, however, the GOT reads and displays the clock data from the third party PLC. Therefore, contact the corresponding company for the clock data when the GOT is connected to the third party PLC.

7. About the messages displayed at start

"Internal error: null pointer access"

If the above error has appeared, change the setting in the following procedure.

1) Click the "Start" button, point to the [Settings]-[Control Panel] menu, and click.

2) Double-click the "Regional Settings" icon.

3) As the [Regional Settings Property] dialog box appears, choose "English". If the above message appears with the setting of "English", choose the language other than English and restart the personal computer.

After a start, choose "English" again and restart the personal computer.

"Abnormal termination"

If the above error has appeared, check whether the hard disk has the free capacity of 50MB or more.

A - 2 A - 2

REVISIONS

* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.

Print Date * Manual Number Revision

Aug., 2000 SH (NA) 080117-A First edition

Oct., 2000 SH (NA) 080117-B Partial corrections

Section 2.1.2

Partial additions

Section 4.5.2, Section 2.2.3, Appendix7

Nov., 2000 SH (NA) 080117-C Partial corrections

Section 7.2.3

Partial additions

Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.5.2, Section 4.5.3, Section 5.2.1,

Section 5.2.2, Section 5.2.3, Section 5.3.3, Section 5.5, Section 5.6.1,

Section 5.6.2, Section 5.8, Section 7.1.2

Additions

Section 4.1.4, Section 4.1.5, Section 5.8.13, Section 5.8.14

Feb., 2001 SH (NA) 080117-D Partial corrections

Section 2.2.3, Section 4.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.2,

Section 4.5.2, Section 5.1.4, Section 5.2.2, Section 5.5, Section 5.7,


Section 5.8.9, Section 5.8.10, Section 5.9.1, Section 6.5.2, Appendix5,

Appendix7

Partial additions

Section 3.2, Section 4.1.4, Section 4.5.3, Section 6.5, Section 6.6,

Section 6.7, Appendix4

Additions

Section 4.1.7

May, 2001 SH (NA) 080117-E Partial corrections

Section 3.2, Section.4.1.1, Section.4.1.2, Section.4.1.7, Section.4.2.2,

Section.4.3.1, Section.4.5.2, Section.4.5.3, Section.5.5.1, Section.5.2.1,

Section.5.3.1, Section.5.3.3, Section.5.5, Section.5.6.1, Section.5.8.1,

Section.5.8.2, Section.5.8.5, Section.5.8.12, Section.5.9.4, Section.6.5.2,

Section.7.1.2, Appendix1, Appendix2, Appendix3, Appendix7

Jun., 2001 SH (NA) 080117-F Partial corrections

Section 4.3.2, Section 5.1.4, Section 5.8.9, Appendix7

Additions

Section 5.9.5

Aug., 2001 SH (NA) 080117-G Partial corrections


Section 3.2, Section 4.4.2, Section 4.5.2, Section 5.2.1, Section 5.4.6,

Section 5.5, Section 5.8.4, Section 5.8.9, Section 5.9.2, Section 6.5.1,

Appendix6, Appendix 7

May, 2002 SH (NA) 080117-H Partial corrections

Section 2.2.3, Section 3.2, Section 4.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.1.4,



Section 5.3.3, Section 5.5, Section 5.8.13, Section 5.9.1, Section 5.9.2,

Section 6.5.1, Section 6.5.2, Appendix4, Appendix8

Additions

Appendix7

Japanese Manual Version SH-080112-H

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.



2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A - 3 A - 3

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal.

Before using the equipment, please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.

CONTENTS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...............................................................................................................................A- 1

Precautions for using this software (important)..............................................................................................A- 2

REVISIONS .....................................................................................................................................................A- 3

INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................................A- 4

CONTENTS.....................................................................................................................................................A- 4

About Manuals ................................................................................................................................................A- 8

Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual ............................................................................................A- 9

CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1- 1 to 1- 2

CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2- 1 to 2- 6

2.1 System Configuration of Monitoring Screen ............................................................................................ 2- 1

2.1.1 System configuration....................................................................................................................... 2- 1

2.1.2 Operation environment.................................................................................................................... 2- 1

2.2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation............................................................ 2- 2

2.2.1 System configuration....................................................................................................................... 2- 2

2.2.2 Compatible RS-232C cable ............................................................................................................ 2- 4

2.2.3 Compatible PC card (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used) .................................................. 2- 5

CHAPTER3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 3- 1 to 3-18

3.1 Screen Configuration and Various Tools ................................................................................................. 3- 1

3.2 Menu Configuration................................................................................................................................... 3- 6

3.3 Basic Operation of Dialog Box................................................................................................................. 3-10

3.4 Operation of Template ............................................................................................................................. 3-12

3.5 Operation of Tool Palette ......................................................................................................................... 3-15

3.6 How to Use Help ...................................................................................................................................... 3-17

3.6.1 Help menu makeup ........................................................................................................................ 3-18

3.6.2 Printing the help screen.................................................................................................................. 3-18

CHAPTER4 SPECIFICATION 4- 1 to 4-71

4.1 Types and Number of Screens Created................................................................................................... 4- 1

4.1.1 Base screen..................................................................................................................................... 4- 1

4.1.2 Window screen ................................................................................................................................ 4- 2

4.1.3 About the report screen.................................................................................................................. 4-10

4.1.4 Video window.................................................................................................................................. 4-11

4.1.5 RGB screen .................................................................................................................................... 4-21

4.1.6 Video window/RGB screen settings .............................................................................................. 4-23

4.1.7 Wide display screen ....................................................................................................................... 4-25

A - 4 A - 4

4.2 Drawing Figures and Number of Attributes............................................................................................. 4-27

4.2.1 Types of drawing figures ................................................................................................................ 4-27

4.2.2 Attribute type for selection.............................................................................................................. 4-29

4.2.3 Figures in bitmap file format........................................................................................................... 4-31

4.2.4 Character size by magnification..................................................................................................... 4-32

4.2.5 Data capacity of each figure........................................................................................................... 4-33

4.3 Types and Specifications of Available Object Functions ........................................................................ 4-34

4.3.1 Types of and restrictions on object functions for setting ............................................................... 4-34

4.3.2 Specifications of the object functions that may be set .................................................................. 4-37

4.4 Overlap Setting......................................................................................................................................... 4-45

4.4.1 Figure and object............................................................................................................................ 4-45

4.4.2 Objects............................................................................................................................................ 4-45

4.5 Available Devices..................................................................................................................................... 4-46

4.5.1 Internal devices of GOT ................................................................................................................. 4-46

4.5.2 Device ranges available for the GOT-A900 series........................................................................ 4-51

4.5.3 Device ranges available for the GOT-F900 series........................................................................ 4-65

CHAPTER5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 5- 1 to 5-130

5.1 Data Display Functions ............................................................................................................................. 5- 2

5.1.1 Numerical display function (shows word device data as a numerical value) ................................ 5- 2

5.1.2 Data list display function (lists multiple word device states as numerical values) ........................ 5- 5

5.1.3 ASCII display function (shows data stored consecutively within devices as a character string).. 5- 8

5.1.4 Clock display function (reads and shows clock data of PLC CPU) .............................................. 5-11

5.2 Message Display Functions..................................................................................................................... 5-14

5.2.1 Comment display function

(shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF or value of monitor device) .......................................... 5-14

5.2.2 Alarm history display function

(shows a history of occurrence times, comments and others when a condition is enabled)................ 5-18

5.2.3 Alarm list display function (shows the error information of the system at error occurrence) ....... 5-24

5.3 Animation Display Functions ................................................................................................................... 5-27

5.3.1 Part display function (shows a part/screen corresponding to a device) ....................................... 5-27

5.3.2 Part movement display function (shows the movement of a part corresponding to a device) .... 5-30

5.3.3 Lamp display function (changes the lit-up color of a lamp with a device value) .......................... 5-33

5.3.4 Panelmeter display function (shows a meter according to a word device value) ........................ 5-36

5.4 Graph Display Functions ......................................................................................................................... 5-39

5.4.1 Trend graph display function (shows a word device value on trend graph)................................. 5-39

5.4.2 Line graph display function (shows word device values on line graph) ....................................... 5-42

5.4.3 Bar graph display function (shows word device values on bar graph) ......................................... 5-45

5.4.4 Statistical graph display function (shows word device values on statistical graph) ..................... 5-48

5.4.5 Scattered chart display function (shows word device values on scattered chart)........................ 5-51

5.4.6 Level display function (shows a word device value as a level)..................................................... 5-54

5.5 Touch Key Functions (When Touched, Touch Keys Perform such Functions as Device Value Change and Screen Switching) ............................................................................................................................. 5-57

5.6 Data Input Functions................................................................................................................................ 5-68

5.6.1 Numerical input function (writes any value to device)................................................................... 5-68

5.6.2 ASCII input function (writes any key code to word devices)......................................................... 5-72

5.7 Report Function (Prints Values Stored in Devices or Buffer Memory)................................................... 5-75

A - 5 A - 5

5.8 Other Object Functions ............................................................................................................................ 5-79

5.8.1 Hardcopy function (prints a monitor screen or converts it into image file) ................................... 5-79

5.8.2 System information function (confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU) .................. 5-82

5.8.3 Observe status function (writes to the PLC CPU when the specified condition is enabled) ....... 5-85

5.8.4 Floating alarm function (causes comments to flow from right to left on a base screen).............. 5-89

5.8.5 Recipe function (reads/writes values in the specified device range)............................................ 5-91

5.8.6 Sound function (plays a sound on GOT) ....................................................................................... 5-95

5.8.7 Test function (changes the device value of the PLC CPU) .......................................................... 5-97

5.8.8 Barcode function (writes data read with barcode reader to PLC CPU)........................................ 5-98

5.8.9 Operation panel function (operates GOT externally) .................................................................... 5-99

5.8.10 Time action function (performs specified operation at preset time).......................................... 5-101

5.8.11 Sampling function (reads PLC CPU data under specified condition)....................................... 5-104

5.8.12 Script function (exercises display control under GOT program)............................................... 5-106

5.8.13 Video display function ................................................................................................................ 5-109

5.8.14 RGB screen function .................................................................................................................. 5-110

5.9 Useful Functions .................................................................................................................................... 5-111

5.9.1 Screen call function (reduces project data capacity) .................................................................. 5-111

5.9.2 Security function (limits users) ..................................................................................................... 5-118

5.9.3 Offset function (monitors multiple devices by setting of one device).......................................... 5-122

5.9.4 Expression function (performs operation processing of PLC CPU on GOT) ............................. 5-124

5.9.5 Station number switching function

(Switches the monitor destination to the same device of another station number) ................... 5-129

CHAPTER6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT 6- 1 to 6-12

6.1 Operations to Be Set for the First Time.................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.2 Operations for Drawing Figures................................................................................................................ 6- 2

6.3 Operations for Object Setting ................................................................................................................... 6- 2

6.4 Operations for Creating a Report Screen................................................................................................. 6- 3

6.5 Installation Operations of System Program ............................................................................................. 6- 4

6.5.1 Types of system program installed on GOT................................................................................... 6- 4

6.5.2 Required knowledge before installation of system program.......................................................... 6- 7

6.5.3 Installation of ROM_BIOS............................................................................................................... 6- 9

6.5.4 Installation of OS ............................................................................................................................ 6-10

6.6 Download of Screen Data........................................................................................................................ 6-11

6.7 Debugging of Screen Data ...................................................................................................................... 6-12

CHAPTER7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS 7- 1 to 7-28

7.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1

7.1.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 7- 1

7.1.2 Operating instructions ..................................................................................................................... 7- 3

7.2 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 7- 6

7.2.1 Types ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 6

7.2.2 Control structure .............................................................................................................................. 7- 7

7.2.3 Usable data and representation methods ..................................................................................... 7-10

7.2.4 Script execution .............................................................................................................................. 7-14

7.3 Settings and Procedure for Execution..................................................................................................... 7-17

A - 6 A - 6

7.4 Program Examples .................................................................................................................................. 7-18

7.4.1 Touch keys with interlock function ................................................................................................. 7-18

7.4.2 Lamps which change their indications under multiple conditions................................................. 7-19

7.4.3 Password input screen with time limit function.............................................................................. 7-21

7.5 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................... 7-23

7.5.1 Simulation on general C language compiler or debugger ............................................................ 7-23

7.5.2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT ........................................................... 7-25

APPENDICES App- 1 to App-32

Appendix1 Operations for Use of the Conventional Model Data...............................................................App- 1

Appendix2 Display Speed of Object (Reference Value)............................................................................App- 5

Appendix3 List of Key Code .......................................................................................................................App- 7

Appendix4 Drawing Sheet .........................................................................................................................App-10

Appendix5 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function (Reference Value).......................................................App-16

Appendix6 Relationships between Extended Functions OS Installation and User Area

(Memory Map) .........................................................................................................................App-17

Appendix7 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR ...................................................................................App-18

Appendix8 List of Functions Added by Version Update of GT Works Version5

/ GT Designer Version5...........................................................................................................App-21

INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 3

A - 7 A - 7

About Manuals

The following manuals related to this product are available. Obtain the manuals as required the according to this table.

•

Related manual

Manual name

GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5 Operating Manual (Start up Manual)

Describes how to install GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5 into a personal computer and how to browse the online manuals.

(Found in the packing of the GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5)

GOT900 Series Operating Manual (Introductory Manual)

For those who use the GOT for the first time, describes the way to create a monitor screen on GT

Designer, transfer monitor data to the GOT, and display it on the screen.

(Available as option)

GT Simulator Version5 Operating Manual

Explains the system configuration, screen makeup and using methods of GT Simulator.


A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/A960GOT User’s Manual

Explains the specifications, general system configuration, component devices, part names, option unit loading methods, installation and wiring methods, maintenance and inspection methods, and error codes of A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/A960GOT unit.


A950GOT/A951GOT/A953GOT/A956GOT User’s Manual

Explains the specifications, general system configuration, component devices, part names, option unit loading methods, installation and wiring methods, maintenance and inspection methods, and error codes of A950GOT/A951GOT/A953GOT/A956GOT unit.


GOT-A900 Series User’s Manual (GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5 compatible

Connection System Manual)

Gives the specifications, system configuration, setting method and connection diagram of each connection form available for the GOT-A900 series.


GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5 compatible

Extended

•

Option Functions Manual)

Provides the specifications of the utility, system monitoring, ladder monitoring, special function unit monitoring, network monitoring functions, list editor functions, motion monitor functions and servo amplifier monitoring functions available for the GOT-A900 series and how to operate the dedicated monitor screen.


GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual (GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5 compatible

Gateway Functions Manual)

Explains the specifications, system configuration, setting methods and others of the gateway functions that can be performed on the GOT-A900 series.

GT SoftGOT Version 5 Operating Manual


Describes the system configuration, screen makeup and usage of GT SoftGOT.


F920GOT-BBD5-K-E (with keypad) Installation Manual

Explains the specifications, part names, and installation and power supply wiring methods of the

F920GOT-K-E.

(Packed with the F920GOT (with keypad))

F930GOT Installation Manual


F930GOT.

F930GOT-BBD-K-E (with keypad) Installation Manual

(Packed with the F930GOT)


F930GOT-K-E.

(Packed with the F930GOT (with keypad))

F940GOT Installation Manual


F940GOT.

F940WGOT Installation Manual

(Packed with the F940GOT)


F940WGOT.

(Packed with the F940WGOT)

F940 Handy GOT Hardware Manual

Explains the specifications, system configuration, part names and installation method of the handy

GOT.

(Packed with the F940 handy GOT)

F940GOT Handy Series (F94 GOTBD-RH-E) Hardware Manual

Explains the specifications, system configuration, part names, and installation method of the Handy

GOT.

GOT-F900 Hardware Manual [Common Connection]

(Packed with the Handy GOT RH Type)

Explains the specifications, system configuration and connection diagram of each connection form available for the GOT-F900 series. Hardware manual common to the ET series and handy GOT.

(Sent separately)

GOT-F900 Operating Manual

Explains the drawing specifications, utility function/HPP mode/special function unit monitoring function specifications, and dedicated monitor screen operation methods available for the GOT-

F900 series.

Operating manual common to the ET series and handy GOT.

(Sent separately)

Manual number (Model code)

IB-0800143

(13JU06)

SH-080116

(13JU07)

SH-080120

(13JU09)

SH-4005

(13JL70)

SH-080018

(13JL92)

SH-080119

(13JR20)

SH-080118

(13JU08)

SH-080254

(13JU29)

SH-080156

(13JU12)

JY997D02201

JY992D95701

JY997D02501

JY992D94201

JY992D93901

JY992D86901

JY992D99901

JY992D94801

JY992D94701

A - 8 A - 8

Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual

Abbreviations, generic terms and special terms used in this manual are described as follows:

GOT

Communication board

Communication unit

Option

Abbreviations, generic terms and special terms

Option unit

Software

A985GOT-V

A985GOT

A975GOT

A970GOT

A97*GOT

Description

Generic term of A985GOT-TBA-V and A985GOT-TBD-V

Generic term of A985GOT-TBA, A985GOT-TBD and A985GOT-TBA-EU

Generic term of A975GOT-TBA-B, A975GOT-TBD-B, A975GOT-TBA, A975GOT-TBD and

A975GOT-TBA-EU

Generic term of A970GOT-TBA-B A970GOT-TBD-B, A970GOT-TBA, A970GOT-TBD,

A970GOT-SBA, A970GOT-SBD, A970GOT-LBA, A970GOT-LBD, A970GOT-TBA-EU and

A970GOT-SBA-EU

Generic term of A975GOT and A970GOT

A960GOT

A956GOT

A956WGOT

A953GOT

A951GOT

A951GOT-Q

A950GOT

A950 handy GOT

A95*GOT

Generic term of A960GOT-EBA, A960GOT-EBD and A960GOT-EBA-EU

Generic term of A956GOT-TBD, A956GOT-SBD, A956GOT-LBD, A956GOT-TBD-M3,

A956GOT-SBD-M3 and A956GOT-LBD-M3

Generic term of A956WGOT-TBD





Generic term of A951GOT-QTBD, A951GOT-QSBD, A951GOT-QLBD, A951GOT-QTBD-M3,

A951GOT-QSBD-M3 and A951GOT-QLBD-M3



Generic term of A950GOT-SBD-M3-H, A950GOT-SBD-M3-H, A953GOT-SBD-M3-H and

A953GOT-LBD-M3-H

Generic term of A956GOT, A953GOT, A951GOT, A951GOT-Q, A950GOT and A950 handy

GOT

Generic term of F940GOT-SWD-E, F940GOT-LWD-E, ET-940BH(-L) and ET-940PH(-L)

Generic term of F930GOT-BWD-E, F930GOT-BBD-K-E

F940GOT

F930GOT

F920GOT

F940 handy GOT

F940WGOT

GOT-A900 series

Abbreviation of F920GOT-BBD5-K-E

Generic term of F940GOT-SBD-H, F940GOT-LBD-H, F943GOT-SBD-H, F943GOT-LBD-H,

F940GOT-SBD-RH, F940GOT-LBD-RH, F943GOT-SBD-RH and F943GOT-LBD-RH

Abbreviation of F940WGOT-TWD

Generic term of A985GOT-V, A985GOT, A975GOT, A970GOT, A960GOT, A95*GOT and

GT SoftGOT

Generic term of F940GOT, F930GOT, F920GOT, F940 handyGOT and F940WGOT GOT-F900 series

Bus connection board Generic term of A9GT-QBUSS, A9GT-QBUS2S, A9GT-BUSS and A9GT-BUS2S

Serial communication board Generic term of A9GT-RS4, A9GT-RS2 and A9GT-RS2T

Bus connection unit

Data link unit

Generic term of A9GT-QBUS2SU, A9GT-BUS2SU, A9GT-BUS2SU, A7GT-BUSS and A7GT-

BUS2S

Generic term of A7GT-J71AP23, A7GT-J71AR23 and A7GT-J71AT23B

Network unit Generic term of A7GT-J71LP23 and A7GT-J71BR13

CC-Link communication unit Generic term of A8GT-J61BT13 and A8GT-J61BT15

Protection sheet

Backlight

Debug stand

Abbreviation of A9GT-80PSC, A9GT-70PSC, A9GT-60PSC and A9GT-50PSC type transparent protection sheets

Abbreviation of A9GT-80LTT, A9GT-70LTTB, A9GT-70LTT, A9GT-70LTS and

A9GT-50LT type backlights

Abbreviation of A9GT-80STAND, A9GT-70STAND and A9GT-50STAND type debug stand

PC card ( memory card )

Flash PC card

Compact flash PC card

Memory board

Attachment

Ten-key Panel

A7GT-CNB

Abbreviation of PC card with PCMCIA Ver.2.1

Generic term of A9GTMEM-10MF, A9GTMEM-20MF and A9GTMEM-40MF

Compact flash PC card compliant with Compact FlashTM

Abbreviation of A9GT-FNB, A9GT-FNB1M, A9GT-FNB2M, A9GT-FNB4M, A9GT-FNB8M,

A9GT-QFNB, A9GT-QFNB4M, A9GT-QFNB8M type option function memory board

Generic term of A77GT-96ATT/A85GT-95ATT/A87GT-96ATT/A87GT-97ATT attachments

Abbreviation of A8GT-TK ten-key Panel

Abbreviation of A7GT-CNB bus connector conversion box

A9GT-QCNB

External I/O unit

Abbreviation of A9GT-QCNB bus connector conversion box

Abbreviation of A9GT-70KBF and A8GT-50KBF type external I/O interface unit

Printer interface unit Abbreviation of A9GT-50PRF type printer interface unit

Memory card interface unit Abbreviation of A1SD59J-MIF memory card interface unit

Video input interface unit

RGB input interface unit

Video/RGB mixed input interface unit

GT Works Version 5

Abbreviation of A9GT-80V4 type Video input interface unit

Abbreviation of A9GT-80R1 type RGB input interface unit

Abbreviation of A9GT-80V4R1 type Video/RGB mixed input interface unit

GT Designer Version 5

GT Designer

GT Simulator

Abbreviation of SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E software package

Generic term of SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE software package and SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKEV software package

Abbreviation of image creation software GT Designer for GOT900

Abbreviation of GT Simulator screen simulator GOT900

A - 9 A - 9

Abbreviations, generic terms and special terms

Software

GT Converter

GT Debugger

GT Manager

GT SoftGOT

GX Developer

GX Simulator

QCPU (Q Mode)

Description

Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter for GOT900

Abbreviation of debugging software GT Debugger

Abbreviation of GT Manager data editing software for GOT900

Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT monitoring software

Generic term of SW D5C-GPPW-E/SW D5F-GPPW-E software packages

Generic term of SW D5C-LLT-E ladder logic test tool function software packages

(SW5D5C-LLT-E or later)

Generic term of Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU,

Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU CPU units

Generic term of Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A and Q06HCPU-A CPU units

CPU

QCPU (A Mode)

QCPU

QnACPU (Large Type)

QnACPU (Small Type)

QnACPU

AnUCPU

AnACPU

AnNCPU

ACPU (Large Type)

A2US(H)CPU

AnS(H)CPU

A1SJ(H)CPU

ACPU (Small Type)

ACPU

FXCPU

Motion controller CPU

Generic term of QCPU (Q Mode) and QCPU (A Mode)

Generic term of Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU CPU units

Generic term of Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU and Q2ASHCPU-S1 CPU units

Generic term of QnACPU (Large Type) and QnACPU (Small Type)

Generic term of A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU and A4UCPU CPU units

Generic term of A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1 and A3ACPU CPU units

Generic term of A1NCPU, A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1 and A3NCPU CPU units

Generic term of AnUCPU, AnACPU and AnNCPU CPU units

Generic term of A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1 and A2USHCPU-S1 CPU units

Generic term of A1SCPU, A1SHCPU, A2SCPU and A2SHCPU CPU units

Generic term of A1SJCPU-S3 and A1SJHCPU CPU units

Generic term of A2US(H)CPU, AnS(H)CPU and A1SJ(H)CPU CPU units

Generic term of ACPU (Large Type), ACPU (Small Type) and A1FXCPU CPU units

Generic term of FX

0 series, FX

0N series, FX

0S series, FX

1 series, FX

1N series, FX

1S series,

FX

2 series , FX

2C series, FX

2N series, FX

1NS

series, FX

2NC series, FX(

2N

)-10GM/20GM series CPU unit

Generic term of A273UCPU, A273UHCPU, A273UHCPU-S3, A171SCPU-S3, A171SHCPU,

A172SHCPU, Q172CPU, Q173CPU CPU unit

Generic term of LM610, LM7600, LM8000 CPU unit

Generic term of FREQROL series (A500 Series, E500 Series, F500 Series)

FA controller

Inverter

Peripheral connection unit

G4

Ethernet unit

Other PLC

Others

Abbreviation of AJ65BT-G4-S3

E71

QE71

Q series-compatible E71

Omron PLC

Yasukawa PLC

SLC500 Series

MicroLogix1000 Series

MicroLogix1500 Series

Allen-Bradley PLC

Sharp PLC

PROSEC T Series

PROSEC V Series

Toshiba PLC

Generic term of AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-B2,

AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-B2 and A1SJ71E71N-B5T

Generic term of AJ71QE71, A1SJ71QE71-B2, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B5,

AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2 and A1SJ71QE71N-B5T

Generic term of QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2 and QJ71E71-100

Generic term of C200HS, C200H, C200H series(C200HX, C200HG, C200HE), CQM1,

C1000H,C2000H,CV500, CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11, CVM1-CPU21, CS1, CJ1 CPU unit

Generic term of GL60S, GL60H, GL70H, GL120, GL130, CP-9200SH, CP-9300MS, MP-920,

MP-930, MP-940, CP-9200(H) and PROGIC-8 CPU unit

Generic term of SLC500-20, SLC500-30, SLC500-40, SLC5/01 SLC5/02, SLC5/03, SLC5/04 SLC5/05

Generic term of 1761-L10BWA, 1761-L10BWB, 1761-L16AWA, 1761-L16BWA, 1761-

L16BWB, 1761-L16BBB, 1761-L32AWA, 1761-L32BWA, 1761-L32BWB, 1761-L32BBB,

1761-L32AAA, 1761-L20AWA-5A, 1761-L20BWA-5A, 1761-L20BWB-5A

Abbreviation of 1764-LSP

Generic term of SLC 500 Series, MicroLogix1000 Series, MicroLogix1200 Series, MicroLogix1500 Series

Generic term of JW-21CU, JW-22CU, JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH, JW-50CUH,

JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH CPU unit

Generic term of T2 (PU224 type), T2E, T2N, T3, T3H CPU unit

Abbreviation of Model3000 (S3) CPU unit

Generic term of PROSEC T Series and PROSEC V Series

SIEMENS PLC

Large type H series

H200 to 252 Series

H Series board type

Generic term of SIMATIC S7-200 Series, SIMATIC S7-300 Series and SIMATIC S7-400 Series CPU unit

Generic term of H-302(CPU2-03H), H-702(CPU2-07H), H-1002(CPU2-10H), H-2002(CPU2-

20H), H-4010(CPU3-40H),.J-300(CPU-03Ha), H-700(CPU-07Ha), H-2000(CPU-20Ha)

Generic term of H-200(CPU-02H, CPE-02H), H-250(CPU21-02H), H-252(CPU22-02H), H-

252B(CPU22-02HB), H-252C(CPU22-02HC, CPE22-02HC)

Generic term of H-20DR, H-28DR, H-40DR, H-64DR, H-20DT, H-28DT, H-40DT, H-64DT,

HL-40DR, HL-64DR

Generic term of EH-CPU104, EH-CPU208, EH-CPU308, EH-CPU316 EH-150 Series

HITACHI PLC (HIDIC H Series) Generic term of large type H series,H-200 to 252 Series H Series board type, EH-150 Series

Matsushita Electric Works

PLC

Memory

Generic term of FP0-C16CT, FP0-C32CT, FP1-C24C, FP1-C40C, FP2, FP2SH, FP2-CCU,

FP3, FP5, FP10(S), FP10SH, FP-M(C20TC) and FP-M(C32TC) abbreviation of memory (flash memory) in the GOT

OS

Object

Personal Computer

Servo amplifier

Abbreviation of GOT system software

Setting data for dynamic image

Personal computer where the corresponding software package is installed

Generic term of MR-J2SA, MR-J2SCP and MR-J2M A series

In this manual, the following products are called by new names.

Old Name

GPPW

New Name

GX Developer

Remarks

Generic term of SW D5C-GPPW-E/SW D5F-GPPW-E software packages

A - 10 A - 10

1 OVERVIEW

MELSOFT

CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW

This manual describes the system configuration, screen makeup, basic dialog box operation methods, specifications, help using methods, functions and others of the following products used with the GOT900 series.

• SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E software package

• SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE software package

• SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKEV software package

Exclusive updating products which can be utilized by those who use the previous products.

In this manual, the above products are abbreviated to the following.

SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E ...........................................................GT Works Version5

SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE/SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKEV.............GT Designer Version5

POINT

This manual describes only the basic operation methods, specifications and functions.

Refer to the help of the corresponding software package for information on setting details and operation methods (e.g. figure drawing for monitor screen creation, object function setting operation, data transfer to the GOT).

Refer to Chapter 5 for how to use help.

1

1 - 1 1 - 1

1 OVERVIEW

1

MEMO

MELSOFT

1 - 2 1 - 2

2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1 System Configuration of Monitoring Screen

2.1.1 System configuration

MELSOFT

GT Works Version5

GT Designer Version5

IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible

2.1.2 Operation environment

Body

Disk drive

Item

Main memory

Hard disk space

CRT

Display colors

Resolution

Mouse, keyboard, printer,

CD-ROM drive

Description

Pentium

R

133MHz or higher (Pentium II

R

266MHz or higher recommended)

Personal computer on which Microsoft

R

Windows

R

95 operating system, Microsoft

R

Windows

R

98 operating system, Microsoft

R

WindowsNT

R

Workstation 4.0 operating system operates, Microsoft

R

Windows

R

Millennium Edition Operating System or

Microsoft

R

Windows

R

2000 Professional Operating System.

CD-ROM drive is mandatory.

32 Mbyte (64 Mbyte or more is recommended.)

At the time of complete installation

When installed : 80M bytes or more

When operating : 50M bytes or more

Compatible with Windows R 95, Windows R 98, WindowsNT R 4.0, Windows R Me,

Windows R 2000 Professional

256 colors

Resolution of 800 × 600 dots or more

Compatible with Microsoft R Windows R 95, Windows R 98, WindowsNT R 4.0, Windows R

Me, Windows R 2000 Professional

POINT

Depending on the language of your Operating System, this software may not start.

In such a case, start this software after setting the Regional Settings within Control

Panel of Windows R 95, Windows R 98, WindowsNT R 4.0 to "English".

2 - 1 2 - 1

2


2

2.2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation

2.2.1 System configuration

(1) When the GOT-A900 is used

1


MELSOFT

RS-232C cable

GOT-A900 Series

PC card with PCMCIA

Ver. 2.1

2

OS program and monitoring screen data can be transferred (written) on the

PC card.

GT Works Version5


Printer cable

1: Refer to Item 2.2.2 for wiring diagram of RS-232C.

2: Refer to Item 2.2.3 for available PC cards.

2 - 2 2 - 2


(2) When the GOT-F900 series is used

1

RS-232C cable


MELSOFT

GOT-F900 series

GT Works Version5


Printer cable

1: Refer to Item 2.2.2 for wiring diagram of RS-232C.

2 - 3 2 - 3


MELSOFT

2.2.2 Compatible RS-232C cable

The cable in the wiring diagram below or the cable type below is required.

POINT

When the cable is self-made for the GOT-A900 series/GOT-F900 series, either of the following wiring diagrams (1) and (2) may be used.

However, if the F940GOT/F930GOT is connected to the A series CPU or the FX series CPU with RS422 to use the PLC CPU and the GOT with the FX-2PIF at the same time, use the F2-232CAB-1 connection cable.

(1) Wiring diagram of AC30R2-9SS


RXD 2

TXD

RTS

3

7

CTS

DSR

SG

DTR

8

6

5

4

Shield

(2) Wiring diagram of FX-232CAB-1


RXD 2

TXD 3

RTS 7

CTS 8

DSR 6

SG 5

DTR 4

Shield

GOT

2

3

6

5

4

7

8

RXD

TXD

RTS

CTS

DSR

SG

DTR

GOT

2

3

6

5

7

8

4

RXD

TXD

RTS

CTS

DSR

SG

DTR

Use the screw-in type connector (inch) for the GOT side.

IBM PC/AT or

100% compatible

AC30R2-9SS

FX-232CAB-1

GOT

Manufacturer

Mitsubishi Electric

Type

AC30R2-9SS (9pin-9pin)

FX-232CAB-1 (9pin-9pin)

If the following cable is used, 9-25 pin converter is required.

Manufacturer

Mitsubishi Electric

Type

AC30R2-9P (9pin-25pin)

F2-232CAB-1 (9pin-25pin)

2 - 4 2 - 4


MELSOFT

2.2.3 Compatible PC card (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

(1) About compatible PC card types

Compatible PC cards are shown below.

Type name Remark

Commercially available SRAM type PC card (based on JEIDA Ver4.2 (based on

PCMCIA2.1))

—

Commercially available flash PC card (based on Compact FlashTM 1)

( 1 Compact FlashTM is a trademark of Sun Disk)

A9GTMEM-10MF Memory 16 Mbyte (hardware version D or later), flash PC card formatted

4


5


2: When using the compact flash PC card in the GOT, you need to fit a conversion adaptor (compact flash

⇔

Type

II conversion adaptor) to the compact flash PC card.

Fit the conversion adaptor of the corresponding maker to the compact flash PC card.

(On the A956WGOT, the PC card can be used without a conversion adaptor.)

3: The commercially available flash PC card may be used only when the following conditions are satisfied.

2

3

5

Usable GOTs

A975GOT-TBA-B, A975GOT-TBD-B, A975GOT-TBA, A975GOT-TBD,A970GOT-TBA-B,

A970GOT-TBD-B, A970GOT-TBA, A970GOT-TBD, A970GOT-SBA, A970GOT-SBD,

A970GOT-LBA, A970GOT-LBD, A960GOT-EBA, A960GOT-EBD

Function version

Version A or later

A956WGOT (compact flash PC card only) -

Confirm the function version of the GOT on the rating plate at the back of the GOT.

Since the A956WGOT does not have a function version, the compact flash PC card can be used independently of the function version.

GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL

MODEL A970GOT-TBA

A

IN 100-240VAC 50/60Hz

POWER MAX 115VA DATE 0010 AP

LISTED 80M1

IND. CONT. EQ.

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

MADE IN JAPAN BD992C091H01

Function version

The flash PC card available on the market cannot be used with the GOT whose function version is not given here.

Production date

The products of function version A have been applied since Oct., 2000

Rating Plate

4: The flash PC card (A9GTMEM-10MF/20MF/40MF) can be used only when the following conditions are satisfied.

Usable GOTs

A985GOT-TBA, A985GOT-TBD, A975GOT-TBA-B, A975GOT-TBD-B,

A970GOT-TBA-B, A970GOT-TBD-B, A970GOT-LBA, A970GOT-LBD

A975GOT-TBA, A975GOT-TBD, A970GOT-TBA, A970GOT-TBD,

A970GOT-SBA, A970GOT-SBD, A960GOT-EBA, A960GOT-EBD

5: Cannot be used with the memory card interface unit.

Hardware version ROM_BIOS version

Version A or later

Version E or later

Version F or later

2 - 5 2 - 5


MELSOFT

(2) About PC card formatting

Use the PC card after formatting.

It may be formatted in either of the following ways.

(a) Using the personal computer (SRAM type, flash PC card)

Format the PC card on the personal computer that satisfies the following conditions.

1) The PCMCIA card slot is provided.

2) Windows

R installed.

95, Windows

R

98, Windows

R

Me or Windows

R

2000 has been

(Note that Windows NT

R

4.0 cannot format the PC card.)

POINT

• The PC card used with the GOT should be formatted in either of the following systems.

• SRAM type PC card : FAT16

• Flash PC card : FAT16, FAT32

• To make the SRAM type PC card recognized by Windows

R config.sys must be added to the description.

For details, enter "SRAM" and keyword in Help of Windows

R and refer to the contents.

95 or Windows

R

95 or Windows

R

98,

98,

(b) Using the self-diagnostics (memory card check) of the utility menu

This method is valid for the SRAM type PC card only.

This method is fewer in the number of object files that may be saved than the method using the personal computer.

For details of the utility menu, refer to the GOT-A900 Series Operating

Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Compatible Extended •

Option Functions).

(3) About the number of files that may be saved

There are the following upper limits to the number of object files that may be saved according to the memory capacity of the PC card.

Memory Capacity of PC

Card

1M

2M

4M

16M (A9GTMEM-10MF)

32M (A9GTMEM-20MF)

48M (A9GTMEM-40MF)

Number of Files

Total of recipe, alarm history and report files

Total of all files 1

Max. 128 files

Max. 256 files

Max. 512 files

Max. 2025 files

(512 bytes/file)

Max. 4075 files

(512 bytes/file)

Max. 2041 files

(2048 bytes/file)

Max. 2541 files

(4096 bytes/file)

Max. 9740 files

(2048 bytes/file)

Max. 19497 files

(2048 bytes/file)

1: Indicates the maximum number of files that can be stored when the file size is as indicated in the parentheses.

For example, when data of 3072 bytes is written to the above 4M PC card, the data occupies two files and are stored there since the data exceeds the parenthesized value (2048).

As a result, the remaining number of files where data can be written is 2039.

2 - 6 2 - 6

3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER

MELSOFT

CHAPTER3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER

3.1 Screen Configuration and Various Tools

(1) Title bar

This section describes screen configuration and various tools.

(2) Menu bar

(12) Help

(4) Toolbar (Main)

(5) Toolbar (View)

(6) Toolbar

(7) Toolbar (Edit)

(1) Title bar

(10) Template

(11) Tool palette

3

(8) Toolbar (Draw)

(9) Status bar

(3) Drop-down menu

3 - 1 3 - 1

3


MELSOFT

(1) Title bar

The screen title is displayed.

Move the cursor to the title bar. You can drag the screen to the desired position.

The GT Designer has the application window title bar and the screen title bar.

The title is displayed.

The screen enlarges or shrinks.

The screen size can be changed or the screen can be closed.

The screen can be minimized.

Click here to close the screen.

(2) Menu bar

Menu names that can be used on the GT Designer are displayed.

Select a menu and a dropdown menu appears. Then, various functions can be selected from this menu.

(3) Dropdown menu

Function names that can be used on the GT Designer are displayed.

If " " is displayed at the right end of the dropdown menu, subsequent dropdown menu of the function is displayed.

If "..." is displayed on the function name, move the cursor to the function and click it. The set dialog box appears.

Dropdown menu is displayed.

Select this and the dialog box appears.

3 - 2 3 - 2


MELSOFT

(4) Toolbar (Main)

This is where the basic items assigned on the menu bar appear as buttons. Move the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding function.

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20)

Names of tool buttons

1) New project

2) Open project

3) Save project

4) New screen

5) Load screen

6) Save screen

7) Cut

8) Copy

9) Paste

10) Preview

11) Switching edit screen

12) Open and display closed screen (for switching edit screen)

13) Object list screen display

14) Device list screen display

15) Comment edit

16) Tool palette display

17) Template display

18) Panelkit display

19) Figure and object editing cursor

20) Template placing cursor

(5) Toolbar (View)

This is where the items (moving distance, pattern, etc.) assigned on the menu bar appear as buttons.

Moving the cursor onto " " and clicking it opens the drop-down menu of the corresponding item.

Move the cursor to the attribute you want to change and click it to perform the corresponding function.

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10)

1) Setting cursor moving distance

2) Enlarging screen

3) Setting grid color

4) Grid distance

5) Switching ON/OFF object functions

6) Setting screen display data (object

ID, device)

7) Setting screen background color

8) Setting screen background color pattern

9) Setting screen color pattern

10) Switching screen-drawn target

(GOT-F900 series only)

3 - 3 3 - 3


MELSOFT

(6) Toolbar (Figure • Object)

This is where the figure/object setting items laid out in the tool palette appear as buttons.

Move the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding function.

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25) 26) 27) 28) 29) 30)


1) Line

2) Line freedom

3) Rectangle

4) Polygon

5) Circle

6) Arc

7) Sector

8) Scale

9) Text

10) Paint

11) Insert BMP format file

12) Insert DXF format file

13) Numerical display function

14) Data list display function

15) ASCII display function

16) Clock display function

17) Comment display function

18) Alarm history display function

19) Alarm list display function

20) Part display function

21) Part movement display function

22) Lamp display function

23) Panel meter display function

24) Line/trend/bar graph display function

25) Statistics graph display function

26) Scatter chart display function

27) Level display function

28) Touch key function

29) Numerical input function

30) ASCII input function

(7) Toolbar (Edit)

This is where the figure editing items assigned on the menu bar appear as buttons.

Move the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding function.

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19)


1) Bring to front

2) Send to back

3) Grouping

4) Canceling grouping

5) Horizontal flip

6) Vertical flip

7) 90° counterclockwise

8) Edit vertex

9) Align

10) Selection target (figure)

11) Selection target (object)

12) Selection target (figure+object)

13) Selection target (report line)

14) Report figure (line)

15) Report figure (text)

16) Report print object (numerical)

17) Report print object (comment)

18) Setting report header line

19) Setting report repeat line

3 - 4 3 - 4


MELSOFT

(8) Toolbar (Draw)

This is where the items (line style, pattern, text style, etc.) laid out in the tool palette appear as lists.

Moving the cursor " " onto any button and clicking it opens the drop-down menu of the corresponding item.

Move the cursor to the attribute you want to change and click it to perform the corresponding function.

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)

1) Set/change of line style

2) Set/change of line width

3) Set/change of line color

4) Set/change of painting pattern

5) Set/change of painting color

6) Set/change of painting background color

7) Set/change of character color

8) Set/change of character decoration

9) Set/change of character shade color

(9) Status bar

This is where the current operation status and cursor coordinates are displayed.

Current operation status is displayed.

Cursor coordinates are displayed.

(10) Template

This is provided to register and read the panelkit and parts easily.

Refer to Section 3.4 for details.

(11) Tool palette

This is where the buttons for setting figures, objects and so on are displayed.


(12) Help

This is where how to operate GT Designer, how to create/edit the GOT screen data, and other information are shown.


3 - 5 3 - 5


MELSOFT

3.2 Menu Configuration

Project

Edit

View

This section describes the command list allocated on the menu bar and explains the details.

(1) GT Designer

New

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! New project data is created.

Open

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Existing file is read.

Close

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing file is closed.

Save

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing file is saved with project data.

Save as

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing file is saved as different name and editing continues.

Import File

Project

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Other project data is used for the project data in editing.

Bitmap

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

BMP format figure data is pasted on the screen.

Dxf

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! DXF format figure data is pasted on the screen.

GPP Comment

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

GX Developer device comment file to be read into the GT Designer is specified.

Print

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Setting data and screen image is output to printer and files.

Option

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation, display and communication environments are set.

Exit

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! GT Designer is ended.

Undo

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! The last operation for the data is cancelled and the previous data is maintained.

Cut

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Figures and objects are cut and stored in the clipboard.

Copy

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures, characters and objects are stored in the clipboard.

Paste

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Figures and objects stored in the clipboard are pasted.

Consecutive Copy

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures and objects are copied and pasted on the multiple editing screen.

Delete

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Edit Vertex

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Selected figures and objects are deleted.

Length of continuous line or lines designated by polygon is changed.

Object of Selection

Figure

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Only figures are edited.

Object

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Only objects are edited.

Figure and Object

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Figures and objects are edited.

Report line

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Report lines are edited.

Select All

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! All figures and objects are selected.

Group

Group

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures and objects are grouped.

Switch group

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Grouping of selected objects as a single object.

Ungroup

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Grouping of selected figures and objects is canceled.

Rotate/Flip

Flip Vertical

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures are flipped vertically.

Flip Horizontal

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures are flipped horizontally.

Rotate Left

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures are rotated to the left by 90

°

.

Align

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures and objects are aligned.

Stacking Order

Bring to Front

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures and objects are brought to front.

Send to Back

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Selected figures and objects are sent to back.

Attribute

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Attributes of selected figures and objects are changed.

Replace Devics

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! The set monitoring devices are replaced with other devices.

Replace Overlap Screen

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Overlap screen numbers are batch-changed.

Preview

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Screen details are displayed in monitoring image.

ON Image

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Screen details are displayed in ON.

Redisplay

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing screen is re-displayed.

Color Setting

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! 16 colors that are displayed on the color list are selected.

Device List

Screen

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Displays the device list used for each screen.

Project

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Displays the device list used for each project.

Object List

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Object list set in the screen is displayed.

Overlap Screen

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Option

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

3 - 6 3 - 6


MELSOFT

Draw

Report

Panelkit

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Reads, registers and deletes the panel kit.

Part

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Registers the part for the part display function and the part movement function.

Comment

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Registers the comment for the comment display function, the alarm list display function and the alarm history display function.

Draw Figure

Line

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Draws linear line.

Line Freeform

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Draws a continuous linear line.

Rectangle

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Draws a rectangle.

Polygon

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Draws a polygon.

Circle

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Draws a circle.

Arc/Sector

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Draws an arc/sector.

Scale

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Draws graduation.

Text

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Inputs characters.

Paint

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Paints a polygon or a closed area with selected pattern.

Data Display

Numerical Display

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Data List

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the numerical display function.

Sets the data list display function.

Ascii Display

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the ASCII display function.

Clock

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the clock display function.

Message Display

Comment

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the comment display function.

Alarm History

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the alarm history display function.

Alarm List

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the alarm list display function.

Animation Display

Part Display

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the part display function.

Part Movement

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the part movement function.

Part Move Route

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the part movement route.

Lamp

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the lamp display function.

Panelmeter

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the panel meter function.

Graph

Trend/Line/Bar

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the trend graph display function, the line graph display function and the bar graph display function.

Statistics

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the statistical graph function.

Scatter chart

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the scatter chart display function.

Level

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the level function.

Touch Key

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the touch key function.

Data Input

Numerical Input

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the numerical input function.

Ascii Input

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the ASCII input function.

Overlap Screen

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the overlap screen function.

Window Position

Overlap Window 1

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Overlap Window 2

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the window screen position for overlap window 1.

Sets the window screen position for overlap window 2.

Superimpose Window

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the window screen position for superimpose window.

Key Window

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the key window position.

Key Window Custom

Input Value Area

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the input value display area in the key window.

Input Range Area

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the input range display area in the key window.

Common

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Makes settings for the whole report function.

Parameter

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the parameters of each report screen.

Print Object

Number

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the value to be printed.

Comment

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the comment to be printed.

Line

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Draws the rules (rectangle).

Text

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Enters characters.

Header/Continue

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Specifies the header and repeated lines.

3 - 7 3 - 7


MELSOFT

Communication

Common

Screen

Help

Download (to GOT)

Monitor Data

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Downloads the created monitoring screen data to the GOT or the PC card.

Special Function/

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Downloads the special Function monitoring data/Motion Monitor data/

Motion/Servo Servo amplifier data to the GOT or the PC card.

amplifier Monitor Data

Upload (from GOT)

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Uploads the monitoring data stored in the GOT.

Install

OS

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Installs the OS on the GOT or the PC card.

ROM_BIOS

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Installs the ROM_BIOS on the GOT or the PC card.

Memory

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Displays or clears the memory.

Data Check

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Checks the number of monitoring data.

Option

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Title

Screen

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Project

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the titles and details for each base screen, window screen and report screen.

Registers the title and the ID number of the project data.

Switching Screen

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the base/window screen switching device.

Switching Station No.

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the station No. switching device.

Ethernet

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the monitor destination for Ethernet connection.

Gateway

Server

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Client

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Mail

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

FTP Server

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Sets the server function.

Sets the client function.

Sets the mail send function.

Sets the FTP server function.

Password

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the security function (password, etc.).

Hardcopy

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the hard copy function.

Operation Panel

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the operation panel function.

Barcode

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the bar code function.

Sampling

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the sampling function.

System Information

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the device to check the GOT operation status on the PLC CPU.

Time action

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the time action function.

Observe Status

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the status monitoring function.

Alarm History

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the alarm history function in common with projects.

Floating Alarm

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the alarm flow Alarm.

Recipe

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the recipe function in common with projects.

Print Format

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the print format used on the alarm history display function.

Sound

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the voice file (WAV format).

GOT/PC Type

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the GOT type for the created screen data and the PC type for connection.

Script

Project script setting

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Make project-based script setting.

Screen script setting

Make screen-based script setting.

Key Window Screen No.

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!Sets the screen used as a key window.

Auxiliary Setting

Screen

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Performs auxiliary setting for each screen.

Project

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Performs auxiliary setting for each project.

Update Script data

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Updates the script data read to GT Designer to the latest script data.

New Screen

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! New screen is created.

Load

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Designated screen is opened.

Clear

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Designated screen is closed.

Clear and Load

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing screen is closed and another screen is opened.

Store

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing screen is saved and editing continues.

Store As

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing screen No. is changed.

Screen Utilize/Delete

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Screen data is utilized/deleted in the editing project.

Change Size

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Editing screen size is changed.

Cascade

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! The current screens are displayed in cascade.

Tile

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! The current screens are displayed in tile.

Update

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Help which allows you to browse the updated additional function list.

Firstly

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Fist operation help learned in the step of GT Designer.

Figure

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation help for drawing figures.

Object

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation help for setting objects.

Transfer/Print

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation help for data transmission and printing.

About

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Version of installed GT Designer is displayed.

3 - 8 3 - 8


MELSOFT

Project

Start Conversion

Screen

Help

(2) GT Converter

Open

Option

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Designates the monitor screen data for GOT800 to be converted.

Conversion setting

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Set conversion options for converting Digital's package data into

GOT900 series data.

Folder of GT Designer

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Designates the folder having the execution file of the GT Designer to be started.

Execute GT Designer

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Starts the GT Designer.

Exit

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Ends the data GT Converter.

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Executes the conversion of the monitor screen data for GOT900.

Log display

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Displays the result of conversion to the monitor screen data for GOT900.

Help topics

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Operation help for the GT Converter.

About

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Displays the software version of the installed GT Converter.

File

Communication

Setting

Help

Project

Edit

Help

(3) GT Debugger

Open

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Opens the debugging file.

Close

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Closes the debugging file.

Save

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Saves the debugging file.

Save As

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Saves the current debugging file and editing continues.

Exit

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Ends the GT Debugger.

Start

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Starts communication with the GOT.

End

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Ends communication with the GOT.

Registration Device

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Registers device for debugging.

Delete Device

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Deletes registered device from device registration.

Option

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Sets the communication port and the communication speed.

Reference topics

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation help for GT Debugger.

About

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Displays software version of installed GT Debugger.

(4) GT Manager

Execute

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Exit

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Starts GT Designer.

Renumber

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Delete

.

Changes the drawing data screen number.

Ends the GT Manager.

Cut

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Cuts the selected drawing data and stores in the clipboard.

Copy

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Copies the selected drawing data and stores in the clipboard.

Paste

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Pastes the drawing data stored in the clipboard.

Reference topics

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Operation help of GT Manager.

About

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Displays software version of installed GT Manager.

3 - 9 3 - 9


3.3 Basic Operation of Dialog Box

MELSOFT

(1) Tab

(2) Command button

(3) List box

(4) Check box

(5) Radio button

(6) Text box

(7) Spin box

3 - 10 3 - 10


MELSOFT

(1) Tab

To change the tab, click ( ) where the setting item is displayed.

(2) Command button

OK

or

Cancel button for execution.

is available for the command button. Click the appropriate

(3) List box

Click to display the list for selection and click the desired item.

(4) Check box

To execute the item, click to put mark.

(5) Radio button

Click for the desired item.

(6) Text box

Input characters from the keyboard.

(7) Spin box

There are two cases; one is direct input of the value and the other is changing the value by clicking . To input the value directly, click the spin box and input the value from the keyboard.

To change the value by clicking and the value decreases.

, click and the value increases. Click

3 - 11 3 - 11


MELSOFT

3.4 Operation of Template

POINT

In the template function, Mitsubishi Electric Corp. owns the copyright for design of all parts, including 256 color BMP parts provided with the GT Designer.

Use of these parts is strictly prohibited for the purpose other than the GOT.

In the template function, figures or objects can be easily registered or pasted on the screen as parts (panelkit, parts).

A template has parts display area and tree display area.

(1) Parts/tree display area

(a) Parts display area

This displays parts (panelkit, parts) in the library registered in each folder

(parts library, panelkit, parts).

1)

3) 4) 5)

2)

6)

7)

8)

1) Displays the library name.

2) Click this to display or not display the panelkit name and the parts name.

3) Click this to delete the selected panelkit or parts.

4) Click this to change the registered number and the name of the selected panelkit or parts.

5) Select the figure or the object on the screen, and click it. It is then registered in the library as a panelkit or part.

6) Click this and the tree display area of the template appears.

7) Panelkit or parts are displayed.

8) Panelkit name or parts names are displayed.

POINTS

•

Panelkit in the part library folder cannot be deleted and their attributes cannot be changed.

•

Panelkit cannot be registered in the part library folder.

3 - 12 3 - 12


MELSOFT

(b) Tree display area

The library where the panelkit or parts on the parts display area is registered is displayed.

1) 2) 3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

1) Click this to create the library of the panelkit folder.

Up to 50 libraries can be created.

2) Click this to delete the library of the selected panelkit folder.

3) Click this to change the registered number and the name of the selected panelkit folder library.

4) Parts (not changed by user) provided by the GT Designer are registered.

Some parts in the parts library folder show objects and others show figures only. Reading and pasting of these parts allow easy setting of lamp figure or switch figure.

5) Figures and objects drawn by a user can be registered as panelkit.

6) A figure registered by a user can be registered as a part.

Parts registered in this step are used in the parts display function and the parts movement function.

7) Displays the library.

8) Click this to close the tree display area.

POINT

Only the panelkit folder library is used for creation, deletion and change of attribute.

3 - 13 3 - 13


MELSOFT

(2) Pasting method of parts

1) Bring up the tree display area and double click the name where the panelkit or parts for pasting is registered.

2) Click the desired panelkit or part on the parts display area.

3) Move the cursor to the position of pasting and click the mouse. The part is then pasted.

4) Perform either of the following operations:

<Continue pasting>

1) Hold down the [Ctrl] key and press the [C] key

( Ctrl C

).

2) Holding down the [Ctrl] key and pressing the

[V] key pastes the part (

Ctrl and move it to the pasting position.

V

). Drag

You can continue pasting by repeating the operations in step 2) and later.

<Change the attribute>

Right-click and click the [Attribute] menu.

3 - 14 3 - 14


MELSOFT

3.5 Operation of Tool Palette

Click each button to draw figures or to set objects.

Line attributes or figure painting pattern can be selected from the list box.

(Tool palette for GOT-A900 series) (Tool palette for GOT-F900 series)

(1) Cursor button

1) 2) 3) 4)

1) Panelkit 3) Cursor for placing template

2) Cursor for editing figure and object 4) Cursor for editing report range

(2) Figure drawing button

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10)

1) Line

2) Line Freeform

3) Rectangle

4) Polygon

5) Circle

6) Arc

7) Sector

11) 12) 13) 14)

8) Scale

9) Text

10) Paint

11) Report figure (line)

12) Report figure (text)

13) Insert BMP format file

14) Insert DXF format file

3 - 15 3 - 15


MELSOFT

(3) Object setting button

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10)

11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22)

1) Numerical display function

2) Data list display function

3) ASCII display function

4) Clock display function

5) Comment display function

6) Alarm history display function

7) Alarm list display function

8) Part display function

9) Part movement display function

10) Lamp display function

11) Panelmeter display function

12) Trend/Line/Bar graph display function

13) Statistics graph display function

14) Scatter chart display function

15) Level display function

16) Touch key function

17) Numerical input function

18) ASCII input function

19) Print object (numerical) function

20) Print object (comment) function

21) Setting report header line

22) Setting report repeat line

(4) Attribute setting list box

1) 2) 3)

4) 5) 6)

7) 8) 9)

1) Set/change of line style

2) Set/change of line width

3) Set/change of line color

4) Set/change of painting pattern

5) Set/change of painting color

6) Set/change of painting background color

7) Set/change of character color

8) Set/change of character decoration

9) Set/change of character shade color

3 - 16 3 - 16


MELSOFT

3.6 How to Use Help

Help is installed together with the corresponding software of GT Designer Version5.

Help includes not only how to operate the corresponding software but also GOT screen data creating/editing methods and other information.

Example: When checking the [Numeral] item of the Numerical Display dialog box

(Basic tab setting)

<GT Designer setting dialog box>

Check

[Numeral] item.

1) Enter keyword.

Explanation of "Numeral" item in setting item list appears.

2) Choose display item from Topics Found.

3) If there are multiple [Numeral] items in

Topics Found, those multiple candidates

appear.

Here, choose "Numeral" in

[Numerical Display] dialog box.

4) Display

3 - 17 3 - 17


MELSOFT

3.6.1 Help menu makeup

The help menu is made up as described below.

(1) GT Designer help

Update..................................Lists the additional functions made available by updating GT Designer to Version5.

Firstly....................................Describes the screen and project operations and common setting items.

Figure ...................................Describes figure drawing and editing operations.

Object ...................................Describes object setting and editing operations.

Transfer/Print .......................Describes information required for data transfer and download/upload operations.

About ....................................Describes the version information of GT Designer.

(2) GT Converter/GT Debugger/GT Manager help

Reference topics ..................Describes operations for GT Converter/GT

Debugger/GT Manager.

About ....................................Describes the version information of GT

Converter/GT Debugger/GT Manager.

3.6.2 Printing the help screen

(1) Printing from the contents

Click or of the item to be printed to make selection, and click the Print button.

(2) Printing the current topic

Click the

Print

button.

3 - 18 3 - 18

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

CHAPTER4 SPECIFICATION

(1) Table at top right of each section

The table at top right of each section indicates the following meanings.

GOT Type

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

: Function available, : Function unavailable

4.1 Types and Number of Screens Created


When the GOT-A900 series is used, the base screen, window screen (two display methods: overlap window and superimpose window) and report screen are created.

When the GOT-F900 series is used, the base screen and key window screen (display method: overlap window) can be created.

4

Close key Movement key window screen

Touch the close key of the overlap window screen and the overlap window closes.

To move the overlap window screen, touch the movement key and then touch the desired position for movement.

Base screen

4.1.1 Base screen


Base screen

A

This screen is the basic display of the GOT. Each screen operates as an individual screen.

Max. Number of Screens

Registerable

Screen Number

B

GOT Type

GT SoftGOT

GT SoftGOT

A985GOT/ GT SoftGOT

A97 GOT/ GT SoftGOT

A960GOT

A956WGOT

A95 GOT

F940WGOT

F940GOT

F930GOT

F920GOT

A (Dots)

1280

1024

800

640

480

320

480

320

240

128

B (Dots)

1024

768

600

480

400

234

240

234

240

80

64

4096

500

1 to 32767

1 to 500

4 - 1 4 - 1

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4

4.1.2 Window screen


POINT

The GOT-F900 series (except the F920GOT) allows only the key window to be created.

There are 2 window screens; the overlap window that pops up on the base screen, and the superimpose window that compose contents.

Up to 1024 window screens can be created. (Screen numbers can be registered from

1 to 32767.)

(1) Setting range of screen size

GOT Type

Base Screen

(Horizontal

×

vertical dots)

Window Screen

(Horizontal

×

vertical dots)

Maximum Minimum

GT SoftGOT

A985GOT/GT SoftGOT

A97 GOT/GT SoftGOT

A960GOT

A956WGOT

A95 GOT

F940WGOT

F940GOT

F930GOT

F920GOT

1280

×

1024/1024

×

768

800

×

600

640

×

480

640

×

400

480

×

234

320

×

240

480

×

234

320

×

240

240

×

80

128

×

64

800

×

480

640

×

400

480

×

234

320

×

240

480

×

234

320

×

240

240

×

80

94

×

81

For the overlap window, the above values indicate the maximum setting range applicable when the close and move keys are hidden.

When the close and move keys are displayed, the maximum setting range is as follows.

When using GT SoftGOT/A985GOT: Maximum width 798

×

length 463 dots

When using A97 /960GOT: Maximum width 638

×

length 383 dots

When using A956WGOT: Maximum width 478

×

length 217 dots

When using A95 GOT: Maximum width 318

×

length 223 dots

When using F940WGOT, F940GOT and F930GOT: Functions as a key window.

Setting range for the width : Minimum 94 dots - Maximum 800 dots

Setting range for the length : Minimum 81 dots - Maximum 480 dots

POINT

The initial value of the window screen size is set as follows:

•

When using model other than A95 GOT: Width 318

×

Length 176 dots

•

When using A95 GOT/A956WGOT: Width 190

×

Length 126 dots

4 - 2 4 - 2

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(2) Display method of window screen

A window screen with the value stored in the window switching device is displayed at the designated display position.

(Set the display position by directly specifying it. Alternatively, it may be specified by the value of the specified device. (Overlap window only))

The window screen is closed when you touch the close button (overlap window only) or the window switching device turns to "0".

(Ex.) Overlap window 1

Screen switching device = 3

Overlap window 1 display position

Window screen 3

Overlap window is displayed at the left top of the window position.

(3) Movement of window screen (Overlap window only)

Touch the movement bar on the window screen to go into the movement mode.

Touch the movement bar again at the desired position for movement.

Movement key area

Touch the movement key area of the window screen.

The window screen moves to the desired position where touched.

4 - 3 4 - 3

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(4) Overlap window

(a) Display type of overlap window

The overlap window has a close (close screen) and a move bar (move screen) bar to perform manual window operation.

You can make setting to display or hide these close key and move bar.

<Close and move keys displayed> <Close and move keys hidden>

Overlap window screen

Overlap window screen

Screen can be moved or closed manually.

Screen cannot be moved.

Set screen switching device value to close.

(b) When overlap windows are overlaid

Two overlap windows can be displayed together.

When two windows are overlaid, touch the lower hidden window to bring it up.


Overlap window 2

Overlap window 1

Overlap wind

Overlap window 2


Touch the lower hidden window screen.

The lower window comes up.

(c) Relationships between overlap windows and touch keys

Touch keys are invalid around overlap windows in the area equivalent to one key (16 dots).

Therefore, note that touch keys hidden under the overlap windows are invalid if pressed.

Overlap window 1

: Valid touch key area

: Invalid touch key area

Overlap window 2

Single key-equivalent touch key invalid areas

4 - 4 4 - 4

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

The surrounding single key (16 dots)-equivalent touch key invalid areas may be eliminated only when the following conditions are satisfied.

•

The close and move keys are set to be hidden.

•

The window size is set to a multiple of 16 dots.

Overlap window 1

: Valid touch key area

: Invalid touch key area

Overlap window 2

(5) Superimpose window

Retrieve one window screen on the base screen for composition. It can be used as part of the base screen.

While the superimpose window is displayed, changing the window screen number can change the part of the base screen dynamically.

(Ex. 1) Add color to line A where abnormality has occurred.

Operation for abnormality in line A Store 3 in the screen switching device

Figure of window screen number 3

A Current

production

quantity:300

B Current

production quantity:256

Abnormality

Set "3" in the screen switching device of the superimpose window.

A Abnormality

B Current

production quantity:256

POINT

Note that the touch key underneath the overlap window does not function properly.

4 - 5 4 - 5

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

Operation of each button

(Ex. 2) Switch the display method of manufacturing quantity with buttons.

Button A

Button B

Button C

Display the window screen of screen number 1



Main screen

A

B

C

Superimpose window display position

Window screen

Window screen number

Screen

Numerical display

1

Current production quantity

A line 135Unit

B line 89Unit

C line 106Unit

Graph display

5


Statistical display

10


A B C

1) Touch button A to display window screen 1.

A

B

C

+


A line 135Unit

B line 89Unit

C line 106Unit

=

A

B

C


A line 135Unit

B line 89Unit

C line 106Unit

2) Touch button B to display window screen 5.


A

B

C

+

A B C

=

3) Touch button C to display window screen 10.


A

B

C

+

=

A

B

C


A B C

A

B

C


4 - 6 4 - 6

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

Operation of each button

Main screen

(Ex. 3) Switch the display/non-display of buttons for additional product option parts.

Button A

Button B

Button C




Superimpose window display position

The added options are available.

Name

A

A B

C

B

C

Window screen

Window screen number

Screen

Options of product A

3

Options of product B

7

Options of product C

10

E

G

I

D

F

G

I

H

J

D

F

H

1) Touch button A to display window screen 3.

Name

A

B

C


A

C

B

+

E

G

I

D

F

=

Name

A

B

C


A

C

E

G

I

B

D

F

2) Touch button B to display window screen 7.

Name

A

B

C


A

C

B

+

G

I

H

J

=

Name

A

B

C


A

C

B

G

I

H

J

3) Touch button C to display window screen 10.

Name

A

B

C


A

C

B

+

D

F

H

=

Name

A

B

C


A

C

F

H

B

D

4 - 7 4 - 7

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(6) Precautions for display of the superimpose window screen

If the superimpose window screen overlaps the base screen, be careful for the following points:

(a) Contents of each screen overlaps

1) Figure data

Figures of superimpose window screen are brought to front.

+

Superimpose window screen

Base screen Screen display

2) Object data

The object with changed values out of objects in the base screen and the Superimpose Window screen is brought to front.

12345

12345

000001

+

000001

Base screen


Screen display

When the value of the object changes, the object with changed value is brought to front.

3) Touch key

The touch key of the superimpose window screen is brought to front.

If the touch keys overlap, both touch key functions of the base screen and the superimpose window screen become effective when touched.

Base screen

+


Screen display

POINT

If the touch keys of the superimpose window screen and the base screen overlap and the touch keys are briefly touched, only the touch key of the superimpose window screen may function.

4 - 8 4 - 8

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(b) If the superimpose window screen is displayed out of the base screen

With the reference point "+" at the upper left for the superimpose window screen, the limited area can be displayed on the base screen.

+

Base screen


Screen display

(not displayed for touch key)

(c) If only one object that can be displayed in one screen overlaps

If only one object, such as data list or alarm list, that can be displayed in one screen overlaps, the objects can be displayed for the number of screens. However, the functions are limited and the display may not be correct.

4 - 9 4 - 9

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.1.3 About the report screen


POINT

The A950 handy GOT / GOT-F900 series has no report screens.

The report screen is used to set the format and layout of data printed by a printer with the report function of the GOT.

Hence, only the functions usable with the report function may be set on this screen.

For details of the report function, refer to Section 6.7.

(1) Screen size setting range

Left space

Top space

Report screen lines

Format

Item lines columns

Margins

Top space

Left space

Setting Range

1 to 127

1 to 255

0 to 30

0 to 254

Number of screens 1 to 8 columns

(2) Setting for each printer

The screen size (print format settings) of the report screen must be changed according to the printable area of the printer.

You can use the following expressions to find the settings.

For more information on the print format settings, refer to the GT Designer Help.

•

To find the maximum setting of the columns + left space (width)

(Printable area width of printer [mm])

÷

25.4

×

15

Example) Printable area width of printer is "204mm"

204

÷

25.4

×

15 = 120.47

…

Hence, set the columns + left space to within 120 in the GOT print format setting.

•

To find the maximum setting of the lines + top space (height)

(Printable area height of printer [mm])

÷

4.23

Example) Printable area height of printer is "280mm"

280

÷

4.23 = 66.19

…

Hence, set the lines + top space to within 66 in the GOT print format setting.

POINT

The printable area of the printer changes with the printer used.

For details of the specifications, refer to the instruction manual of the printer used.

4 - 10 4 - 10

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.1.4 Video window


A video window displays a picture taken with a video camera.

The video window has two different modes: the full mode in which a picture taken with a video camera is displayed as-is; and the clip mode in which part of a picture taken with a video camera is displayed.

Since video windows are independent of other screens, the base screen can be switched with the video windows open.

This section explains video windows.

Refer to Section 4.1.6 for video window settings.

A 1254

B 348

Video camera

(Cannnel.No1)

Video camera

(Cannnel.No2)

Video camera

(Cannnel.No3)

Video camera

(Cannnel.No4)

Video window4

Video window3

Video window2

Video window1

POINT

•

Video windows may be used only when the A9GT-80V4/A9GT-80V4R1 is fitted to the A985GOT-V.

•

No objects can be placed in a video window.

•

The video signal format (NTSC/PAL) specified on the GOT side should be the same as the format of the video signal input from a video camera.

If the video signal formats are different, a video picture may not be displayed properly.

Refer to Section 4.1.6 for the way to choose the video signal format.

•

A video picture is not displayed if a video signal is not input to the specified channel due to cable disconnection, camera power-off or the like.

4 - 11 4 - 11

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(1) How to display the video window

(a) When the data of the device set as the "Channel No." turns to any of 1 to 4, the corresponding video window appears in the then states (Channel No.,

Size, Coordinates (X axis, Y axis)) of the monitored devices set on GT

Designer.

(Example) When the picture of channel No. 1 is displayed in video window 1

•

Channel No.: D105

•

Size: D106

•

•

X axis: D107

Y axis: D108

D105 0 1 (Channel No.)

D106 0 0 (Size : 640 480)

D107 0 32 (X axis)

D108 0 32 (Y axis)

Video window 1 is displayed with the specified channel, size and coordinates.

POINT

There is no close button for a video window.

Use the device (reset the channel No. to 0) to close the video window.

(2) Video window display position

You can specify a video window display position within the following range.

A video window appears at the specified coordinates.

The video window can be placed on the base screen or in overlap window 1.

A

As the display coordinates, specify the coordinates at top left of the video window.

Type

Base screen

Overlap window 1

A [dots]

0 to 784

0 to 784

B [dots]

0 to 584

0 to 464

B

Video window

4 - 12 4 - 12

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

POINT

•

Set the display coordinates as multiples of 16 (dots).

If you set the coordinates which are not multiples of 16, they are automatically changed to multiples of 16.

•

If the video window displayed on the base screen overflow the GOT screen, it is automatically placed within the GOT screen.

•

If the video window displayed in overlap window 1 overflows the window screen, its video picture does not appear.

•

The following indication and windows are displayed in front of video windows.

Floating alarm function, key window, comment window, overlap windows (1, 2), test window

(The priorities of the overlap windows (1, 2) and test window can be changed by making setting.)

(3) How to move video windows

There is no move button for a video window.

To move a video window, change the device values used to set the coordinates

(X axis, Y axis).

In case more then two video windows are moved frequently, there might be no response to move by the overlap window touch.

(4) When placing video window in overlap window

(a) A video window may be placed only in the overlap window 1.

(b) All windows displayed in front of the overlap window 1 are shown in front of the video window.

(c) The video window placed in the overlap window 1 is transparency -processed automatically.

(Refer to (8) for the transparency processing.)

(d) When the screen specified to place the video window is changed from the base screen to the overlap window 1 while the video window is being displayed, the video window is closed once and then opened in the overlap window 1.

4 - 13 4 - 13

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(5) Full mode

In the full mode, the picture taken with a video camera is displayed on the GOT as-is.

When the full mode is used, up to four video windows can be displayed simultaneously.

A single video window can display pictures by changing one channel number to another.

Video picture

Video-taken picture appears as-is.

(a) Resolution (effective pixels) and size

In the full mode, a video window can be displayed at the resolution of

720×480 dots or 640×480 dots, and its size can be changed in three steps

(100%, 50%, 25%) at each resolution.

Resolution

Size

At 100%

At 50%

At 25%

At 720×480 dots

720×480 dots

360×240 dots

180×120 dots

*1 Set the same resolution to four channels.

At 640×480 dots

640×480 dots

320×240 dots

160×120 dots

(b) Size change

The video window size can be changed in the following procedure.

1) Touch the video window.

(You can disable size change through touching operation by turning b4 of “Video/RGB Common” device on. (See Section 4.6.1, item (2).))

Size : 25%

Size : 50% Size : 100%

Touching operation changes the video window size as described below.

<Size change>

Size : 25%

Size : 50%

Size : 50%

Size : 100%

For example, when a video window is displayed at the size of 25%, the first touching operation changes the size to 50%.

When the video window is displayed at

50%, the first touching operation always changes the size to 100%.

4 - 14 4 - 14

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

2) Change the value of the device where the size has been set.

D105 1 1 1 (Channel No.)

D106 2 1 0 (Size)

D107 32 32 32 (X axis)

D108 32 32 32 (Y axis)

Size : 25% Size : 50% Size : 100%

(c) When multiple video windows are displayed

1) When opened, the video window appears in the forefront.

2) When the coordinates and/or size of the video window is changed, a new video window appears in the forefront.

3) When video windows are overlapping, touching the lower video window shows it in the forefront.

4) When you attempt to display the picture of the same channel in multiple video windows, it appears only in the last specified video window and the other windows are displayed blue.

(d) Touch key disable areas around the video window

The displayed video windows of specific sizes have touch key disable areas as indicated below.

Video widow

Right

Size

At 100%

At 50%

At 25%

Bottom

At 720×480 dots

720×480 dots

(No disable areas)

360×240 dots

180×120 dots

(Disable area: 12 dots at right, 8 dots at bottom)

Resolution

At 640×480 dots

640×480 dots

(No disable areas)

320×240 dots

(No disable areas)

160×120 dots

(Disable area: 8 dots at bottom)

4 - 15 4 - 15

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

POINT

•

When touching operation is performed to return the size to that at the video window opening time, the display position also returns to the position at the video window opening time.

•

The resolution of the video picture input from a video camera should be the same as that of the video window displayed on the GOT.

The following cases will be happened due to different resolutions.

(Example 1)

Video picture resolution: 720 480 dots

Video window resolution: 640 480 dots

Video window

(640 480 dots)

Video picture

(720 480 dots)

(Example 2)

Video picture resolution: 640 480 dots

Video window resolution: 720 480 dots

Video window

(720 180 dots)

Video picture

(640 480 dots)

Not displayed partly.

Not displayed correctly.

Refer to Section 4.1.6 for the way to select the video window resolution.

4 - 16 4 - 16

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(6) Clip mode

In the clip mode, the specified part (clip area) of the picture taken with a video camera is displayed on the GOT in full size.

The display area of the video window can be decreased without the displayed picture being reduced.

In the clip mode, you can use only video window 1 and cannot use video windows 2 to 4.

Specified part

Video picture

Specified video picture part appears as-is.

(a) Clip area selection

As a clip area, specify the coordinates at top left of the part you want to display from the video picture and set the height (64 to 720 dots) and width

(64 to 480 dots).

Set coordinates at top left of part to be displayed in clip mode

Set width.

Set height.

Video picture

POINT

•

In the clip mode, video windows 2 to 4 are closed and cannot be opened.

•

In the clip mode, the displayed video window will not operate if touched.

•

When video windows 2 to 4 are open, changing the full mode to the clip mode forces them to be closed.

•

When the clip mode is returned to the full mode, video windows 2 to 4 are displayed in accordance with the specified channel numbers, coordinates and sizes valid at that point.

4 - 17 4 - 17

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(7) Freeze-frame picture

The video picture displayed in the full or clip mode can be changed to a freezeframe picture.

When two or more video windows are displayed in the full mode, all of them are changed to freeze-frame pictures.

(Moving picture/freeze-frame picture selection bit ON: b5)

Turning the bit on changes moving picture into freeze-frame picture.

D10

...

b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

OFF ON

POINT

•

While the screen is still, touching operation for a video window and switching from the PLC are invalid.

Hence, note that the following operations are disabled while the screen is still.

Window channel changing, size changing, display position changing, closing and opening of video window

•

If the picture of the video window placed in the overlap window is changed to a freeze-frame picture, moving the overlap window causes the video picture to be hidden.

(8) Transparency processing

You can specify the through color to display the objects and figures located under a video window.

You can choose either of "Other than specified color is transmitted through" and

"Specified color is transmitted through".

When two or more video windows are displayed, all windows are transmissionprocessed.

(Transmission processing selection bit ON: b2)

Turning the bit on performs transmission processing.

(Thru color specifying method selection bit ON: b3)

Turning the bit on causes the specified color to be transmitted through.

D10

...............

b3 b2 b1 b0

OFF ON

OFF ON

A FED

B CDE

A FED

B CDE

Figures and objects of specified color can be transmitted through.

Through color specifying method selection bit: b3

OFF

(Other than specified color is transmitted through)

ON

(Specified color is transmitted through)

Through

Color

Display

0 (black)

0 (black)

Figures and objects of colors other than black are displayed on the video window.

Black figures and objects are displayed on the video window.

POINT

•

The touch keys and numerical/ASCII input function under video windows are made usable by performing transparency processing.

•

When placing a video window in the overlap window 1, transparency processing is performed automatically if the transmission processing selection bit (b2) is OFF.

4 - 18 4 - 18

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(9) Examples of using video windows

(a) Examples of using full mode

1) A single video window is used to display channels 1 to 4, and a touch key is used to switch between the channels.

Cannel1

Cannel2

Cannel3

Cannel4

Device

D100

Setting

Set video input signal.

(NTSC or PAL)

Device

D106

D107

Setting

Change from 1 to 2 to 3 to 4, then again from 1 ...

(Channel No.)

0 (Size)

Device

D108

D109

32 (X axis)

32 (Y axis)

Setting

2) While channel 1 is being displayed, change the video window size.

Device

D100

Setting


(NTSC or PAL)

Size2

Size1

Device

D106

D107

Setting

1 (Channel No.)

2

→

1

→

0 (Size)

Size0

Device

D108

D109

32 (X axis)

64 (Y axis)

Setting

3) While channels 1 to 4 are being displayed in four video windows, change the size of video window 3.

Device Setting

D100


(NTSC or PAL)

Device

D106

D107

D108

D109

D110

D111

D112

D113

Setting

1 (Channel No.)

2 (Size)

32 (X axis)

480 (Y axis)

2 (Channel No.)

2 (Size)

208 (X axis)

480 (Y axis)

Device

D114

D115

D116

D117

D118

D119

D120

D121

Setting

3 (Channel No.)

2

→

0 (Size)

384

→

32 (X axis)

480

→

0 (Y axis)

4 (Channel No.)

2 (Size)

560 (X axis)

480 (Y axis)

4 - 19 4 - 19

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4) While channels 1 to 4 are being displayed in four video windows, change the video window sizes using the touch key function and script function.

Device Setting

D100


(NTSC or PAL)

Device

D106

D107

D108

D109

D110

D111

D112

D113

Setting

1 (Channel No.)

2

→

0

→

2 (Size)

32 (X axis)

480

→

0

→

480 (Y axis)

2 (Channel No.)

2

→

0 (Size)

208

→

32 (X axis)

480

→

0 (Y axis)

Device

D114

D115

D116

D117

D118

D119

D120

D121

Setting

3 (Channel No.)

2 (Size)

384 (X axis)

480 (Y axis)

4 (Channel No.)

2 (Size)

560 (X axis)

480 (Y axis)

Create a script which repeats the following every time the touch key is pressed.

1) Window 1: Small to large

2) Window 1: Large to small

Window 2: Small to large

3) Window 2: Large to small

Window 3: Small to large

(b) Examples of using clip mode

1) Using touch keys, change the clip coordinates of a video picture.

X

Y

70

50

Video picture

Specify clip coordinates with touch keys.

Device

D100

D101

D102

D103

D104

Setting

Clip mode selection

70

→

75

→

80

(X axis to be clipped)

50

→

55

→

60

(Y axis to be clipped)

256 (Clip width)

256 (Clip height)

Device

D105

D106

Setting

1 (Channel No.)

0 (Size)

D107

D108

—

112 (X axis)

112 (Y axis)

—

4 - 20 4 - 20

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.1.5 RGB screen


The picture of a personal computer can be displayed on the GOT.

An RGB screen allows SVGA (800×600 dots) or VGA (640×480 dots) to be selected.

This section explains the RGB screen functions.

Refer to Section 4.1.6 for RGB screen settings.

POINT

An RGB screen is usable only when the A9GT-80R1/A9GT-80V4R1 is fitted to the

A985GOT-V.

(1) How to display RGB screen

(a) An RGB screen is switched from/to the GOT monitor screen depending on whether the monitored RGB screen display/hide selection bit (bit device in word device) set on GT Designer is on or off.

(RGB screen display/hide selection bit ON: b15)

Turning the bit on changes the GOT monitor screen to the RGB screen.

D10

OFF ON

A FED

B CDE

RGB screen Monitor screen

(b) You can touch the RGB screen to return to the monitor screen.

This function can be selected from among the following six different operations.

FULL L-UP L-DW

Touching any place in the window switches it to the monitor screen.

R-UP

The window changes to the monitor screen only when you touch its top left.

R-DW

The window changes to the monitor screen only when you touch its bottom left.

NONE

The window changes to the monitor screen only when you touch its top right.

The window changes to the monitor screen only when you touch its bottom right.

The window does not change to the monitor screen if you touch it.

4 - 21 4 - 21

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

1) Instructions for touching the RGB screen to change it to the GOT monitor screen

When you have touched the RGB screen to change it to the GOT monitor screen, the RGB screen display/hide selection bit does not turn off.

Hence, you cannot change the GOT monitor screen to the RGB screen again since the RGB screen display/hide selection bit is on.

When you have touched the RGB screen to change it to the GOT monitor screen, turn off the RGB screen display/hide selection bit.

Using the script function allows you to turn off the RGB screen display/hide selection bit when you have touched the RGB screen to change it to the GOT monitor screen.

The following is the script function setting example to turn off the RGB screen display/hide selection bit.

Setting Item Settings

Set the Switching screen Video/RGB Common Device: D100 (Selection of RGB screen display or hide bit: D100.b15)

Set the System information Write Device: Set 15 points starting from D33.

Type: Project Script

Trigger Type: Ordinary

Set the Script Function

Data Format: Signed BIN 16/32bit

}

Script description: if(([b:D100.b15]==ON)

&&([w:D35]==-1)){

[b:TMP0000.b0]=ON ;

} else{ if([b:TMP0000.b0]==ON){

[b:D100.b15]=OFF ;

}

[b:TMP0000.b0]=OFF ;

//When the RGB screen display/hide selection bit is on and

// -1 (RGB screen) is in Base screen number storage area of System information

//The RGB screen displaying flag is turned on

//When the RGB screen is changed to the monitor screen

//the RGB screen display/hide selection bit is turned off

//the RGB screen displaying flag is turned off

POINT

•

When VGA (640×480 dots) is used, the margins are displayed black since the resolution differs from that of the A985GOT-V (800×600 dots).

•

When offline (e.g. when monitor screen data is downloaded from GT Designer), the GOT shows a screen.

If the RGB screen display controlling bit is on when the GOT is switched from offline to online, the monitor screen is displayed once and the RGB screen is then displayed.

•

Each object operates while the RGB screen is being displayed.

•

While the RGB screen is being displayed, the RGB screen cannot be printed or a BMP file cannot be saved on a PC card if you use the hardcopy function.

4 - 22 4 - 22

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(2) Screen save for RGB screen

To use the screen save function while the RGB screen is being displayed, the display power-saving function of the personal computer must be active.

If it is inactive, the screen save function set on the GOT is invalid.

Screen save for an RGB screen is performed in the following sequence.

(Only when human sensor setting is made)

The above message appears after detection of display power-saving status of personal computer.

The display (message) remains unchanged after elapse of human sensor off delay time set on

GOT side.

After elapse of screen save time set on GOT side,

GOT enters screen save status.

POINT

•

When the GOT monitor screen is being displayed, screen save operates independently of whether the display power-saving function of the personal computer is active or not.

For details of the GOT screen save function, refer to the GOT-A900 series operating manual (GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5 compatible

Extended

•

Option Functions Manual).

•

If the RGB signal is not input to the GOT due to cable disconnection or the like, the screen displayed is the same as in the power saving status of the personal computer display.

4.1.6 Video window/RGB screen settings

The video window/RGB screen operates in accordance with the monitored devices set on GT Designer.

The following table indicates the contents of the devices set on GT Designer.

(1) Contents of devices set on GT Designer

Item

Video/RGB

Common 1

Thru Color

Clip

Video Window 1 2

0 (Black) to 255 (White)

X axis

Y axis

Width

Height

Channel No.

Size

X axis

Y axis

3

Description Setting Details

Device used to control the operation of a video or RGB screen.

(Refer to (2) for device contents.)

Specify the color for transparency processing.

Specify the X axis where a video picture will be clipped in the clip mode.

Specify the Y axis where a video picture will be clipped in the clip mode.

Specify the width of the clipped picture.

Specify the height of the clipped picture.

Specify the channel number to be displayed in video window 1. (0 to 4)

Specify the size of the video window.

(0: 100% display, 1: 50% display, 2: 25% display)

Specify the X axis of the video window to be displayed on the base screen or in overlap window 1.

Specify the Y axis of the video window to be displayed on the base screen or in overlap window 1.

1 When an RGB screen is displayed, the devices other than "Video/RGB Common" cannot be set.

2 Set video windows 2 to 4 to set multiple video windows.(Settings are the same as those of video window 1.)

3 When the display size is changed by PLC CPU, the set device value will be altered.

When the display size is changed by touching the video window, the set device value will not be altered.When the size on the display is changed by the video window touch, the device will not be altered.

4 - 23 4 - 23

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(2) Contents of "Video/RGB Common" device

The device specified as "Video/RGB Common" stores the following data.

Turning on/off the corresponding bit device controls the operation of the video/RGB screen.

Bit

Position

Description Bit Status Remarks b0 b1 b2 b3

Selection of full or clip mode

Selection of video window placement screen

Selection of transparency processing

Selection of thru color specifying method

ON : Clip mode is selected.

OFF : Full mode is selected.

ON : Overlap window 1 is selected.

OFF : Base screen is selected.

ON : Transparency processing is performed.

OFF : Transparency processing is not performed.

ON : Specified color is transmitted through.

OFF : Other than specified color is transmitted through.

Valid when video window is open.

Can be changed while video window is being displayed.

Transparency processing is performed automatically when the b1 is ON

Valid when b1 and b2 are on.

b4 b5

Selection of whether size is changed or not when video window is touched

Selection of moving or freeze-frame picture

2 3 4

ON : Size is not changed.

OFF : Size is changed.

ON : Freeze-frame picture is selected.

OFF : Moving picture is selected.

Valid when Valid when video window is open.


ON : Valid only while video window is being displayed as moving picture.

OFF : Valid only while video window is being displayed as freeze-frame picture.

b6 b7

Selection of video window display priority

Reserved

ON : Video windows are displayed in front of overlap and test windows.

OFF : Video windows are displayed at rear of overlap and test windows.

—

Valid when Valid when video window is open.


b8 b9

Selection of video input signal (format)

Selection of video picture resolution

ON : Input in PAL system.

OFF : Input in NTSC system.

ON : 720

OFF : 640

480 dots are selected.

480 dots are selected.

Valid when video window is opened first after power-on of GOT.

Cannot be changed thereafter.

Valid when video window is opened first after power-on of GOT.

Cannot be changed thereafter.

b10 to b14

Reserved — b15

Selection of RGB screen display or hide 5

ON : RGB screen is displayed.

OFF : GOT monitor screen is displayed.

ON : Valid only when GOT monitor screen is displayed.

OFF : Valid only when RGB screen is displayed.

1 With the exception of b15, selection is made for all video windows.

2 The following operations cannot be performed when the bit is on.

Open a video window. (The video window cannot be opened when it is not being displayed.)

Close the video window.

Change the display position of the video window.

3 In case the power supply of GOT is turned on while the bit is ON, the video window is not shown.

In order to show the video window, the power supply of GOT should be turned on while the bit is off.

4 In case the other bit is turned on simultaneously, it is with no effect.(the b5 takes priority.)

5 When any of the utility function, system monitor function, ladder monitor function, special module monitor function, network monitor function and list editor function screens is displayed on the GOT, it does not change to the RGB window if the bit turns on.

It changes to the RGB screen after the corresponding function is terminated.

4 - 24 4 - 24

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.1.7 Wide display screen


The wide size GOT has a wide screen (landscape monitor) to provide a wide display.

When drawing, refer to the following drawing method and precautions for the wide screen.

(1) Drawing method effective for wide screen

A95*GOT screen A956WGOT screen

Line1 100

Line2

Line3

25

45

Line1 100

Line2

Line3

25

45

Input object:

Appears only when necessary.

Input object:

Always appears.

POINT

Though A95*GOT screen data can be used unchanged on the A956WGOT, note that the data in the 6 dots at the bottom of the A95*GOT screen are not displayed.

234 dots

A95*GOT screen size

A956WGOT screen size

6 dots

(2) Precautions for drawing method on wide display

1) Because of the difference between the vertical and horizontal dot intervals on a wide display, the actual screen display provided is 1.15 times greater vertically than the drawing screen of GT Designer.

You can confirm the actual screen display using the preview display function of GT Designer.

4 - 25 4 - 25

4 SPECIFICATION

GT Designer screen

A956WGOT screen

MELSOFT

2) If you run the monitor A956WGOT, the screen may flicker depending on the type of object/shape fill pattern used when creating images.

This is due to the specifications of the LCD panel and not a malfunction.

Be sure to check the combination of type of pattern and color on the machine before using.

(a) Examples of patterns where flicker is likely to occur

As in the following pattern examples, a pattern of lines, points or the like whose colors change line-by-line (horizontal pattern) particularly tends to cause a screen to flicker.

(A basic figure or the like that uses a horizontal pattern may also flicker.)

Also a figure or the like that is clear in light and shade is likely to flicker.

(When "Background: black", "Foreground: white", and others are selected.)

<Examples of patterns where flicker is likely to occur>

(b) How to prevent flicker

• Flicker is reduced by selecting a solid color pattern.

(Example1) Select a solid color pattern for "Pattern"

Pattern: A solid color pattern (8)

• When using a horizontal pattern or the like, flicker is reduced by selecting similar colors for foreground and background.

(Example2) Select similar colors for "Foreground" and

"Background"

Foreground: Blue (3), Background: Light blue (31)

4 - 26 4 - 26

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.2 Drawing Figures and Number of Attributes

GOT-A900 series

4.2.1 Types of drawing figures

Figures

Figures and character types are as follows:

(1) When the GOT-A900 series is used

Example of drawing

Line

GOT-F900 series

Attributes for selection

Line style, line width, line color

Line Freedom

Rectangle

Polygon

Line style, line width, line color, painting pattern, painting color, painting background

Circle (ellipse)

Arc (ellipse arc) Line style, line width, line color

Sector

Painting of enclosed area

Figure data in bitmap / DXF format

Line style, line width, line color, painting pattern, painting color, painting background

Painting pattern, painting color, painting background

Text

Scale

ABC

A

B

C

ABC

A BC

Style , text color, solid color, size, vertical, direction, alignment, high quality font (high quality font only for multiple of 2, 4, 6 and 8 of length to width magnification)

Number of graduation, direction, centerline, line style, line width, line color

Report figure (line)

Report figure(text)

ABC

4 - 27 4 - 27

4 SPECIFICATION

Line

Figures

Rectangle

Circle

Figure data in bitmap / DXF format

Text

MELSOFT

When "Raised" is selected for "Character decoration", the display provided on the GT Designer screen is the same as when "Shadow" is selected, but the correct display is provided on the GOT.

"Raised" is "Character decoration" as if "Boldface" ad "Shadow" are combined.

Uninfluenced by the character size, the shadow part of "Raised" is always 1 dot large.

The shadow part of "Shadow" changes in proportion to the character size.

(Example: The shadow is 2 dots large when the character size is 2x2.)


Example of drawing Attributes for selection

Line style, line color

Line style, painting pattern, painting color

ABC

ABC

A BC



Text color, size, alignment

4 - 28 4 - 28

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.2.2 Attribute type for selection

Attribute types for drawing are as follows:


Attribute

Line style

Line width

Display color

Full line , Broken line

Alternate long and short dash line

Example of drawing

, Dotted line ,

, Alternate long and two short dash line

1 dot

4 dot

256 colors

, 2 dot

, 5 dot

, 3 dot

, 7 dot

,

Display on GOT

Displayed in selected colors when the GOT used is compatible with 256 color display.

Displayed in reduced 16 colors when the GOT used is compatible with 16 color display.


All colors other than black are displayed in the same color (orange / white) when the GOT used has a monochrome display.

Painting pattern

256 colors

Painting color, painting background

Display on GOT

Displayed in selected colors when the GOT used is compatible with 256 color display.



All colors other than black are displayed in the same color (orange / white) when the GOT used has a monochrome display.

POINT

•

Colors that can be displayed on each GOT

When the GOT used can display 16 or less colors, the following colors can be

Displayed.

GOT Display Colors Displayable Colors

16-color display

8-color display

255,0,3,224,227,28,31,252,109,182,2,160,162,20,22,180

255,0,3,224,227,28,31,252

Monochrome display All colors other than black are displayed as the same color (orange/white).

The GOT display can be confirmed on the preview screen of GT Designer.

For the preview screen, refer to the help function of GT Designer.

4 - 29 4 - 29

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT


Attribute

Line style

Full line , Broken line

Alternate long and short dash line

Example of drawing

, Dotted line ,

, Alternate long and two short dash line

Line width

1 dot

256 colors

Display color

Display on GOT

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Color liquid crystal)

Displayed in reduced 256 colors.

F940GOT-SWD-E(Color liquid crystal)


F940GOT-LWD-E(Monochrome liquid crystal)

All colors other than black are displayed in the same color (white).

F930GOT-BWD-E, F920GOT-BB5-K-E (Blue liquid crystal)

All colors other than black are displayed in the same color (white), and black is displayed in blue.

Painting pattern

256 colors

Painting color

Display on GOT

F940WGOT-TWD-E (Color liquid crystal)


F940GOT-SWD-E(Color liquid crystal)


F940GOT-LWD-E(Monochrome liquid crystal)

All colors other than black are displayed in the same color (white).

F930GOT-BWD-E, F920GOT-BB5-K-E (Blue liquid crystal)

All colors other than black are displayed in the same color (white), and black is displayed in blue.

4 - 30 4 - 30

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.2.3 Figures in bitmap file format


Figures in bitmap file format displayed on the GOT-A900 series are 3 types; 256 colors, 16 colors and black-and-white.

There are some colors that cannot be displayed on some GOT types and they are displayed in reduced colors.

(Ex.)

•

256 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 16 color/black-and-white

GOT-A900 series.

•

16 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the black-and-white GOT-

A900 series.


Figures in bitmap file format displayed on the GOT-F900 series are 3 types; 256 colors, 16 colors and black-and-white.

There are some colors that cannot be displayed on some GOT types and they are displayed in reduced colors.

(Ex.)

•

256 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 8 color/black-and-white/ white-and-blue GOT-F900 series.

•

16 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 8 color/black-and-white/ white-and-blue GOT-F900 series.

4 - 31 4 - 31

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.2.4 Character size by magnification


Length

×

Width (dot)

Length magnification

Width magnification

×

4

×

5

×

6

×

7

×

8

×

0.5

×

1

×

2

×

3

×

0.5

8

×

8

16

×

8

32

×

8

48

×

8

64

×

8

80

×

8

96

×

8

112

×

8

128

×

8

×

1

×

2

×

3

×

4

×

5

×

6

×

7

×

8

8

×

16

16

×

16

32

×

16

48

×

16

8

×

32

16

×

32

32

×

32

48

×

32

8

×

48

16

×

48

32

×

48

48

×

48

64

×

16

80

×

16

64

×

32

80

×

32

64

×

48

80

×

48

96

×

16 96

×

32 96

×

48

112

×

16 112

×

32 112

×

48

128

×

16 128

×

32 128

×

48

8

×

64

16

×

64

32

×

64

48

×

64

8

×

80

16

×

80

32

×

80

48

×

80

8

×

96

16

×

96

32

×

96

48

×

96

8

×

112 8

×

128

16

×

112 16

×

128

32

×

112 32

×

128

48

×

112 48

×

128

64

×

64

80

×

64

64

×

80

80

×

80

64

×

96

80

×

96

64

×

112 64

×

128

80

×

112 80

×

128

96

×

64 96

×

80 96

×

96 96

×

112 96

×

128

112

×

64 112

×

80 112

×

96 112

×

112 112

×

128

128

×

64 128

×

80 128

×

96 128

×

112 128

×

128

REMARKS

•

Set the character magnification for both length and width to the multiple of 2, 4,

6 and 8 if high quality font is used.

•

If a part with high quality font is displayed with the part display/part movement display function on the screen which is not using high quality font, the part is not displayed in high quality font.

When any of characters on the screen are changed to high quality font, the part is displayed in high quality font.


Length

×

Width (dot)

Length magnification

Width magnification

×

0.5

×

1

×

2

×

3

×

4

×

1

8

×

16

16

×

16

32

×

16

48

×

16

64

×

16

×

2

8

×

32

16

×

32

32

×

32

48

×

32

64

×

32

×

3

8

×

48

16

×

48

32

×

48

48

×

48

64

×

48

×

4

8

×

64

16

×

64

32

×

64

48

×

64

64

×

64

4 - 32 4 - 32

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.2.5 Data capacity of each figure


Memory capacity of figures and characters for drawing is as follows.

The following memory capacity applies to figures regardless of attribute types and sizes.


Figure

Line

Line Freedom

Rectangle

Polygon

Circle (ellipse)

Arc (ellipse arc)

Sector

Painting of enclosed area

Figure data in bitmap file format

Text

High quality font

Scale

Report figure (line)

Report figure (text)

Memory capacity (byte)

20

16

+

4

×

n n is the number of vertexes.

24

16

+

4

×

n n is the number of vertexes.

(Start and end points are counted as one of vertexes.)

24

32

36

16

20

+

data capacity of bitmap file

28

+

2 (n

+

1) n is the number of characters

(memory capacity in the left regardless of 2 byte/1 byte character)

128

×

n n is the number of characters.

24

64 for rules of 32

×

32 dots

16 + 4

×

(number of characters

÷

2)


Figure

Line

Rectangle

Circle

Figure data in bitmap file format

Text

Memory capacity (byte)

20

24

24

20

+

data capacity of bitmap file

34 + n n is the number of characters

4 - 33 4 - 33

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.3 Types and Specifications of Available Object Functions

4.3.1 Types of and restrictions on object functions for setting


This section explains the object function types.

Restrictions on the object functions are marked " ".

Refer to Chapter5 for details of the object functions.

Function

Numerical display

Data list display

ASCII display

Clock display

Comment display

Alarm history display

Alarm list display(system alarm)

Alarm list display(user alarm)

: Allowed for setting, : Not allowed for setting

A9

GOT-A900 series

GOT GT SoftGOT

GOT-F900 series

7

Details

Function that displays the data stored in the word device in a numerical value.

The display color and attributes can be changed according to the monitor device value or specified device status (ON/OFF, device value).

Function that displays the status of multiple word devices in numerical values on the table.

Designation of one row out of 5 rows maximum as a sort key allows sorting of display according to the set priority.

Function that displays character strings, acknowledging data stored continuously in the word device as character code

(ASCII code).

Function that displays the clock data of the PLC CPU.

(When GT SoftGOT is used, the clock data of the personal computer appears. When the GOT-F900 series is used, the clock data of the GOT appears.)

This can be displayed in the form of time/date.

Function that displays comments in relation to the bit device

ON/OFF and the designated range of the word device.

Comment can be displayed in multiple lines for the display area.

Function that displays the time and the comment of ON status and being in the designated range in relation to the comment of the ON status of the designated bit device and the designated range of the word device.

Function that displays a warning for error on PLC CPU, data link/network and GOT.

Refer To

Section 5.1.1

Section 5.1.2

Section 5.1.3

Section 5.1.4

Section 5.2.1

Section 5.2.2

Section 5.2.3

Part display

Part movement display

Lamp display

Panel meter display

Trend graph display

5

Function that displays comment of the ON bit device in the order of priority in relation to the comments of multiple bit devices.

Function that displays the specified part/screen or the part/screen associated with the ON/OFF of the bit device or the value of the word device. (The function to display a part on the base screen is available for the GOT-A900 only.)

It can also displays the figure in BMP/DXF file format as a part.

Function that displays the movement/locus of the part figure associated with the bit device ON/OFF, word device value or specified device status (ON/OFF, device value) in the specified movement method.

Function that changes the lamp illumination color according to the monitor device value or specified device status (ON/OFF, device value).

Function that displays the value of the word device on the meter with the ratio for the upper/lower limits.

When the value of the monitoring devices reaches a certain value, the color of the meter panel can be changed.

Function that collects the data stored in the word device at the designated timing and displays it on the trend graph. When the graph is displayed to the screen range, the screen scrolls for further display.

Section 5.2.3

Section 5.3.1

Section 5.3.2

Section 5.3.3

Section 5.3.4

Section 5.4.1

4 - 34 4 - 34

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

Function

Line graph display

Bar graph display

Statistical graph display

Scatter chart display

Level display

Touch key

Numerical input

ASCII input

Hardcopy

Barcode

System information

Observe

Status

Floating Alarm display

Recipe

Sound

Test

Overlap screen

Operation panel

Report

Time action

Sampling

Script

A9

GOT-A900 series

GOT GT SoftGOT

1, 5, 10

1,

1

7

4, 7

2

7

7,

9

8

1: Unusable on the A950 handy GOT.

2: Unusable on the F940 handy GOT.

3: Unusable on the F930GOT.

4: Not used on the A95 GOT/A956WGOT.

GOT-F900 series

Details

5

5

5

Function that collects the data of multiple word devices in a batch and displays the line graph.

Function that displays the data stored in multiple word devices with a bar graph.

Function that collects the data of multiple word devices and displays the percentage of each word device data in graph.

Function that gathers the data stored in the word devices associated with the X and Y axes and displays them as a scatter chart.

Function that displays the word device value in level with the ratio for upper/lower limits.

Function that performs bit device ON/OFF, word device value changing, screen switching, etc. according to the touch keys touched.

Function that inputs the desired value into the designated word device.

3, 5

Function that inputs the desired ASCII code into the designated word device.

The hardcopy function enables you to capture and print out a

GOT monitor screen, and save to a PC card using

BMP/JPEG-type data file by setting a bit device to ON/OFF or by touching the touch key set in the Touch key (Extended) settings

2, 5 Function that writes the data from the bar code reader into the

PLC CPU.

Function that checks the GOT operation status with the PLC

CPU.

Function that writes data to the PLC CPU when the specified condition is enabled (ON/OFF of specified bit device, word device value range designation).

Function that displays the comments of the ON bit device in the order of occurrence from right to left on the base screen in relation to the comments of multiple bit devices.

Function that sets the device as a monitoring device, writes the designated data into the device, saves the designated device range into the memory card, and writes it into the PLC

CPU.

Function that reproduces the voice file in WAV format and provides a touch sound on the touch key or sounds in status monitoring function.

Function that displays the test window during display of the monitoring screen to change the device value.

Function that retrieves other screen on the current screen for overlap display. The retrieved screen is displayed in green frames.

Function that allows operation from outside the GOT using an operation panel connected.

Function that gathers and prints numerical data stored in the word devices or the buffer memory of a special function module, or to print numerical data and comments associated with bit device ON/OFF.

3, 5

Function that performs operation, such as device write, at the specified time of the day of the week.

Function that collects data in the specified cycle or under the bit condition and displays them in a graph or the like.

Function that can control the GOT display with the GOT's original programs (scripts).

Refer To

Section 5.4.2

Section 5.4.3

Section 5.4.4

Section 5.4.5

Section 5.4.6

Section 5.5

Section 5.6.1

Section 5.6.2

Section 5.8.1

Section 5.8.8

Section 5.8.2

Section 5.8.3

Section 5.8.4

Section 5.8.5

Section 5.8.6

Section 5.8.7

Section 5.9.1

Section 5.8.9

Section 5.7

Section 5.8.10

Section 5.8.11

Section 5.8.12

Chapter 7

4 - 35 4 - 35

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

5: Unusable on the F920GOT.

6: When using any of the functions, you always need to install the corresponding extended OS in the GOT.

Function

Report function

Hard copy function

Recipe function

Sound function

Bar code function

Operation panel function

Extended function OS

Extended function OS (report)

Extended function OS (ESC printer/PCL printer)

Extended function OS (recipe)

Extended function OS (sound)

Extended function OS (bar code)

Extended function OS (external key input)

7: When using any of the following object functions, you need to fit necessary equipment for the corresponding function.

Function name

A985GOT/A97 GOT/

A960GOT

A956WGOT A95 GOT

Alarm history display function/ hard copy function

For PC card save

For history printing/ printout

Unnecessary

Unnecessary

When using SRAM card:

Memory card interface unit

When using compact flash

PC card:

Option unit unnecessary

Memory card interface unit

(SRAM card only)

Printer interface unit

Report function

Recipe function

Report printing

For PC card save

Unnecessary

Unnecessary

Memory board

Unnecessary

Use the applicable model

(A95 GOT- BD-M3/

A950 handy GOT).


Memory board

Use the applicable model

(A95 GOT- BD-M3/

A950 handy GOT).


Sound function

Unnecessary

Memory board and external speaker

Unusable Unusable

Operation panel External I/O unit

Among the above units, either only one memory card interface unit or one printer interface unit may be fitted to the A95 GOT/

A956WGOT.

When using the alarm history display function, therefore, note that PC card save and history printing cannot be functioned simultaneously.

(Enabled when the compact flash PC card is used with the A956WGOT.)

8: Logging report cannot be used with the A95*GOT/A956WGOT.

(Enabled when the compact flash PC card is used with the A956WGOT.)

9: When the target PLC CPU has no clock data, the time action function is unusable.

(Since GT SoftGOT uses the clock data of the personal computer, the time action function can be used if the target PLC CPU has no clock data.)

10: A95*GOT cannot do 256-color printing.

11: Can be used for setting the function switches of the F920GOT (with keypad), F930GOT (with keypad) and ET-940.

4 - 36 4 - 36

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.3.2 Specifications of the object functions that may be set


The following indicate the main specifications of the functions.

In the following tables, the maximum setting points and used memory spaces assume that the setting items are all default values.

When data operation, display method and/or other settings are made to increase the following memory space, the number of points that can be set may decrease.


Specifications

Display/operation triggers

Monitor/write devices

Option functions

Function

Max.

setting points per screen

Used memory space

(bytes)

Display attributes Others

Numerical

Display

512 24

Shape, Frame, Plate,

Numeral, Blink,

Reverse

Data list display

ASCII display

Clock display

1

(not allowed for window screen)

32 + 12 (row + 1) 6 devices


Title, Color, Rule,

Reverse

256

2

8 + Text

8


Color, Blink, Reverse


Color

Comment

12 + 8 registered comments + (4 + 2 total characters) registered comments

(values in ( ) are converted to the multiple number of 4.)

Style, Color, Solid,

Reverse, Blink, High quality font

Comment display

256 24

Shape, Frame, Size,

Blink


1

(not allowed for window

80 + (2 title characters


+ 4) display items +

16 devices

Title, Rule screen)

Display format/number of display digits

Decimal : 1 to 13

Hexadecimal : 1 to 8

Octal

Binary

Real

: 1 to 6

: 1 to 32

: 1 to 32


Decimal : 1 to 13


Octal

Binary

Real

: 1 to 6

: 1 to 32

: 1 to 32

Digits:1 to 80

Data format yy/mm/dd dd/mm/yy mm/dd/yy

• Max. number of comments registered: 32767

• Max. number of characters set to 1 comment: 512 characters

(independently of character size)

Max. number of characters set to 1 comment: 512 characters

(independently of character size)

Max. number of monitor points

Bit Device: 3072

Word Device

(16 Bit): 1024

(32 Bit): 512

4 - 37 4 - 37

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

Function

Max.


Used memory space

(bytes)

Display attributes

Alarm list display

(System alarm)

1

Alarm list display

(User alarm)

24

(Memory saving

16) 1

184


Size

152 + devices 24


Size

Part Display

Part

Movement display

Lamp display

Panel meter display

Trend graph display

Line graph display

Bar graph display

256

256

256

256

24

(Memory saving

16)

32

(Locus

Mode: 1 per 1

Project)

256

44

60

24

40

76 + devices

76 + devices

220

2

2

Display mode

(Overwrite/XOR),

Positioning (Topleft/Center), Color,

Blink

Movement Mode

(Position/Line/Point),

Display mode

(Locus/Movement),

Positioning (Topleft/Center), Color,

Blink

Shape (Basic figure/Free figure),

High quality font,

Frame, Lamp,

Background, Pattern,

Blink, Text, Style,

Color, Solid, V H


Needle, Meter panel,

Text, Size, Color,

High quality font,

Scale display, Scale points


Scale display, Scale points, Graph, Style,

Width


Scale display, Scale points, Graph, Style,

Width


Graph, Pattern,

Background

Specifications



Option functions

Others

3

Max. number of display characters: 60 characters


Consecutive bit device

: 8192 points

Random bit device

: 512 points

Type

Part/Mark/Base Screen/Window screen

Type

Part/Mark

3

4

Meter type

1/4 Circle

(Top/Bottom/Left/Right/Right top/Left top/Left Bottom)

1/2 Circle

(Top/Bottom/Left/Right)

3/4 Circle, Circle

• Max. number of graphs : 8

• Max. number of points : 100



Max. number of graphs: 8

4 - 38 4 - 38

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

Function

Max.


Used memory space

(bytes)

Display attributes

Specifications



Option functions

Others


32 444


No. of Partitions,

Direciton, Scale display, Scale points,

Graph, Pattern,

Background

Scatter chart

24

(Memory saving

16) 1

128 + 4 number of stored memories

(number of points + 1)

Shape, Frame, Graph frame, Plate, Display mode, Graph display form (type/size/color)

Level display 256

Touch key

256 (10)

1 2

Numerical

Input

ASCII input

Hardcopy

Barcode

System information

256

256

1

32

1

40

40

Boundary, Level,

Pattern, Backgroud,

Graph, Pattern

Shape, Frame,

Switch, Pattern,

Backgroud Style,

Color, Solid, V H,

Text, High quality font

32

8 + characters

44


Numeral, Blink,

Reverse


Color, Blink, Reverse

3 3

Graph:

Rectangle graph/Circle graph

• Graph type:

Sample/batch display

• Number of points that may be saved into memory: 2000 points (For batch display, the above number of points is the total of the number of batchdisplayed points the number of collection times)

• Max. cumulative count (point device data format):

9999 (16 bit, BCD value)

65535 (other than above)

5

• Display trigger

Key/Bit/Word

• Action

Key code/Bit/Word/

Extended/Base/Window/

Station No./Buzzer

Format type/Format digits

Decimal : 1 to 13


Octal

Binary

Real

: 1 to 6

: 1 to 32

: 1 to 32

Digits

1 to 80

When stored onto PC card:

Max. 9999 files

4 - 39 4 - 39

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

Function

Max.


Used memory space

(bytes)

Display attributes

Specifications



Option functions

Others

Observe

Status

Recipe

512/

Screen,

512/

Project in common

100

64 + 36 (set number of conditions) + 16

(number of indirect device and bit ALT device points in all conditions) +

16 (total of write device points in all conditions) + 20

(number of conditions with word ranges)

8 + 4

When stored in the devices in each recipe internal sum of file + 108 memory

number of recipe file

117 number of recipe files

+ 9 sum of

When stored in the

16 bit devices in

PC card number of each recipe file + 14 sum of 32 bit devices in each recipe file

128 Sound

Test

Floating alarm display

1

(1Project)

80 Character size

Overlap screen

Operation panel

Numerical

2047 80 + Depending on object

1 128

256 44

Print format, number of print digits, number of fraction digits

Comment 256 48 number of print digits

Time action 32 1592

4

Max. number of points for write operation

Bit momentary, bit RST, bit SET, bit ALT: 40

Data SET (16 bits): 20


• Max. recipe operation:

256 points

• Max. number of points for write operation

16 bits: 8192

32 bits: 4096

Max. number of sound files: 100

Max. number of monitor device points

Consecutive bit devices:

512 points

Random bit devices:

255 points

• Report type

Real-time continuous/logging page renewal

• Report screen:

Up to 8 screens may be created per project.

Time action operation

Max. setting count: 32

4 - 40 4 - 40

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

Specifications



Option functions

Function

Max.


Used memory space

(bytes)


Script 256

(36 + (40 number of project scripts set) + (36

number of displayed base screen calls set) +

(40 number of displayed base screen scripts set) + (36 number of displayed window screen 1 calls set) + (40 number of displayed window screen

1 scripts set) + (36 number of displayed window screen 2 calls set) + (40 number of displayed window screen

2 scripts set) + (36 number of displayed superimpose screen calls set) + (40 number of displayed superimpose screen scripts set) 5

Gateway setting

Server setting

Client setting

Mail send setting

FTP server setting

32768

128

96

20 + 20 number of assigned devices

16 + 20 number of set

GOTs to be monitored

20 + 4 (number of destinations + 2) + 2

(total number of destination, subject and

From characters)

12 + 2 (total number of login name and password characters)

1 The number within parentheses indicates the maximum number of set points at the maximum setting of the setting item.

2 For the touch keys to which ON/OFF delays were set, the maximum number of set points is 100 points.

3 Unusable only when the memory storage function is used.

4 Operates only during ON.

5 The capacity of the script function set to each window is 0 bytes if the window screen is not displayed.

(a) Memory capacity for setting of high quality font

The memory capacity of high quality font is 128 bytes for 1 character regardless of the character size.

(b) Maximum setting count when the cycle trigger is set for the display

The maximum setting count in one screen for the cycle trigger is 100 points.

(c) Maximum setting count of objects

The maximum setting count of objects in one screen is 512 points.

If 513 or more objects are set in one screen, note that 513th object becomes invalid.

4 - 41 4 - 41

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

Object Name

Report function

Alarm history function

Hard copy function

(d) Data capacity of object stored on PC card/Hard disk

1) Capacities of data stored on the PC card (When using the A985/97 /

960 / 95 /956WGOT)

Depending on the object used, it has a function which can store data on the PC card.

The following table lists the capacity of data stored onto the PC card on an object basis.

(Number of devices 8 + 36) + ((number of devices 8 + 8) collection count)

When 3072 points of alarm history displays are saved

In Cumulative mode (Store CSV format) : Approx,.97k bytes (Approx,.400k bytes)

In History mode (Store CSV format) : Approx,.72k bytes (Approx,.360k bytes)

Data capacity per screen (see below) number of screens stored

Model

Data Capacity (Bytes)

Data Capacity per Screen (Kbytes)

At BMP file At JPEG file

A985GOT-V

A985GOT

A975GOT

A970GOT-TB

A970GOT-SB

A970GOT-LB

A960GOT

A956WGOT

A95 GOT-TBD

A95 GOT-SBD

A95 GOT-LBD

470.0 (video window: 1406.3)

470.0

301.0

150.0

150.0

37.6

37.6

110.0

76.1

37.6

9.4

133.4

113.9

86.6

86.6

84.5

33.2

26.8

27.6

Recipe function

Object Name

Report function


Hard copy function

Recipe function

117 number of recipe files + 9 sum of 16-bit devices in each recipe file + 14 sum of 32bit devices in each recipe file

2) Capacities of data stored on the hard disk (When using the GT SoftGOT)

Some objects have the function to store data on the hard disk of the personal computer.

The following table indicates the capacities of data stored on the personal computer hard disk object-by-object.

Data Capacity (Bytes)

(Number of collection times + (number of 1 page-printable data collection times - 1))/ number of 1 page-printable data collection times) ((number of header lines + 1) data size on 1 line) + number of collection times (repeated lines data size on 1 line)

Data size per line (see below) (number of printing times (number of occurrence, recovery, check times) + 1)

Model Data Capacity (Bytes)

80

79

History mode

Cumulative mode (status only)

Cumulative mode

(cumulative time or occurrence time, status)

Cumulative mode

(cumulative time, occurrence time, status)

88

97

Data capacity per screen (see below) number of screens stored

Model (dot)

Data Capacity per Screen

Data Capacity (Kbytes)

SoftGOT (1280 1024)

SoftGOT (1024 768)

SoftGOT (800 600)

SoftGOT (640 480)

1281.0

767.0

469.8

301.0

117 number of recipe files + 9 sum of 16-bit device points of all recipe files + 14 sum of

32-bit device points of all recipe files

4 - 42 4 - 42

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT


Specifications



Option functions

Function

Max.


Used memory space

(bytes)


Numerical

Display

50 32


Numeral

ASCII display

Clock display

Comment display


Alarm list display

(User alarm)

Part display

Lamp display

Panel meter display

10

10

50

1

1

50

50

50

32

28

Word: 36

Bit: 44

32

32

Word: 32

Bit: 36

32

40


Color


Color

Shape, Frame, Size


Title


Size

Display mode (Replay),

Positioning (Topleft/Center), Color

Frame, Lamp, Text,

Color, V H


Needle, Meter panel,

Scale display

Trend graph display

Line graph display

Bar graph display

1

1

50

40 + 2 Number of graph lines

36 + 2 Number of graph lines

44


Graph, Style, Scale display


Graph, Style, Scale display


Graph, Scale display


Decimal : 1 to 32


Octal

Binary

Real

: 1 to 32

: 1 to 32

: 1 to 32 number of display digits: 1 to 40

Data format yy/mm/dd, dd/mm/yy, mm/dd/yy,

Type1, Type2

Max. number of characters set to 1 comment:

512 characters (independently of character size)


Bit devices: 256 points



255 points

Type

Part/Mark

Meter type

1/4 Circle

(Top/Bottom/Left/Right/Right top/Left top/Left Bottom)

1/2 Circle

(Top/Bottom/Left/Right)

3/4 Circle, Circle





Max. number of graphs: 1

4 - 43 4 - 43

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

Specifications



Option functions

Function

Max.


Used memory space

(bytes)



Touch key

1

50

Numerical

Input

50

28 + devices

28


No. of Partitions,

Direciton, Graph, Scale display

Shape, Frame, Switch,

Color, V H, Text

48


Numeral

ASCII input

Hardcopy

Observe

Status

10

1

40/

Screen,

40/

Project in common

32

24

8 + 28 setting points


Color

Recipe

Graph:

Rectangle graph/Circle graph

• Display trigger

Key/Bit

• Action

Key code/Bit/Word/Base


Decimal : 1 to 32


Octal : 1 to 32

Binary

Real

: 1 to 32

: 1 to 32 number of display digits

1 to 20

Max. number of points for write operation

Bit momentary, bit RST, bit SET, bit ALT: 40



• Max. recipe operation:

256 points

• Max. number of points for write operation

16 bits: 4000

Max. number of monitor device points


256 points

Floating alarm display

Overlap

Screen

Operation panel

Time action

Sampling

1 80

Depending on object

Character size

Time action operation

Max. setting count: 32

Storage count: Max. 2000 times

(a) The number of parts that may be displayed actually is as follows:

[Maximum setting points in the above list] = [base screen] + [overlap screen]

(b) The size of the memory capacity changes with the conditions (such as the presence/absence of the display frame).

The above sizes are the minimum sizes of the corresponding parts.

(c) The built-in memory capacities of the GOT-F900 series are as follows.

• F940WGOT: 1M bytes

• F940GOT : 512k bytes



4 - 44 4 - 44

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.4 Overlap Setting

4.4.1 Figure and object


When the GOT is used for display, objects are displayed on figures regardless of the setting order of objects.

4.4.2 Objects


For the following combinations only, objects can be displayed with overlap.

When the GOT is used for display for other cases not shown below, the overlap area becomes improper display.

Make adjustments on the object display conditions to prevent overlap of multiple objects on the GOT at the same time.

(1) Combination with touch key

Objects created without the touch key, Numerical input and ASCII input can be overlapped with the touch key.

POINT

When setting the touch key, set "Shape" to "No". Do not set "Text".

(2) Combination with level display

Objects created with numerical display and comment display can be overlapped with the level display. (only one object for one level display function)

In this case, the display mode in numerical display and comment display must be designated to "Transparent" or "XOR".

If not designated, "Transparent" becomes effective as the default.

(Ex. 1) When the display mode is designated to "Transparent"

It is effective when using a color display.

25 50 98

(Ex. 2) When the display mode is designated to "XOR"

In contrast to the object in "Transparent", the overlap area of the level can be inverted.

It is effective when using a black and white display.

FULL FULL

POINT

Numerical display or comment display placed over level display

•

A numerical/comment display is not blinked (flickered).

•

A numerical/comment display is not highlighted.

•

A numerical/comment display may not be provided properly if it comes out of the display frame of a level display.

•

A numerical/comment display may not be provided properly if a frame figure has been set to the numerical or comment display function.

•

A numerical/comment display is updated only when a level display has changed.

A numerical/ comment display is not updated if only the monitor device value set to that display is changed.

4 - 45 4 - 45

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.5 Available Devices

4.5.1 Internal devices of GOT

(1) GOT bit registers (GB), GOT data registers (GD)

These are the GOT's internal devices which may be used only within the GOT.

The GOT bit registers (GB) are bit devices and the GOT data registers (GD) are word devices.

These devices are useful when you want to use devices in the following processings which need not be passed through the PLC CPU.

•

Screen switching device

•

Script function work area

•

Bar-code read value storage area

(2) GOT special registers (GS)

These are special registers designed for the GOT.

They store the GOT's internal information, communication conditions, script error information, etc.

By monitoring these devices with various object functions and script functions, you can gather various information of the GOT easily.

The following table lists the GOT special registers and device functions.

(a) Read devices

Device

GS0

GS1

GS2 to GS5

GS6

GS7

GS8

GS9

GS10

GS11 to GS13

GS14

GS15

GS16

GS17

:

:

GS46

GS47

GS48

GS49 to GS79

GS80 to GS199

GS200 to GS229

GS230 to GS383

Function

Common information 1

Base screen information

Reserved

CC-Link G4 station number

1-second binary counter

Monitor scan time

Reserved

Monitor scan counter

Reserved

Script common information

Script error pointer

Script number

Error code

:

:

Script number

Error code

Script execution pointer

Script execution number

Reserved

Gateway information

Reserved

•

Common information 1 (GS0) b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b0 b1

: Alternates between ON and OFF per communication

cycle.

: Remains ON from base/window screen switching until

one cycle of on-screen setting processing is completed.

(This also applies to station number changing and

security level changing.)

4 - 46 4 - 46

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT b2 : Turns ON from when the base/window screen is changed until one cycle of the on-screen status watching object processing is completed. (This also applies to the case where the station number is changed or the security level b3 b4 b5 is changed.)

: Remains ON while the power-on initial screen appears.

: Normally ON.

: Normally OFF.

b6 to b15 : Reserved

•

Base screen information (GS1) b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0 b0 b1 b2

: Alternates between ON and OFF per communication

cycle of the base screen.

: Remains ON from base screen switching until one cycle

of on-base screen setting processing is completed. (This

also applies to station number changing and security

level changing.)

: Turns ON from when the base screen is changed until

one cycle of the on-screen status watching object

processing is completed. (This also applies to the case

where the station number is changed or the security level

is changed.) b3 to b15 : Reserved

•

CC-Link G4 station number (GS6)

Stores the station number of the AJ65BT-G4-S3 only once when the

GOT connected to the CC-Link network via the AJ65BT-G4-S3 is powered on.

•

1-second binary counter (GS7)

Incremented every second immediately after power-on.

The user can write a specific value, from which the counter will start incrementing. The value is stored in binary.

•

Monitor scan time (GS8)

Stores in binary the time (ms) until one cycle of processing set on the display screen is completed.

The data is updated upon completion of all processings set on the screen.

Errors of about ±10ms may occur depending on the processing setting.

Also, the object not processed by the security function will not be the target.

•

Monitor scan time counter (GS10)

Incremented every time one cycle of processing set on the display screen is completed.

•

Script common information (GS14)

Stores the error information of the script functions.

b15 to b13 b12 b11 to b9 b8 b7 b6 to b1 b0 b0 b1 to b6 b7 b8 b9 to b11 b12 b13 to b15

: Turns ON at error occurrence.

: Reserved

: Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.

: Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.

: Reserved

: Turns ON at communication error occurrence.

: Reserved

4 - 47 4 - 47

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

•

Script error pointer (GS15)

Stores the pointer value (16 to 46) which indicates the address where the script error data (GS16 to 47) is stored. (Default: -1)

Every time error data is stored, the pointer value changes as indicated below.

"-1" "16" "18" "20"

.....

"46" "16"

The pointer value denotes the address of the script error data (GS16 to

47) as indicated below.

Example 1) When GS15 is 16, error data is stored into GS16, 17.


•

Script error data (GS16 to GS47)

Store the script numbers and error codes of the scripts in error in due order, starting from the higher addresses of the storage area.

When an error occurs, a script number and error code are stored on a 2word basis as a history.

Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the upper addresses are overwritten in order.

•

Script execution pointer (GS48)

Stores the pointer value (49 to 79) which indicates the address where a script execution number (GS49 to 79) is stored. (Default: -1)

Every time an execution number is stored, the pointer value changes as indicated below.

"-1" "49" "50" "51"

.....

"79" "49"

The pointer value denotes the address of the script execution number

(GS49 to 79) as indicated below.

Example 1) When GS48 is 49, the execution number is stored into GS49.


•

Script execution number (GS49 t GS79)

Store the script numbers of the scripts executed as a history.

•

Gateway information (GS200 to GS229)

Stores the error information when the gateway functions are used.

For details of the error definition stored, refer to the GOT-A900 Series

Operating Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5

Compatible Gateway functions).

4 - 48 4 - 48

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(b) Write devices

Device

GS384

GS385

GS386 to 399

GS400

GS401 to 499

GS500

GS501 to 511

Function

Script common information

Script monitor time

Reserved

Gateway common control

Reserved

GT SoftGOT common information

Reserved

•

Script common information (GS384)

Clears the script error data (GS16 to 47) or re-executes the script at error stop.

b15 to b2 b1 b0 b0 b1

: Turned ON to clear the script error data.

: Re-executes the script that was at a stop due to error

occurrence.

When re-executing it, check/execute the following.

•

Before starting re-execution, turn ON the bit 0 to clear

the error.

•

Execute the script from its beginning, not from where it

had stopped.

•

Since the device values remain unchanged as in the

stop status,

check the device values of the script before starting re-

execution.

•

When the "trigger type" of the script is the "rise/fall" of a

device, turn

the trigger device from ON to OFF/OFF to ON again to

re-execute the script.

•

Script monitor time (GS385)

Set the monitor time of one script in seconds.

If a script does not end the preset time after its start, script processing is stopped. (Error code: 15)

The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.

Setting Example

0 (default)

1

10

11

Monitor Time

10 seconds

1 second

10 seconds

11 seconds

4 - 49 4 - 49

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

• Screen script initial operation (GS386)

Set whether initial operation will be performed or not when any of the following conditions is enabled.

• The screen script function is used.

• The execution condition (trigger type) selected is "Rise/Fall".

• Switching to the screen having scripts takes place.

For example, when the trigger type is Bit OFF to ON and its trigger bit is

ON at the setting of "0", the screen is changed and the screen scripts are then executed once.

Setting Example

0

Other than 0

Trigger Type

Bit OFF to ON

Bit ON to OFF

Bit OFF to ON

Bit ON to OFF

Bit Value of

Trigger

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Initial Operation

Performed

Not performed

• Gateway common information (GS400)

Clears the error information on the gateway functions stored in the gateway information (GS200 to 229).

For details of the error definition stored, refer to the GOT-A900 Series

Operating Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Compatible

Gateway functions).

• GT SoftGOT common information (GS500) b15 to b1 b0 b0 : Turning this bit ON displays the dialog box used to exit

from GT SoftGOT.

Turns OFF when exit is canceled in the dialog box.

4 - 50 4 - 50

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.5.2 Device ranges available for the GOT-A900 series

The devices available for each object function of the GOT-A900 series depend on the connection target CPU and connection form.

Device availabilities are listed below on connection target CPU and connection form bases.

(1) QCPU (A Mode), ACPU

Input (X)

Output (Y)

Annunciator (F)

Link relay (B)

Timer

Counter

Word device bit

Device name

Internal relay (M)

Latch relay (L)

Special internal relay (M)

Link special relay (SB)

GOT bit register (GB)

Data register (D)

Special data register (D)

Link register (W)

Timer (current value) (TN)

Counter (current value) (CN)

Link special register (SW)

File register (R)

Extended file register (ER)

Index register 2

Block

Device

(Z)

(V)

Accumulator (A)

Buffer memory (special function unit) (BM)

Bit device word 3 4

Contact (TT)

Coil (TC)

Contact (CT)

Coil (CC)

Available range for monitoring

X0 to X1FFF

Y0 to Y1FFF

M0 to M8191

L0 to L8191

F0 to F2047

B0 to B1FFF

M9000 to M9255

TT0 to TT2047

TC0 to TC2047

CT0 to CT1023

CC0 to CC1023

SB0 to SB7FF

Designated bit of the following word devices (except for index register and buffer memory)

GB64 to GB16383

D0 to D8191

D9000 to D9255

W0 to W1FFF

TN0 to TN2047

CN0 to CN1023

SW0 to SW7FF

R0 to R8191

1 to 255

R0 to R8191

Z0 to Z6 (Z0 = Z)

V0 to V6 (V0 = V)

A0 to A1

BM0 to BMn 1

Converting the above bit devices to words

(except for timer and counter)

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

GOT data register (GD)

GOT special register (GS)

1 Only special function units of the GOT connection station can be designated.

Set within the address range of the buffer memory of the designated special function unit.

2 Writing to the index register is prohibited during computer link connection.

3 Use a multiple of 16 for setting device number.

4 If converting the special internal relay (M) to a bit device word, regard 9000 as 0 and use a multiple of 16 for the device number.

(Example) M9000, M9016, M9240

4 - 51 4 - 51

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(2) QCPU (Q Mode), QnACPU

Device name

Input (X)

Output (Y)

Internal relay (M)

Latch relay (L)

Annunciator (F)

Link relay (B)

Timer

Counter

Special relay (SM)

Retentive timer

Step relay (S)


Word device bit

Contact (TT)

Coil (TC)

Contact (CT)

Coil (CC)

Contact (SS)

Coil (SC)


Data register (D)

Special data register (SD)

Link register (W)



Retentive timer (current value) (SN)


File register (R)

Extended file register (ER)

Block

Device

Extended file register (ZR)

Index register (Z)

Buffer memory (special function unit) (BM)

Bit device word 5



Allowable range of monitoring

X0 to X1FFF

Y0 to Y1FFF

M0 to M32767

L0 to L32767

F0 to F32767

B0 to B1FFF

TT0 to TT32767

TC0 to TC32767

CT0 to CT32767

CC0 to CC32767

SM0 to SM2047

SS0 to SS32767

SC0 to SC32767

S0 to S32767

SB0 to SB7FF

Designated bit of the following word devices (except for index register and buffer memory)

GB64 to GB16383

D0 to D32767

SD0 to SD2047

W0 to W1FFF

TN0 to TN32767

CN0 to CN32767

SN0 to SN32767

SW0 to SW7FF

R0 to R32767 1

0 to 31

R0 to R32767

ZR0 to ZR1042431

Z0 to Z15

BM0 to BMn 4


GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

2 3

1 Block file register that is switched by the RSET command is monitored.

2 Block file register that is switched by the QDRSET command is monitored.

3 The GOT handles the extended file registers on a 32k point (32768 point) basis.

When specifying the extended file registers (ZR) in the object setting, always make setting so that they do not spread across the 32k point basis boundaries.

Doing so will display the "Specified device is outside the range" error message.

There are no restrictions on the range of read/write performed by specifying the file register name in the recipe function.

[Setting example]: When devices are specified consecutively (e.g. line graph); when 10 points are specified

Correct: Head device: ZR32768

ZR0 to

Block 0

Wrong: Head device: ZR32767

ZR0 to

Block 0

ZR32767

ZR32768 to

ZR32767

ZR32768 to

Block 1 Block 1

10 points are set beyond ZR32767.

4 Only special function units of the GOT connection station can be designated.

Set within the address range of the buffer memory of the designated special function unit.

5 Set the device numbers in multiples of 16.

4 - 52 4 - 52

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(3) Motion controller CPU (Q172CPU, Q173CPU)

Device name

Input (X)

Output (Y)

Internal relay (M)

Latch relay (L)

Annunciator (F)

Link relay (B)

Special relay (SM) 1

Word device bit


Data register (D) 2, 3

Link register (W)

Motion device 4

Bit device word 5




X0 to X1FFF

Y0 to Y1FFF

M0 to M8191

L0 to 8191

F0 to F2047

B0 to B1FFF

SM0 to SM255

Specified bit of the following word devices

GB64 to GB16383

D0 to D32767

W0 to W1FFF

#0 to #8191


GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

1 When setting the special internal relays M9000 to M9255, use SM as the device name, and the value decreased by 9000 (i.e. 0 to 255) as the device number.

2 When setting the special data registers (D9000 to D9255), set them as they are, D9000 to D9255.

3 D8192 to D8999 and D9256 to D9999 are outside the range.

4 Cannot be monitored using GT SoftGOT.

5 Set the device number as a multiple of 16.

(4) CC-Link connection (Remote device)

Device name

Remove input (RX)

Remote output (RY)

Bit designation of remote register write area (RWw)

Bit designation of remote register read area (RWr)


Bit designation of GOT data register (GD)

Remote register write area (RWw)

Remote register read area (RWr)


Converting GOT bit register to word (GB)



X0 to X7FF

Y0 to Y7FF

Ww0 to WwFF

Wr0 to WrFF

GB64 to GB16383

GD64 to GD16383

Ww0 to WwFF

Wr0 to WrFF

GD64 to GD16383

GB64 to GB16383

GS0 to GS511

4 - 53 4 - 53

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(5) FXCPU

Device name Available range for monitoring

Device number expression

Input relay (X)

Output relay (Y)

Auxiliary relay (M)

State (S)

Special auxiliary relay (M)

Timer contact (T)

Counter contact (C)

Word device bit 1


Timer (current value) (T)

Counter (current value) (C)

Data register (D)

RAM file register (D)


Bit device word 2 3



X0000 to X0377

Y0000 to Y0377

M0000 to M3071

S0000 to S0999

M8000 to M8255

T000 to T255

C000 to C255



GB64 to GB16383

T000 to T255

C000 to C255

D000 to D0999

D1000 to D7999

D8000 to D8255



GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

Octal notation

Decimal notation



Decimal notation

1 While the touch key function to which a word device bit is designated as the monitor device is executed, do not write the word device in a sequence program.

2 Bit devices of the timer contact (T) and counter contact (C) cannot be converted to words.

3 Use a multiple of 16 for designating the device number.

(6) Omron PLC

Device name

I/O relay

Internal auxiliary relay

Data link relay (LR)

Auxiliary memory relay (AR)

Holding relay (HR)

Internal holding relay (W)

Timer contact (TIM) 1

Counter contact (CNT) 1

Data memory (DM) 2

Timer (current value) (TIM) 2

Counter (current value) (CNT) 2


I/O relay



Holding relay (HR)

Internal holding relay (W)

Data memory (DM)

Timer (current value) (TIM)

Counter (current value) (CNT)

Extended data memory (EM current bank) 3

Extended data memory (EM banks 0 to 12) 3 4




..0000 to 614315

LR00000 to LR19915

AR00000 to AR95915

HR00000 to HR51115

WR00000 to WR51115

TIM0000 to TIM2047

CNT0000 to CNT2047

DM00000 to DM9999

TIM0000 to TIM2047

CNT0000 to CNT2047

GB64 to GB16383

0000 to 6143

LR000 to LR199

AR000 to AR959

HR000 to HR511

WR000 to WR511

DM0000 to DM9999

TIM0000 to TIM2047

CNT0000 to CNT2047

EM0000 to EM9999

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

1 When CV1000, CS1 and CJ1 is used, write cannot be performed.

2 When executing the touch key function with a word device bit specified as the monitor device, do not perform write to that word device in a sequence program.

3 On extended data memory, write/read cannot be performed across banks.

4 When the CJ1 is used, EM 0 to 2 are usable.

4 - 54 4 - 54

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(7) Yasukawa PLC

(a) When using GL60S, GL60H, GL70H, GL120 or GL130

Coil

Device name

Input relay

Link coil

GOT bit register

Input register

Holding register

Link register

Constant register

GOT data register



O01 to O63424

I1 to I63424

D1 to D2048

D10001 to D12048

D20001 to D22048

GB64 to GB16383

Z1 to Z31840 1

W1 to W28291 2

SW1 to SW28291 4

R1 to R2048

R10001 to R12048

R20001 to R22048

SR1 to SR2048 4

SR10001 to SR12048 4

SR20001 to SR22048 4

K1 to K4096 3

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

1 Change the input register 30001 to 30512 to Z1 to Z512. (Example of setting in default)

2 Change the input register 40001 to 49999 to W1 to W9999. (Example of setting in default)

3 Change the constant register 31001 to 35096 to K1 to K4096. (Example of setting in default)

3 SR and SW are data format-ready registers (imaginary registers) that display the internal data of the PLC using R and W.

The following are differences between SR, SW and R, W display values according to the internal data values of the PLC.

PLC internal data (for 16 bits)

9999

1001

1000

999

0

-1

-999

-1000

-1001

-9999

SR, SW

9999

1001

1000

999

0

-1

-999

-1000

-1001

-9999

R, W

9999

1001

1000

999

0

32769

33767

33768

33769

42767

(b) When using CP-9200SH, MP-920, MP-930, MP-940

Device name

Coil

Input relay

GOT bit register

Input register

Holding register

GOT data register


1 Usable by only MP-940.


MB0 to MB4095F

MB40960 to MB8191F1 1

MB245760 to MB28671F1 1

MB286720 to MB32767F1 1

IB0000 to IBFFFF

GB64 to GB16383

IW0 to IW7FFF

MW0 to MW32767

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

4 - 55 4 - 55

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(c) When using CP-9300MS (CP-9300MC incompatible)

Device name

Coil

Input relay

GOT bit register

Input register

Holding register

GOT data register



MB0 to MB3071F

IB0000 to IB3FF

GB64 to GB16383

IW0 to IW3F

MW0 to MW3071

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

(d) When using CP-9300MS (CP-9300MC compatible)

Device name

Coil

Input relay

GOT bit register

Input register

Data register

Output register

GOT data register



OB0 to OB1023

IB0 to IB1023

GB64 to GB16383

I0 to I63

M0 to M2047 o0 to o63

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

(e) When using CP-9200(H)

Device name

Coil

Input relay

GOT bit register

Input register

Output register

Data register

Common register

GOT data register


1 May be set only when CP-9200 is used.

(f) When using PROGIC-8


OB00000 to OB007FF

IB00000 to IB007FF

GB64 to GB16383

IW00000 to IW007F

OW0000 to OW007F

DW0000 to DW02047

ZD0000 to ZD02047 1

MW0000 to MW7694

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

Device name

Coil

Input relay

Link coil

GOT bit register

Input register

Holding register

Link register

GOT data register


Available range for monitoring o0001 to o2048 1

I0001 to I0512

D0001 to D1024

GB64 to GB16383

Z0001 to Z0128

W0001 to W2048

SW0001 to SW2048

R0001 to R1024

SR0001 to SR1024

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

1 Internal coils N1 to N1536 may be set as o513 to o2048.

However, make setting to avoid o1 to o0512 from overlapping o513 to o2048.

4 - 56 4 - 56

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(8) Allen-Bradley PLC

(a) When using SLC500 series

Bit (B)

Device name

Timer (timing bit) (TT)

Timer (completion bit) (TN)

Counter (up counter) (CU)

Counter (down counter) (CD)

Counter (completion bit) (CN)

Integer (N)

Word device bit

GOT internal bit register (GB)

Bit (B)

Timer (set value) (TP)

Timer (current value) (TA)

Counter (set value) (CP)

Counter (current value) (CA)

Integer (N)

GOT internal data register (GD)


Monitoring range

B3:0/0 to B3:255/15

B10:0/0 to B255:255/15

T4:0/14 to T4:255/14

T4:0/TT to T4:255/TT

T10:0/14 to T255:255/14

T10:0/TT to T255:255/TT

T4:0/13 to T4:255/13

T4:0/DN to T4:255/DN

T10:0/13 to T255:255/13

T10:0/DN to T255:255/DN

C5:0/15 to C5:255/15

C5:0/CU to C5:255/CU

C10:0/15 to C255:255/15

C10:0/CU to C255:255/CU

C5:0/14 to C5:255/14

C5:0/CD to C5:255/CD

C10:0/14 to C255:255/14

C10:0/CD to C255:255/CD

C5:0/13 to C5:255/13

C5:0/DN to C255:255/DN

C10:0/13 to C255:255/13

C10:0/DN to C255:255/DN

N7:0 to N7:255

N10:0 to N255:255

Designated bit of the following word devices

GB64 to GB16383

B3:0 to B3:255

T4:0.1 to T4:255.1

T4:0.PRE to T4:255.PRE

T10:0.1 to T255:255.1


T4:0.2 to T4:255.2

T4:0.ACC to T4:255.ACC

T10:0.2 to T255:255.2


1

1

C5:0.1 to C5:255.1

C5:0.PRE to C5:255.PRE

C10:0.1 to C255:255.1


C5:0.2 to C5:255.2

C5:0.ACC to C5:255.ACC

C10:0.2 to C255:255.2


N7:0 to N7:255

N10:0 to N255:255

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

1

1

1

Device No. notation

Decimal

Decimal

1 Writing on device is not allowed for 32 bit data.

2 If the device specified is outside the range, the object set to the out-of-range device may not be displayed. In that case, check and correct the device.

4 - 57 4 - 57

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(b) When using Micrologix 1000 series

Bit (B)


Bit (B)

Device name






Integer (N)

Word device bit





Integer (N)



Monitoring range

B3:0/0 to B3:31/15

T4:0/14 to T4:39/14

T4:0/TT to T4:39/TT

T4:0/13 to T4:39/13

T4:0/DN to T4:39/DN

C5:0/15 to C5:31/15

C5:0/CU to C5:31/CU

C5:0/14 to C5:31/14

C5:0/CD to C5:31/CD

C5:0/13 to C5:31/13

C5:0/DN to C5:31/DN

N7:0 to N7:104


GB64 to GB16383

B3:0 to B3:31

T4:0.1 to T4:39.1


T4:0.2 to T4:39.2


C5:0.1 to C5:39.1

C5:0.PRE to D5:39.PRE

C5:0.2 to C5:31.2


N7:0 to N7:14

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

1

1

1

1

1

Device No. notation

Decimal

Decimal



(c) When using Micrologix 1500 series

Bit (B)


Bit (B)

Device name






Integer (N)

Word device bit





Integer (N)



Monitoring range

B3:0/0 to B255:255/15

T3:0/14 to T255:255/14

T3:0/TT to T255:255/TT

T3:0/13 to T255:255/13

T3:0/DN to T255:255/DN

C3:0/15 to C255:255/15

C3:0/CU to C255:255/CU

C3:0/14 to C255:255/14

C3:0CD to C255:255/CD

C3:0/13 to C255:255/13

C3:0/DN to T255:255/DN

N3:0 to N255:255


GB64 to GB16383

B3:0 to B255:255

T3:0.1 to T255:255.1


T3:0.2 to T255:255.2


C3:0.1 to C255:255.1


C3:0.2 to C255:255.2


N3:0 to N255:255

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

1

1

1

1

1

Device No. notation

Decimal

Decimal



4 - 58 4 - 58

4 SPECIFICATION

(9) Sharp PLC

Device name

I/O relay

Timer counter (contact)

Timer counter (current value)

Register

File register

MELSOFT

Setting monitor

0 to 15777

20000 to 75777

T/C0000 to T/C1777

T/C0000 to T/C1777

(b0000 to b3776)

09000 to 09776

19000 to 19776

29000 to 29776

39000 to 39776

49000 to 49776

59000 to 59776

69000 to 69776

79000 to 79776

89000 to 89776

99000 to 99776

E0000 to E0776

E1000 to E1776

E2000 to E2776

E3000 to E3776

E4000 to E4776

E5000 to E5776

E6000 to E6776

E7000 to E7776

1000000 to 1177776

2000000 to 2177776

3000000 to 3177776

4000000 to 4177776

5000000 to 5177776

6000000 to 6177776

7000000 to 7177776

Device No. notation

Octal

4 - 59 4 - 59

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(10) Toshiba PLC

(a) PROSEC T Series

Device name

External input (X)

External output (Y)

Internal relay (R)

Special relay (S)

Link register relay (Z)

Link relay (L)

Timer (contact) (T) 4

Counter (contact) (C)

Word device bit


External input (X)

External output (Y)

Internal relay (R)

Special relay (S)

Link register relay (Z)

Link relay (L)

Timer (current value) (T) 4

Counter (current value) (C) 4

Data register (D) 2

Link register (W)

File register (F)

Bit device word

5

4

Available range for setting monitor

X0000 to X511F

Y0000 to Y511F

R0000 to R999F

S0000 to S255F

Z0000 to Z999F

L0000 to L255F

T000 to T999

C000 to C511

Designated bit of the following word devices (except timer

(current value) and counter (current value))

GB64 to GB16383

XW000 to XW511

YW000 to YW511

RW000 to RW999

SW000 to SW255



3

LW000 to LW255

T000 to T999

C000 to C511

D0000 to D8191

W0000 to W2047

F0000 to F32467 1

Conversion of the above bit devices to words (except link register relay, timer (contact) and counter (contact))


GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511



1 The extended file register is not supported.

2 When the mode switch on the CPU module is set to "P-RUN", D0000 to D4095 are write disabled.

3 The Z relay corresponds to 1 bit in 1000 words from W registers 0 to 999.

4 The contacts and current values of the timers/counters are written after they have been read once. During that period, therefore, do not change them in the sequence program.

5 The bit of the word device is designated after it has been read once. During that period, therefore, do not change it in the sequence program.

4 - 60 4 - 60

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(b) PROSEC V Series

The representations of the device addresses set differ between Toshiba

PLC's peripheral software and GOT as indicated below. Make setting after converting the Toshiba side addresses into the GOT side addresses.

Device name

Special register (S) 3

Data register (R) 3

Word device bit 1, 3


Special register (SW) 4

Data register (RW)

2, 4

Data register (D)

2, 4

Bit device word



Available range for setting/monitoring

(GOT side address)

S0000 to S511F

R00000 to R4095F


(Toshiba side address)

S0000 to S8191

R00000 to R65535

Specified bit of the following word devices

(Except data register (R))

GB64 to GB16383

SW000 to SW511

(SW000 to SW510: 32 bits)

-

16 bits: SW000 to SW511

32 bits: SD000 to SD255 (integer)

32 bits: SF000 to SF255 (real number)

RW0000 to RW4095

(RW0000 to RW4094: 32 bits)

16 bits: RW0000 to RW4095

32 bits: RD0000 to RD2047 (integer)

32 bits: RF0000 to RF2047 (real number)

D0000 to D4095

(D0000 to D4094: 32 bits)

16 bits: D0000 to D4095

32 bits: DD0000 to DD2047 (integer)

32 bits: DF0000 to DF2047 (real number)

Converting the above bit devices into words

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511 -

-

1 Specify the word device bit after the GOT has read it once.

Note that if you make a change in the sequence program before that, the specifying destination will be changed.

2 RW0000 and D0000 differ in representation but indicate the data registers in the same region.

3 Use the following method to convert the device address into the one represented by the

GOT for bit data.

Toshiba address representation/16=word address (quotient) ... bit address (remainder)

Toshiba side address representation

S8191

R65535

D65535

(Word device bit)

GOT side address representation

S511 F

(Decimal)(Hexadecimal)

R4095 F

(Decimal)(Hexadecimal)

D4095 b15

(Decimal)(Decimal)

Conversion expression

8191/16=511...15

65535/16=4095...15

65535/16=4095...15

Data format

16-bit data

32-bit data

(Integer)

4 Use the following method to convert the device address into the one represented by the

GOT for word data.

(Real number)

Toshiba side address representation

DW10

DD10

DF10

GOT side address representation

D10

D20

(Calculate device No. in increments of 32 bits)

D20

(Calculate device No. in increments of 32 bits)

4 - 61 4 - 61

4 SPECIFICATION

(11) SIEMENS PLC connection

(a) SIMATIC S7-300 series

Device name

Input relay

Output relay

Bit memory

GOT bit register

Input relay

Output relay

Bit memory

Timer (present value)

Counter (present value)

Data register


I0000 to I1277

Q0000 to Q1277

M0000 to M2557

GB64 to GB16383

IW000 to IW126

QW000 to QW126

MW000 to MW254

T000 to T127

C00 to C63

D000100000 to D000108190

D000200000 to D000208190

D000300000 to D000308190

•

•

•

D012600000 to D012608190

D012700000 to D012708190

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

GOT data register


(b) SIMATIC S7-400 series

Device name

Input relay

Output relay

Bit memory

GOT bit register

Input relay

Output relay

Bit memory



Data register

GOT data register



I0000 to I5117

Q0000 to Q5117

M00000 to M20477

GB64 to GB16383

IW000 to IW510

QW000 to QW510

MW0000 to MW2046

T000 to T511

C000 to C511

D000100000 to D000165534

D000200000 to D000265534

D000300000 to D000365534

•

•

•

D409400000 to D409465534

D409500000 to D409565534

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

MELSOFT

4 - 62 4 - 62

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(12) Hitachi PLC connection

Device name

External input (X)

External output (Y)

Remote external input (X)

Remote external output (Y)

First CPU link (L)

Second CPU link (L)

Data area (M)

On-delay timer (TD) 1

Single-shot timer (SS) 1

Watchdog timer (WDT) 1

Monostable timer (MS) 1

Retentive timer (TMR) 1

Up counter (CU) 1

Ring counter (RCU) 1

Up/down counter (CT) 1

Bit internal output (R)

DIF (leading edge detection) 1

DFN (trailing edge detection) 1

GOT bit register

External input (WX)

External output (WY)

Remote external input (WX)

Remote external output (WY)

First CPU link (WL)

Second CPU link (WL)

Data area (WM)

Timer/counter (elapsed value)(TC)

1

Word internal output (WR)

GOT data register


Monitoring range

X00000 to X05A95

Y00000 to Y05A95

X10000 to X49995

Y10000 to Y49995

L0000 to L3FFF

L10000 to L13FFF

M0000 to M3FFF

TD000 to TD255

SS000 to SS255

WDT000 to WDT255

MS000 to MS255

TMR000 to TMR255

CU000 to CU511

RCU000 to RCU511

CT000 to CT511

R000 to R7BF

DIF000 to DIF511

DFN000 to DFN511

GB64 to GB16383

WX0000 to WX05A7

WY0000 to WY05A7

WX1000 to WX4997

WY1000 to WY4997

WL000 to WL3FF

WL1000 to WL13FF

WM000 to WM3FF

TC000 to TC511

WR000 to WR3FF

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 toGS511

Device No. notation

Hexadecimal + decimal

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Decimal

Hexadecimal + decimal

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Decimal

Hexadecimal

Decimal

1 The same number cannot be used.


4 - 63 4 - 63

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(13) Matsushita Electric Works PLC connection 1

Device name

Input relay (X) 2, 3

Output relay (Y) 3

Internal relay (R)

Link relay (L) 5

Special relay (R) 2

Timer contact (T) 2, 4

Counter contact (C) 2, 4


Input relay (WX) 2

Output relay (WY)

Internal relay (WR)

Link relay (WL)

Special relay (WR)

Timer/counter (elapsed value)(EV) 4

Timer/counter (set value)(SV) 4

Data register (DT)

Link register (LD) 5

File register (FL) 5



Available range for setting monitor

X0000 to X511F

Y0000 to Y511F

R0000 to R886F

L0000 to L639F

R9000 to R910F

T0000 to T3071

C0000 to C3071

GB64 to GB16383

WX000 to WX511

WY000 to WY511

WR000 to WR886

WL000 to WL639

WR900 to WR910

EV0000 to EV3071

SV0000 to SV3071

DT00000 to DT10239

LD0000 to LD8447

FL00000 to FL32764

GD64 to GD16383

GS0 to GS511

1 Device ranges for use of the FP10SH. When the FP0, FP1, FP2, FP3, FP5, FP10(S) or FP-M is used, the device ranges vary with the CPU.

2 Write to device cannot be performed.

3 Only the devices assigned to the I/O contacts using the peripheral software are usable.

4 The number of timer and counter devices varies with the first number of the counters set with the system register (No. 5) value.

5 There are no corresponding devices on the FP0/FP1/FP-M.

(14) Microcomputer connection

Device name


Data register (D)

Specified bit of word device

Data register (D)




GB64 to GB16383 1

D0 to D2047



1

D0 to D2047

GD64 to GD16383 1

GS0 to GS511

1 Write and read operations for GB and GD devices cannot be performed from the host.

4 - 64 4 - 64

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

4.5.3 Device ranges available for the GOT-F900 series

The devices available for each object function of the GOT-F900 series depend on the connection target CPU and connection form.

Device availabilities are listed below on connection target CPU and connection form bases.

(1) QCPU(A Mode), ACPU

Input (X)

Output (Y)

Internal relay (M)

Latch relay (L)

Annunciator (F)

Link relay (B)


Timer

Counter

Device name


Data register (D)


Link register (W)

Timer (set value) (TS)


Counter (set value) (CS)


File register (R)

Accumulator (A)

Index register 1


Contact (TT)

Coil (TC)

Contact (CT)

Coil (CC)

(Z)

(V)


X0 to X0FFF

Y0 to Y0FFF

M0 to M8191

L0 to L8191

F0 to F2047

B0 to B1FFF

M9000 to M9255

TT0 to TT2047

TC0 to TC2047

CT0 to CT1023

CC0 to CC1023

GB132 to GB1023

D0 to D8191

D9000 to D9255

W0 to W1FFF

TS0 to TS2047

TN0 to TN2047

CS0 to CS1023

CN0 to CN1023

R0 to R8191

A0 to A1

Z0 to Z6 (Z0

=

Z)

V0 to V6 (V0

=

V)

GD100 to GD1023

1 Write to the index register cannot be performed during computer link connection.

(2) FXCPU

(a) FX

0

, FX

0N

, FX

0S

, FX

1

, FX

1s

, FX

1N

, FX

2

, FX

2C

, FX

2N

, FX

2NC

, series

Device name

Input relay (X)

Output relay (Y)

Auxiliary relay (M)

State (S)


Timer contact (T)

Counter contact (C)


Timer (current value) (T)

Counter (current value) (C)

Data register (D)





X0000 to X0377

Y0000 to Y0377

M0000 to M3071

S0000 to S0999

M8000 to M8255

T000 to T255

C000 to C255

GB132 to GB1023

T000 to T255

C000 to C255

D000 to D0999

D1000 to D7999

D8000 to D8255

GD100 to GD1023

Device number notation

Octal

Decimal



Decimal

4 - 65 4 - 65

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(b) FX(

2N

)-10GM, FX(

2N

)-20GM series

Device name

Input relay (X)

Output relay (Y)

Auxiliary relay (M)



Data register (D)




Index register

(Z)

(V)


X0000 to X0377

Y0000 to Y0067

M0000 to M0511

M9000 to M9175

GB132 to GB1023

D000 to D0999

D4000 to D6999

D9000 to D9599

GD100 to GD1023

Z0 to Z7 (32 bits)

V0 to V7 (16 bits)


Octal

Decimal



Decimal

(3) QCPU(Q Mode), QnACPU

Input (X)

Output (Y)

Internal relay (M)

Latch relay (L)

Annunciator (F)

Link relay (B)


Timer

Counter

Device name

Contact (TT)

Coil (TC)

Contact (CT)

Coil (CC)


Special relay (SM)

Retentive timer

Step relay (S)


Data register (D)


Special register (SD)

Link register (W)


Timer (current value) (TN) 2

Counter (current value) (CN) 2

Retentive timer (current value) (SN)

File register (R) 2

Index register (Z)


Contact (SS)

Coil (SC)


X0 to X1FFF

Y0 to Y1FFF

M0 to M32767

L0 to L32767

F0 to F32767

B0 to B7FFF

SB0 to SB7FF

TT0 to TT32767

TC0 to TC32767

CT0 to CT32767

CC0 to CC32767

M9000 to M9255

SM0 to SM2047

SS0 to SS32767

SC0 to SC32767

S0 to S32767

GB132 to GB1023

D0 to D32767

D9000 to D9255

SD0 to SD2047

W0 to W7FFF

SW0 to SW7FF

TN0 to TN32767

CN0 to CN32767

SN0 to SN32767

R0 to R32767 1

Z0 to Z15

GD100 to GD1023

1 Block file register that is switched by the RSET command is set/monitored.

2 When the GOT-F900 series is connected to the system where the A series computer link module is loaded in the QnACPU, monitoring and write cannot be performed on the timers, counters and file registers.

Also note that the available range for setting/monitoring will be the range of the ACPU (AnACPU equivalent).

4 - 66 4 - 66

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(4) Omron PLC

Device name

I/O relay

Internal auxiliary relay



Holding relay (HR)

Timer contact (TIM)

Counter contact (CNT)

GOT bit register

Data memory (DM)

Timer (current value) (TIM)

Counter (current value) (CNT)

Extended data memory (EM current bank)

Extended data memory (EM banks 0 to 12)

GOT data register

(5) Microcomputer board

Device name

Bit data (M)

Special internal relay 1

GOT bit device (GB)

Word data

Special data register 1

GOT word device (GD)


..0000 to 614315

WR0000 to WR51115

LR00000 to LR19915

AR00000 to AR51115

HR0000 to HR9915

TIM000 to TIM2047

CNT000 to CNT2047

GB132 to GB1023

DM0000 to DM9999

TIM000 to TIM2047

CNT000 to CNT2047

EM0000 to EM9999

GD100 to GD1023


M0 to M2047

M8000 to M8063

GB132 to GB1023

D0 to D4095

D8000 to D8015

GD100 to GD1023

1 Special is a device used for special applications (such as interrupt output and communication error information) of the GOT.

4 - 67 4 - 67

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(6) Allen-Bradley PLC

Bit (B)

Device name


Timer (timing bit) (TN)




Word device bit






Integer (N)




B3:0/0 to B3:255/15

B10:0/0 to B255:255/15

T4:0/14 to T4:255/14

T4:0/TT to T4:255/TT

T10:0/14 to T255:255/14

T10:0/TT to T255:255/TT

T4:0/13 to T4:255/13

T4:0/DN to T4:255/DN

T10:0/13 to T255:255/13

T10:0/DN to T255:255/DN

C5:0/15 to C5:255/15

C5:0/CU to C5:255/CU

C10:0/15 to C255:255/15

C10:0/CU to C255:255/CU

C5:0/14 to C5:255/14

C5:0/CD to C5:255/CD

C10:0/14 to C255:255/14

C10:0/CD to C255:255/CD

C5:0/13 to C5:255/13

C5:0/DN to C255:255/DN

C10:0/13 to C255:255/13

C10:0/DN to C255:255/DN


GB64 to GB1023

T4:0.1 to T4:255.1


T10:0.1 to T255:255.1


T4:0.2 to T4:255.2


T10:0.2 to T255:255.2


C5:0.1 to C5:255.1


C10:0.1 to C255:255.1


C5:0.2 to C5:255.2


C10:0.2 to C255:255.2


N7:0 to N7:255

N10:0 to N255:255

GD100 to GD1023

1

1

1

1


Octal

Decimal

4 - 68 4 - 68

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(7) SIEMENS PLC (S7-200) connection

Device name

Variable memory

Input

Output

Bit memory

Special memory

Timer

Counter

PLC control relay

GOT bit register

Variable memory

Input

Output

Analog input

Analog output

Bit memory

Special memory

Timer

Counter

High-speed counter

PLC control relay

GOT data register


V0000.0 to V5119.7

I0.0 to I7.7

Q0.0 to Q7.7

M00.0 to M31.7

SM000.0 to SM194.7

T000 to T255

C000 to C255

S00.0 to S31.7

GB132 to GB1023

VW0000 to VW5118

IW0 to IW6

QW0 to QW6

AIW00 to AIW30

AQW00 to AQW30

MW00 to MW30

SMW000 to SMW192

T000 to T255

C000 to C255

HC0 to HC2

S00 to S30

GD100 to GD1023

4 - 69 4 - 69

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(8) SIEMENS PLC (S7-300) connection

Device name

Input relay

Output relay

Bit memory

GOT bit register



Data register

GOT data register


I0000 to I5117

Q0000 to Q5117

M00000 to M20477

GB132 to GB1023

T000 to T511

C000 to C511

D000100000 to D102365534

GD100 to GD1023

(9) Matsushita PLC (FP0, FP2SH, FP2-CCU)

Device name

Word device

Device name

Input relay (X) 3

Output relay (Y)

Internal relay (R) 4

Link relay (L)*1

Alarm warning relay (E) 2 3

Timer contact (T) 3

Counter contact (C) 3

GOT bit register

Timer/counter elapsed value (EV)

Timer/counter set value (SV)

Data register (DT) 4

Link register (LD) 1

File register (FL) 1 5

GOT data register


X0000 to X511F

Y0000 to X511F

R0000 to R910F

L0000 to L639F

E0 to E2047

T0 to T3017

C0 to C3071

GB132 to GB1023

EV0 to EV3071

SV0 to SV3071

DT0 to DT16383

LD0 to LD8447

FL0 to FL32764

GD100 to GD1023

1 Except the FP0.

2 Available for the FP2SH only.

3 Data cannot be written.

4 The special relays (R9000 to R910F) and special data registers (D9000 top D9255) are also included. For the FP2SH, however, access to the special data registers cannot be made.

5 For the FP2SH, access to only bank 0 can be made.

4 - 70 4 - 70

4 SPECIFICATION

MELSOFT

(10) Inverter (FREQROL series (A500 series, E500 series, F500 series))

Bit device

Word device

Device name

Control status (S) 1

Alarm code (A) 1

Parameter (Pr) 1

Program operation (PG) 1

Special parameter (SP) 1


S0: to S7:

A0: to A7:

Pr000: to Pr993:

PG000: to PG89:

SP108: to SP127:

1 Set the station number in .

4 - 71 4 - 71

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5

CHAPTER5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

(1) About object item settings

Each object item has settings to be made to achieve function outline examples.

The settings given are specifically only the items where the default values of that object must be changed.

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

Graph

Display mode

Settings

: Sample

: Locus

Setting Portion

<Device/Attribute> tab

X axis Device: D100

Y axis Device: D200

Settings

(2) About setting item list

The items marked " " in the setting item list of each object item are registered to the keyword function of the help.

By entering a keyword to make a search, you can directly display the explanation of the corresponding portion.

"Numerical display" dialog box

Basic

Device

Shape

Frame

Plate

Numeral

Device

Device dialog box ..Set the DeviceNo.

Data type

Data length

Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real

16bit/32bit

Unchecked/checked

Image List dialog box

Designation of Frame (0 to 255)

..Choose the Shape

Designation of Background (0 to 255)

Designation of Color (0 to 255)

1) Enter keyword.

Explanation of "Numeral" item in setting item list appears.

2) Search.

3) As a result of search, multiple candidates

for the[Numeral] item appear.

Here, choose "Numeral" in

[Numerical Display] dialog box.

4) Display.

5 - 1 5 - 1

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.1 Data Display Functions

The data display functions show the PLC CPU's memory data in real time. They are available in the following types.

• Numerical display function...........Shows a numerical value.

• Data list display function ..............Shows numerical values in tabular form.

• ASCII display function..................Shows a text.

• Clock display function ..................Shows time.

5.1.1 Numerical display function (shows word device data as a numerical value)


This function shows data stored in a PLC CPU device as a numerical value.

(1) Function outline

(a) Reads the data stored in a PLC CPU device to the GOT and displays it as a numerical value in real time.

D100 150

150

5

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab Device

Settings Setting Portion

<Basic>tab Device: D100

(b) Changes the displayed numerical color/background color according to the current value of a monitor device.

Present temperature

Present temperature

Present temperature

-20 125

Settings

58

(Monitor device: D0)

: D0

Setting Portion

<Case>tab

Settings

Case1: Defined case($V<0), Numeral: 3

Case2: Defined case(100<$V), Numeral: 0

Plate: 255

(c) Used with the level display function (refer to Section 5.4.6).

(Only when using the GOT-A900 series)

25 98

Setting Portion



Settings

Numeral: 0

Setting Portion

<Option>tab Display mode: XOR

Settings

POINT

• The numerical display function allows only one value to be superimposed on one level indication provided by the level display function.

• A numerical value on a level indication does not blink (flicker).

5 - 2 5 - 2

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The numerical display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Numerical display" dialog box

(a) When using the GOT-A900 series

Basic

Device

Shape

Frame

Plate

Numeral

Device

Data type

Data length

Device dialog box

..Set the Device No.


16bit/32bit

Unchecked/checked



..Choose the Shape.



Form

Blink

Reverse

No/Low/Middle/High

Unchecked/checked

Numeral/Numeral and Plate

Format

Signed decimal/Unsigned decimal/Real/Octal/Binary/Hexadecimal

Right alignment/Left alignment/Center

Disp all digits (add 0)

High quality font

Size (Height width size setting)

Digits (Digit count setting)

Decimal point (Digit count setting)

Adjust decimal point range

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Case

Edit

(Setting for each case)

Delete

Edit Display Format dialog box ..Set the display attribute changing

conditional expression and display attribute.

Option

Security

Offset Checked/Unchecked Device

Device dialog box


Trigger

Display mode

Trigger Type

Transparent/XOR

Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger

Device

16bit/32bit

Device dialog box


Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real

Range Edit Range dialog box ..Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Initial display

Hold display

Bit trigger

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Bit (Bit count setting)

Expression

Mask

Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.

None/AND/OR/XOR

Pattern

Shift

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right

No.of shift Set the shift count.

Expression Input Expression dialog box

...Set the calculation expression.

5 - 3 5 - 3

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic

Device

Shape

Frame

Plate

Numeral

Device

Data type

Device dialog box


Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN

Data length 16bit/32bit

Unchecked/checked

Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.




Form

Format



Disp all digits (add 0)

Unchecked/checked




Expression

Gain 1 (Gain 1 value setting)


Offset (Offset value setting)

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method.

1) Choose [Help]-[Object].

2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up numerical display" from

Contents of Help.

POINT

(1) When using the GOT-A900 series

• Security, offset and expression can be set.

• The display color and attributes can be changed according to the monitor device value or specified device status (ON/OFF, device value).

• The display can be superimposed on a level display or used for XOR display.

Only one value may be superimposed on a level display.

• Values including decimal points can be displayed or calculated.

(2) When using the GOT-F900 series

• Expression can be set.

5 - 4 5 - 4

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.1.2 Data list display function (lists multiple word device states as numerical values)


This function gathers the states of multiple word devices periodically and lists them as numerical values.


(a) Sorts a list in the preset priority according to the states of the corresponding word devices (D11, D21, D31, D41).

No.

Machining count result

1

2

3

4

Machine

1

Machine

2

Machine

3

Machine

4

D10: 100 D30: 100

D11: 10 D31: 30

D12: 3 D32: 3

D20: 100 D40: 100

D21: 25 D41: 40

D22: 3 D42: 3

D10: 100 D30: 100

D11: 30 D31: 32

D12: 3 D32: 5

D20: 100 D40: 100

D21: 25 D41: 41

D22: 3 D42: 3

GOT display setting


Machine

1

Machine

2

Machine

3

Machine

4

Plan Output Failure

(D10) (D11) (D12)

(D20) (D21) (D22)

(D30) (D31) (D32)

(D40) (D41) (D42)

Sorted in ascending order on the basis of this column.

List is sorted every time the display is updated.

Plan Output Failure

100

100

100

100

10

20

30

40

3

3

3

3

No.


1

2

3

4

Machine

2

Machine

1

Machine

3

Machine

4

Plan Output Failure

100

100

100

100

25

30

32

41

3

3

3

3

Setting Portion

<Form>tab

Rows

Display rows

Columns

Sort:

Sort/Attr. column

Settings

: 4

: 4

: 4

: Ascending

: 3

Setting Portion

<List>tab

Settings

Row1: Columns 2 Device(D10)




Device: Random

Setting Portion

<Form>tab

Rows

Display rows

Columns

Label

Sort:

Sort/Attr. column

(b) Using the data list display function and graph display (statistical graph in the example) together shows multiple device states effectively.

No.

1

2

3

4

Machine name

Machine

1

Machine

2

Machine

3

Machine

4

Target

100

100

100

100

Output

24

42

22

22

Settings

: 4

: 4

: 3

: 2

: Number

: 3

Setting Portion

<List>tab

Settings

Row1: Columns 2 Device (D10), Label foreground: 255 (White)

Row2: Columns 2 Device (D20), Label foreground: 224 (Red)

Row3: Columns 2 Device (D30), Label foreground: 3 (Blue)

Row4: Columns 2 Device (D40), Label foreground: 252 (Yellow)

Device: Random

: In a statistic graph, set the monitor devices and display colors to match the above.

5 - 5 5 - 5

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The data list display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Data List" dialog box

Basic

Shape

Frame

Plate

Title

Text

Rule

Reverse

Unchecked/checked



Designation of Plate (0 to 255)

Designation of Title (0 to 255)


..Choose the Shape.

Designation of Rule (0 to 255)

Checked/unchecked

Form

List

Rows

Display rows (Row count setting)

Columns (Column count setting)

Label Checked/unchecked

Interval (Vertical horizontal spacing setting)


Sort Number/Ascending/Descending/No sort

Sort/Attr. column

High quality font Checked/unchecked

Row.n

Edit Rows dialog box

Device

Comment No.

Label pattern

Label foreground

Label background

Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Comment List dialog box

..Set the display comment.

Designation of Label pattern

Designation of Label foreground (0 to 255)

Designation of Label background (0 to 255)

Col.n

Device

Comment

Edit Columus dialog box

Format

Format



Disp. all digits (add 0)



Device

BCD/Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN

Title (Set the column item name)

Color (0 to 255)

16bit/32bit

Expression

Mask

Pattern

Shift

None/AND/OR/XOR

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right


Expression

Input Expression dialog box

Continuous/Random

Continuous/Random


Case

Edit

Delete

Edit Display Format dialog box ..Set the display attribute changing conditional

expression and display attribute.

5 - 6 5 - 6

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Option

Security

Offset

Trigger

Trigger Type

Checked/unchecked Device Device dialog box


Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger

16bit/32bit


Device

Device dialog box


Range

Edit Range dialog box ..Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Initial display

Hold display

Bit trigger

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked


Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box

...Set the bit device and condition enabling.

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up data list display" from Contents of Help.

POINT

• Security and offset can be set.

• Display Label rows can be set. Combining the label rows and statistical or bar graphs makes effective display.

• Display sequence can be sorted in the ascending or descending order of number or device values.

• Display color and attributes can be changed when the monitor device value reaches the specified value.

5 - 7 5 - 7

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.1.3 ASCII display function (shows data stored consecutively within devices as a character string)


This function regards the data stored consecutively in word devices as text data (ASCII code) and shows them as a character string.


(a) Recognizes the data stored consecutively within the corresponding word devices (D10 to D14) as text data and shows them as a character string on the GOT.

D10: 5841

H

D11: 342D

H

D12: 0031

H

(XA)

(4-)

(1)

AX-41

Setting Portion



<Form>tab

Size : 8 8

Digits : 5

Settings

(b) Updates the characters according to the condition with the monitor device value changed from a peripheral device, sequence program or the like.

D10: 504F

H

D11: 5245

H

D12: 5441

H

D13: 2045

H

(PO)

(RE)

(TA)

( E)

D10: 5453

H

D11: 504F

H

D12: 2020

H

D13: 2020

H

(TS)

(PO)

( )

( )

Setting Portion


Settings

Operating condition

Line 1 OPERATE

Operating condition

Line 1 STOP

Setting Portion

<Form>tab Digits: 8

Settings

5 - 8 5 - 8

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Basic

Device

(2) Setting items

The ASCII display function consists of the following setting items.

• "ASCII display" dialog box


Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Form

Shape

Frame

Plate

Text

Blink

Reverse

Unchecked/checked







No/Low/Middle/High

Unchecked/checked

Text/Text and Plate

Option

Security

Offset Checked/unchecked Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Trigger

Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger

16bit/32bit


Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.


Initial display

Hold display

Bit trigger

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked


Set

Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box


5 - 9 5 - 9

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Device Device


Shape

Frame

Plate

Text

Unchecked/checked




..Choose the Shape.


Form



Alignment Left/Right/Center

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up ASCII display" from Contents of

Help.

POINT



5 - 10 5 - 10

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.1.4 Clock display function (reads and shows clock data of PLC CPU)


This function displays the PLC CPU's clock data (GOT-A900 series) or GOT's built-in clock data (GOT-F900 series) on the GOT.



The clock data of the PLC CPU is read and displayed at power-on, and thereafter, the clock data of the PLC CPU is read every hour.

Between when the clock data is read from the PLC CPU and when the clock data is read next, the time counted in the GOT is displayed.

Either the date or time can be displayed.

(When GT SoftGOT is used, the clock data of the personal computer is displayed in real time.)

00/08/11

13:48

1) Clock display object (date indication)

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Form>tab

Settings

Display style: Date Shape: checked

Data format: yy/mm/dd

2) Clock display object (time indication)

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab Display style: Time

Settings

POINT

The GOT reads the clock data of the PLC CPU once an hour. If the clock data of the PLC CPU is changed, therefore, the clock indication of the GOT may not be updated for an hour at the longest.

REMARK

• When the date is selected, the year is displayed as the two lower digits of the year.

• When the time is selected, the time is displayed on a 24-hour basis.


Shows the GOT's built-in clock data.

Either the date or time can be displayed.

11/AUG/2000(FRI)

13:48:40

1) Clock display object (date indication)

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Form>tab

Settings

Display style: Date Shape: checked

Data format: Type1

2) Clock display object (time indication)

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Form>tab

Display style: Time

Data format: Type1

Settings

5 - 11 5 - 11

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

(2) Setting items

The clock display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Clock" dialog box


Basic

Display style

Shape

Frame

Plate

Color

Date

Time

Unchecked/checked





Form

Data format yy/mm/dd dd/mm/yy mm/dd/yy


High quality font Checked/unchecked

Option

Security


Basic

Display style

Shape

Frame

Plate

Color

Form

Data format

Date

Time

Unchecked/checked



..Choose the Shape.


Designation of Color (0 to 255) yy/mm/dd dd/mm/yy mm/dd/yy

Type1

Type2


MELSOFT

5 - 12 5 - 12

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up clock display" from Contents of

Help.

POINT


• Security can be set.

• The clock display function reads the clock data of the following PLC CPU

depending on the connection form.

Connection form Clock data read destination

Bus connection, CPU direct-connection, computer link connection

PLC CPU at connection destination

MELSECNET connection PLC CPU of master station/control station

CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) PLC CPU of master station/local station

CC-Link connection (remote device station) Clock display function cannot be performed.

• When a communication board having a built-in clock function is installed to the

GOT (except A95 GOT/A956WGOT), the clock display is available when the microcomputer connection is chosen. (When the computer link connection

(including third-party PLC connection) is chosen, the clock function of that communication board cannot be used.)

For specifications and performance details of the communication board having built-in clock function, refer to the A9GT-RS2T serial communication board user's manual.

5 - 13 5 - 13

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.2 Message Display Functions

The message display functions show comments or error messages corresponding to the PLC CPU status.

They are available in the following types.

• Comment display function .........Shows a comment corresponding to a device state.

• Alarm history display function....Shows occurrence times and comments when condition is enabled.

• Alarm list display function ..........Shows error messages or comments in list form.

5.2.1 Comment display function (shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF or value of monitor device)


This function shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF of a bit device or the specified range of a word device.


(a) Shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF of a bit device (X0).

OFF

X0

ON

X0 is OFF

X0 is ON

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

Settings

Device: X0

(b) Shows a comment corresponding to the value of a word device (D100).

When the GOT-F900 series is used, this function shows the comment of the comment number equal to the value of the word device (D100).

D100 1 10 100

Current production quantity is 1.

Current production quantity is 10.

Today's production is completed.

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

Settings

Device: D100

(c) Changes the entire on-screen comment display according to ON/OFF of the bit device (X0). (Example: Changing between Japanese and English)

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Case(Bit)>tab

Settings

Device: X0(Set the same device to all objects)

ON time setting

OFF time setting

: Direct(Enter comment data in Japanese)

: Direct(Enter comment data in English)

5 - 14 5 - 14

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The comment display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Comment Display" dialog box


Basic

Device

Shape

Case (Bit)

Frame

Size

Blink

Alignment

ON/Off

Device dialog box

Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)/Word (BCD16)

Unchecked/checked


..Choose the Shape.


Specify (height width size).

(Text/Text and Plate)

(Left/Right/Center)

No.

Direct

Comment List dialog box ...Setting of display comment

Unchecked/checked

Copy from ON(OFF only)

Attribute(ON)/

Attribute(OFF)

Plate

Change attribute

Style

Text

Solid

Blink

Reverse

High quality font (Direct only)


Unchecked/checked

Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised

Designation of Color

Designation of Solid of characters.

No/Low/Middle/High

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Case (Word)

Edit

Edit Display Format dialog box

Delete

Deletion of setting

Range

Indication

Edit range dialog box

...Set the conditional expression.

No./ Indirect/ Hold

Attribute

Plate

Change attribute

Style

Designation of Plate

Unchecked/checked


Text

Solid

Blink



None/Low

Middle/High

Reverse Unchecked

/checked

5 - 15 5 - 15

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Option

Security

Setting of Security (0 to 15)

Offset Unchecked/checked

Device

Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Trigger

Display mode Transparent/XOR

Preview comment

Unchecked/checked

Disp.head

Browse

Comment List dialog box ...Setting of comment

Fixed (1 to 32767)

Device

Device dialog box


Device

16bit/32bit




Initial display

Hold display

Bit trigger

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked


Expression

Mask

Pattern

Shift



None/AND/OR/XOR

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right


Expression



5 - 16 5 - 16

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Device

Shape

Frame

Data type Bit/Word

Unchecked/checked

Image List dialog box ...Choose the Image List.



Case (Bit)

Device dialog box

ON/Off No.

Direct

Comment List dialog box ...Setting of comment

Unchecked/checked

Copy from ON (OFF only)

Attribute(ON)/

Attribute(OFF)

Plate

Change attribute

Text


Unchecked/checked


Case (Word)

Edit

Start No.


Plate

Change attribute


Text Designation of Color (0 to 255)

Set the first device number of comment to be displayed.

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up message display" "Setting up comment display" from

Contents of Help.

POINT



• Comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area.

• Multiple line comments can be displayed.

• Display color and attributes of a comment can be changed when the monitor

device (bit) value turns ON/OFF.

• The display can be superimposed on a level display or used for XOR display.

Refer to Section 4.4.2 for superimposing on the level display function.

5 - 17 5 - 17

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.2.2 Alarm history display function (shows a history of occurrence times, comments and others when a condition is enabled)


This function shows as history data the occurrence times, comments and other information when the specified bit device turns on or the condition of a word device value is enabled.


(a) Error history display

Shows a history list of dates and times, messages and others when a device is confirmed to have turned on (error occurrence). (On the GOT-

F900 series, shows only the occurrence dates and times, messages and occurrence counts.)

OFF

X0

ON

Alarm History (Form) dialog box

Setting Portion

Alarm History (Common) dialog box

OCCURRED MESSAGE RESTORED CHECKS CUMLAT COUNT

98/06/01 10:25 Conveyor 1 error 11:25 10:45 01:00 1

98/06/01 12:05 Conveyor 2 error 12:40 12:28 00:20 5

98/06/01 12:35 Conveyor 3 error 13:20 12:50 00:15 2

Shows the history when the monitor device turns on.

<Basic>tab

<Monitor Device>tab

<Form>tab

Settings

Mode: Cumulation

Delete No.: Continuous, Comment No.: Continuous, Device: X10

Display style: Occurences, Restorations, Checks, Cumulative, Occur frequency

(b) Error detail display (only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

Details and action for the comment turned on (when an error occurred) can be displayed on the base window, window screen or comment window.

OCCURRED MESSAGE RESTORED CHECKS

98/06/01 10:25 Line 1 error 11:25 10:45

98/06/01 12:05 Line 2 error 12:28

98/06/01 12:35 Line 3 error

Move upward

Detailed display

Delete display

Detailed display screen appears by one touch/touch key entry.

When detail display is provided by one touch, the above

message selection cursors do not appear.

The specified comment is displayed on the special window screen for alarm history display.

Window screen of the designated number is displayed.

Base screen of the designated number is displayed.

Line 1 CHECK

Line 1 CHECK


X0

Line 1 CHECK

ON


Register as comments the detailed contents and corrective actions for when the specified devices turn to

ON status.

Setting Portion

Alarm History (Common) dialog box <Basic>tab

Display on the specified window screen or base screen the detailed contents and corrective actions for when the specified devices turn to ON status.

Settings

Detailed display: Comment window/Window screen/Base Screen

5 - 18 5 - 18

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The alarm history display function consists of the following setting items.


• "Alarm History (Common)" dialog box

Make settings common to all projects of the alarm history display function.

Basic

Mode

Alarm

Watch cycle

Detailed display

History store

History erase

Memory store

History

Cumulation

Set the number of device points to be monitored (1 to 3072).

Set the monitoring cycle (6 to 800).

Not display/Comment window/Window screen/Base Screen

Unchecked/checked

Device Device dialog box

Unchecked/checked

Device

...Setting of Device No.


Unchecked/checked

Set the storage cycle (1 to 60).

Unchecked/checked Store CSV format

When number of alarm occurences exceed set value, delete oldest alarm occurences

History print Unchecked/checked

Print Format

Unchecked/checked

Print Format dialog box

Delete

Delete the setting.

...Set the row count, column count, margins, etc.

Monitor Device

Device No.

Comment No.

Display No.

Edit

Continuous/Random/Fixed

Continuous/Random

Continuous/Random

Edit Alarm History dialog box

Type Bit/Bit of Word/Signed(BIN16)/

Unsigned(BIN16)/Signed(BIN32)/

Unsigned(BIN32)/BCD16/BCD32/Real

Range

Comment No.

Display No.

Device reset

Send mail

Device

Device dialog box


Setting of Defined case

Designation of Comment No.

Designation of Detailed display No.

Unchecked/checked

Occurred, Restored, Occurred/Restored

Copy

Print Condition

Title

Copy Alarm History dialog box

Set the history copy destination, copy source, copy count, copied data, etc.

State print out

Unchecked/checked

Occurred

Restored

Checks

Date

Time

Message

Cumulative time

Occur frequency

State

Unchecked/checked

Set the text printed in date field.

Set the text printed in time field.

Set the text printed in message field.

Set the text printed in cumulative time field.

Unchecked/ checked

Set the text printed in occurrence count field.

Set text displayed in status field.

Set the text printed at occurrence.

Unchecked/checked

Set the text printed at restoration.

Unchecked/checked

Set the text printed at checking.

5 - 19 5 - 19

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

• "Alarm History (Form)" dialog box

Make settings to each screen of the alarm history display function.

Basic

Shape

Frame

Plate

Title

Rule

Common

Unchecked/checked

Shape





Unchecked/checked

Designation of Rule (0 to 255)

Display the alarm common setting dialog box.

...Choose the Image List.

Form

Disp. rows

Disp. head

Sort

Size

Interval

Display style

One touch

High quality font

Designation of Disp. rows (1 to 27)

Designation of Disp. head (1 to 3072)

Oldest/Latest

Designation of Size (V H)

Designation of Interval (V H)

Occurences

Restorations

Checks

Cumulative

Occur frequency

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Format

Title

Wide

Color

Contents

Set the history item title.

Set the width of history item field.

Specify the history item color (0 to 255).

Date,Time / Date / Time / string yy/mm/dd / mm/dd/yy / dd/mm/yy / mm/dd hh:mm:ss / hh:mm

Set the text to be displayed at alarm occurrence.

Text

Option

Security

Designation of Security (0 to 15)

5 - 20 5 - 20

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


• "Alarm History (Common)" dialog box

Make settings common to all projects of the alarm history display function.

Basic

Mode

Alarm

Watch cycle

History

Cumulation

Set the number of device points to be monitored (1 to 1024).

Set the monitoring cycle (6 to 800).

Detailed display Not display/Comment window/Base Screen

History store Unchecked/checked



History erase

Unchecked/checked

Device

When number of alarm occurences exceed set value, delete oldest alarm occurences

Delete

Delete the setting.


Unchecked/checked

Monitor Device

Display No.

Edit

Continuous/Random

Edit Alarm History dialog box

Type Bit



Comment No.

Display No.

Designation of Comment No.

Designation of Detailed display No.

Device reset

Unchecked/checked

Set the history copy destination, copy source, copy count, copied data, etc.

Copy

Copy Alarm History dialog box

Print Condition

Print condition setting is fixed.

5 - 21 5 - 21

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

• "Alarm History (Form)" dialog box

Make settings to each screen of the alarm history display function.

Basic

Shape

Frame

Plate

Title

Common

Unchecked/checked

Shape





Display the alarm common setting dialog box.


Form

Disp. rows

Sort

Size

Display style

Designation of Disp. rows (1 to 27)

Oldest

Latest


Occurences

Restorations

Occur frequency

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Format

Title

Wide

Color

Contents

Text

Set the history item title.

Set the width of history item field.

Specify the history item color (0 to 255).

Date,Time / Date / Time / String yy/mm/dd / mm/dd/yy / dd/mm/yy / mm/dd hh:mm:ss / hh:mm

Set the text to be displayed at alarm occurrence.

5 - 22 5 - 22

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up alarm history display" "Setting up alarm history display" from Contents of Help.

POINT



• By using the PC card, the history data can be backed up.

• The ladder monitor function can be started while the device corresponding to the one which turned ON or fell within the designated range is being searched.

• Alarm history can be printed out.

• The current number of alarm history data can be stored into the designated word device.

• The display for the restored device can be deleted using the designated bit device as trigger.

• When the specified bit device/word device turns on (at error occurrence, for example)/off (at restoration), the date and time of occurrence/restoration, comment and others can be sent as electronic mail.

• For details of the mail send function, refer to the following corresponding manual.

• When GOT is used : GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual

(GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5

Compatible Gateway functions)

• When GT SoftGOT is used : GT SoftGOT Version 5 Operating Manual

• For restrictions on the alarm history display function, refer to Section 4.3.1.


• The current status of the alarm history display can be printed out.

• The number of errors entered into the monitoring devices can be stored.

5 - 23 5 - 23

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.2.3 Alarm list display function (shows the error information of the system at error occurrence)


This function shows error information at error occurrence or shows comments corresponding to multiple devices in priority order.


(a) Shows error information at error occurrence. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

Monitors GOT/PLC CPU/MELSECNET communication at intervals of three seconds to check for errors, and shows an error code or error message at error occurrence. You need not create error messages and numbers as they are registered in the GOT. (Occurrence time is also displayed at occurrence of a GOT error.) Use this function to detect PLC CPU/MELSECNET communication errors.

Voltage dropped below rated value

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

Occurrence order

2) X1

X2

1) X3

Settings

Type: System

(b) Shows comments corresponding to multiple bit devices, which are ON, in the specified priority order (order of ascending ON bit device numbers for the

GOT-F900 series).

Message

X3 Check products

X1 Conveyor fault

Occurrence order

2) X1

3)

X2

1) X3

Message

X3 Check products

X1 Conveyor fault

X2 Inspect conveyor

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Form>tab

Type: User

Device points: 4 Device: X1

Settings

Continuous: checked

5 - 24 5 - 24

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The alarm list display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Alarm List" dialog box


Basic

Type

Shape

Frame

Plate

Size

System

User

Unchecked/checked

Shape



Designation of Background

Designation of Comment Size (V H)


Form

Device points

Device

Storage

Set the Device points

Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Unchecked/checked


Comment No.


Number

Sort

Alignment

Comment List dialog box ...Setting of comment offset


Plural/Single

Ascending/Descending/Oldest/Latest

Left/Right/Center

Option

Security Specify of Security (0 to 15)

Detailed display Comment window/Window screen/Base Screen

Store memory Unchecked/checked

Scroll on Unchecked/checked

Display date Unchecked/checked

Detail

Disp.

Set the Comment No.

Display No.

One touch offset

Continuous/Random

Unchecked/checked


Trigger


Device

16bit/32bit




Initial display

Hold display

Bit trigger

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked


Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set bit device and condition enabling.

5 - 25 5 - 25

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Shape

Frame

Plate

Size

Unchecked/checked

Shape



Set the background color (0 to 255)

Designation of Comment Size (V H)


Form

Device points

Device

Storage

Comment No.

Number

Sort

Set the Device points


Unchecked/checked



Plural/Single

Ascending/Descending

Comment List dialog box ...Setting of Indication

Option

Detailed display Comment window/Base Screen

Store memory Unchecked/checked

Scroll on Unchecked/checked

Display date Unchecked/checked

Detail

Disp.

Set the Comment No.

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up message display" "Setting up alarm list display (system alarms/user alarms)" from Contents of Help.

POINT



• Priority can be displayed in the order of occurrence/number.

• Multiple or single comments can be displayed in the order of priority.

• A comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area.

(If single comment is selected for display)

• The GOT can count the bit devices turned ON and store the count in the word device.

• Details and actions for the comment turned ON can be displayed on the base screen, window screen or comment window.

• The ladder monitor function screen can be activated while the device corresponding to the bit device turned ON is being searched.


• A comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area.

(If single comment is selected for display)

• The number of bit devices which are now ON can be stored.

5 - 26 5 - 26

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.3 Animation Display Functions

5.3.1 Part display function (shows a part/screen corresponding to a device)


This function shows a registered part/screen corresponding to a device.

(Screen display is provided only when the GOT-A900 series is used)


(a) Shows a part corresponding to ON/OFF of a bit device (X0).

OFF

X0

ON

Switch ON

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Case(Bit)>tab

Settings

Device: X0

ON Part No.: 1 OFF Part No.: 2

(b) Shows a part corresponding to ON/OFF of a word device (D100).

D100 1 10 100

GOT

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Case(Word)>tab

Settings

Device: D100

Range: $V==1

Range: $V==10

Indicate Part No.: 1

Indicate Part No.: 2

Range: $V==100 Indicate Part No.: 3

(c) Shows the specified part according to ON/OFF of a bit device (X1, X2).

X1

OFF

X1

ON

X1

OFF

X2

OFF

X2

OFF

X2

ON

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

Settings

Parts switching: Fixed

Parts switching: Fixed

Setting Portion

Part No.: 1

Part No.: 2

<Trigger>tab

Device: X1

Device: X2

Settings

5 - 27 5 - 27

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The part display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Part Display" dialog box


Basic

Parts switching

Fixed No.

Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.


Data type

Display mode Replay/XOR/Overwrite

Positioning

Type

Top-left/Center

Part

Mark

Bit/Word (BIN16)/Word (BCD16)


Fixed

Base Screen

Window screen

Blink

Color (0 to 255)

No/Low/Middle/High

Case (Bit)

Device

On/Off-Time setting

No.


Color

Blink


No/Low/Middle/High

Case(Word)

Edit


Bit Device

Range

Device dialog box


...Set the device value range.

Delete (Deletion of display setting)

Indicate

Attribute

No./Indirect/Color/Hold

Blink No/Low/Middle/High

Option

Security

Offset


Device dialog box ...Designation of offset value

Preview comment


Trigger


Device

16bit/32bit

Device dialog box




Initial display

Hold display

Bit trigger

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked


Expression

Mask


None/AND/OR/XOR

Pattern

Shift

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right


Expression



5 - 28 5 - 28

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Parts switching

Fixed

Device

Data type

Display mode Replay

Positioning

Top-left/Center

Type

Fixed

Part

Mark

Color (0 to 255)

Case(Bit)

No.

Color

No.



Bit/Word




Case(Word)

Start No.

Preview comment Unchecked/checked


(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up part display" from

Contents of Help.

POINT


• Security, offset and expression (for display method "case (word) " only) can be set.

• Parts/screens registered by the user can be displayed.

• The user-created base/window screen can be displayed as a part.

• According to the change of the device, only the white area of the registered part figure can be displayed in a different color.

Only one part can be used.

• Part, display color and attributes can be changed according to the value of the monitor device. (For display method "case (word)" only)

• The displayed parts, display colors and attributes can be changed according to

ON/OFF of the bit devices.

• By setting the part/screen number to "0", the displayed part/screen can be deleted.

• When switching between parts/screens of different sizes (large to small), unnecessary display is automatically deleted.


• Parts registered by the user can be displayed.

• Part, display color and attributes can be changed according to the ON/OFF of the bit device. (For display method "case (bit)" only)

• The displayed parts can be erased by setting their numbers to unregistered numbers.

• When switching between parts/screens of different sizes (large to small), unnecessary display is automatically deleted.

5 - 29 5 - 29

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.3.2 Part movement display function (shows the movement of a part corresponding to a device)


This function shows the movement or locus of a part figure, which corresponds to

ON/OFF of a bit device or the value of a word device, in the specified moving method.


(a) Specifies movement display coordinates with the values of two word devices

(D100, D101).

Regarding the values of the two word devices (D100, D101) as the X and Y coordinates, this function changes the values of the two word devices (D100,

D101) to display the movement of a part figure.

250 400

D100 100 250 400

100

D101 100 200 300

100

Y coordinate

(D101)

Parts

200

Parts

300

X coordinate (D100)

Parts

Part Movement dialog box

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

Settings

Move way: Position Position: D100

(b) Shows a part at a point position in the specified path.

Presetting the path and point numbers shows a part in the position of the point number corresponding to the word device (D100) value.

The word device (D100) value is changed to move the part.

Point number: 1

Point number: 2

Point number: 4

Preset path

1 3

D100 1 2 4

Parts

2 4

Numbers are point numbers.


Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

Parts Move Route dialog box

Preset starting and end points

Parts

Settings

Move way: Point Position: D100

Route No.: 1 Points: 4

Route No.: 1

Parts

(c) Shows a part at any position on a line defined by the specified starting and end points.

Shows a part on a line which is defined by the starting point (0%) and the end point (100%) by changing the word device (D100) value relative to the upper and lower limits.

The word device (D100) value is changed to move the part.

Part is displayed with starting point preset as 0% and end point as 100%.

Displayed at position of 70%.



Starting point

End point

D100 70 30 50

End point

Parts

Starting point

End point

Parts

Starting point

End point

Parts

Starting point

Preset upper limit

Preset lower limit

: 100

: 0


Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

Move way: Line

Minimum: 0

Settings

Position: D100 Maximum: 100

5 - 30 5 - 30

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The part movement function consists of the following setting items.


• "Part Movement" dialog box

Set the part movement display function.

Basic

Parts switching

Fixed No.


Device



Move way Position/Line/Point

Route No.

Position


Maximum/Minimum

Display mode Movement/Locus

Positioning

Type

Top-left/Center

Part

Mark


Fixed

Case(Bit)

Blink

Color (0 to 255)

No/Low/Middle/High

...Set the Part No.

ON/OFF-Time setting

No.


Color

Blink

Setting of part color (0 to 255)

No/Low/Middle/High

Case(Word)

Edit


Bit Device


Range

Indicate

Attribute

Device dialog box


...Set the device value range.

No.

Indirect

Color

Hold


Option

Trigger

Security

Offset


Unchecked/checked

Device



Device

Device dialog box

16bit/32bit


...Set the Device No.


Initial display

Hold display

Bit trigger

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked


Expression Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.

Mask

Pattern

None/AND/OR/XOR

Set the mask value.

Shift None/Left/Right


Expression



5 - 31 5 - 31

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Route No.

Points

Arrange in a line

• "Part Move Route" dialog box

Set the path which is used to display a part at point positions in the specified path.

Set the Route No.

Set the Points

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up part movement display" from Contents of Help.

POINT



• Displayed parts can be changed according to the device value.

• Display part, display color and attributes can be changed when the monitor device value (word device) reaches a given value.

5 - 32 5 - 32

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.3.3 Lamp display function (changes the lit-up color of a lamp with a device value)


This function changes the lit-up color of a lamp with a device value.


(a) Lights/extinguishes a lamp according to ON/OFF of a bit device (X0).

OFF

X0

ON

Lamp 1 Lamp 1

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

Settings

Device: X0

POINT

The lamp figure, display color, attributes and character string can be changed according to ON/OFF of the bit device.

(b) Changes the lit-up color of a lamp according to the value of a word device

(D100).

(Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

D100=0 D100=1 to 100

D100=100 over

D100 0 1 100 101

Off

On Warning on

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Case(Word)>tab

Device: D100

Range: $V==0

Range: 0<=$V<=100

Range: 100<$V

Lamp: 0

Lamp: 224

Lamp: 224

Settings

Blink: No

Blink: No

Blink: High

POINT

The lamp figure, display color, attributes and character string can be changed according to the word device value.

5 - 33 5 - 33

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The lamp display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Lamp" dialog box


Basic

Device

Device



Basic figure/ Free figure Shape

Case(Bit)

ON/OFF-time setting

Shape (Free figure/Basic figure)

Image List dialog box ...Set the figure number.

Panelkit dialog box

Frame

Lamp


Designation of Lamp color (0 to 255)

Background Designation of Background (0 to 255)

Pattern Specify the lamp figure pattern (No/1 to 37).


Text Text dialog box

...Set the figure from

parts library/panelkit.

...Set the text, display position and spacing from frame.

Style Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised

Color

Solid

V H




Copy from ON

High quality font

Copy ON-time text setting to OFF-time text setting.

Checked/unchecked

Case(Word)

Edit Edit Display Format dialog box

Shape (Free figure/Basic figure)

Bit

Panelkit dialog box

...Set the figure from parts library/panelkit.

Device dialog box


...Set the figure number.


Range

Edit Range dialog box ...Set the device value range.

Option

Frame

Lamp



Background Designation of Backgroud (0 to 255)

Pattern

Specify the lamp figure pattern

Blink

Text

Style

No/Low/Middle/High

Text dialog box

...Set the text, display position and

spacing from frame.


Color

Solid

V H

High quality font




Checked/unchecked


Edit

Edit Display Format dialog box ...Display setting made when conditional expression

is not applicable

Security

Offset

Expression


Device dialog box ...Specify the device to be offset.

Mask None/AND/OR/XOR

Pattern

Shift

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right


Expression


...Setting of Defined case

5 - 34 5 - 34

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Device

Shapes

Device dialog box


Basic figuer

Parts

Unchecked/checked

Lamp

(External)

Case(Bit)

ON/OFF-time setting

Shape Image List dialog box ...Set the figure number.

Frame

Lamp

Text



Text dialog box ...Set the text, display position and spacing from frame.

Color

V H

Copy from ON




(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up lamp display" from

Contents of Help.

POINT



• Basic figures provided by GT Designer and the free figures set by the user can be used as lamps.

• A character string can be displayed on the top, center, bottom, right or left of the lamp.


• Basic figures provided by GT Designer can be used as lamps.

• A character string can be displayed in the center of the lamp.

5 - 35 5 - 35

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.3.4 Panelmeter display function (shows a meter according to a word device value)


This function shows a meter at the ratio of a word device value to the upper and lower limits.


(a) Shows a meter at the ratio of a word device (D100) value to the upper limit

(300) and lower limit (0).

D100 50 100 200

150

0

Meter 1

300

150

0

Meter 1

300

150

0

Meter 1

300

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Form>tab

<Graph>tab

Settings

Device: D100

Type: Top1/2

Text: Meter 1

Upper: Fixed 300

Scale value display (V H) 1

Lower: Fixed 0

Upper: 300 Lower: 0

1: Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT-A900 series.

POINT



• A character string can be displayed on the top, center, bottom, right or left of the panel meter.

• Scale and scale values can be set above the arc of the panel meter.


• Scale can be set above the arc of the panel meter.

(b) Changes the needle color when the monitor device value reaches a given value.


D100 50 100 230

150

0

Meter 1

300

150

0

Meter 1

300

150

0

Meter 1

300

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Form>tab

<Case>tab

<Graph>tab

Settings

Device: D100

Type: Top1/2

Needle: 255 Meter panel: 109 Text: Meter 1

Upper: Fixed 300 Lower: Fixed 0

Range: 200<$V Needle: 0

Scale value display (V H) 1 Upper: 300 Lower: 0


5 - 36 5 - 36

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The panelmeter display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Panelmeter" dialog box


Basic

Form

Device Device

Device dialog box

...Designation of device to be monitor.

16bit/32bit

Shape

Frame

Plate

Needle

Meter panel

Text

Size

Color

High quality font


...Specify the panel meter display frame.



Specify the panel meter display Needle. (0 to 255)

Unchecked/checked Specify the panel meter display Plate. (0 to 255)

Text dialog box

...Set the text, display position and spacing from frame.

Designation of Size (V H). (0.5 to 8)


Unchecked/checked

Type

Direciton

Point

Data type

Upper/Lower

1/4 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right,Top-Right,Top-Left,Bottom-Left,Bottom-Right)/

1/2 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right)/3/4/Full circle

Clockwise/Counterclockwise

0 /90 /180 /270

Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real/BCD

Meter frame

Unchecked/checked

Fixed (Numerical setting)



Case

Edit Edit Display Format dialog box

Delete

Range

Needle

Deletion of table setting

Edit range dialog box ...Set the device value range.

Specify the needle color (0 to 255)

Graph

Scale display

Unchecked/checked

Scale points

Color

Scale value display Unchecked/checked

Option

Size

Value no.

Upper/Lower


Color

Designation of size (height width) of numerical value to be displayed

Designation of number of numerical values to be displayed (2 to 11)

Designation of upper/lower limit value to be displayed

Designation of display color of numerical value (0 to 255)

Security

Offset

Expression

Mask

Device dialog box

None/AND/OR/XOR

Pattern

Shift

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right


...Specify the device to be offset.


...Setting of Defined case

5 - 37 5 - 37

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Device

Shape

Frame

Plate

Needle

Meter panel

Device

16bit/32bit

Device dialog box

Unchecked/checked

...Designation of device to be monitor.


...Specify the panel meter display frame.



Specify the panel meter display Needle. (0 to 255)

Specify the panel meter display Plate. (0 to 255)

Form

Type

Direciton

Point

Data type

Upper/Lower

1/4 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right,Top-Right,Top-Left,Bottom-Left,Bottom-Right)/

1/2 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right)/3/4/Full circle

Clockwise/Counterclockwise

0 /90 /180 /270





Graph

Scale display

Unchecked/checked

Scale points

Color

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up panelmeter display" from

Contents of Help.

5 - 38 5 - 38

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.4 Graph Display Functions

The graph display functions collect word device values and show them in graph format.


• Trend graph display function • Line graph display function

.... Shows data in trend graph format.

.... Shows data in line graph format.

• Bar graph display function

.... Shows data in bar graph format.

• Statistical graph display function

.... Shows the ratio of each data to the total in statistical

• Scattered chart display function

.... Shows the X and Y axis device values in scattered chart format.

• Level display function

.... Shows data as a level at the ratio to upper/lower limit.

5.4.1 Trend graph display function (shows a word device value on trend graph)


This function gathers data stored in a word device and shows it on a trend graph.


(a) Collects data stored in a word device and shows it on a trend graph. After the last part of the display range is reached, the screen is scrolled.

D100 100 300 200

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Form>tab

<Case>tab

Graph: Trend

Number: 1

Points: 3

Upper: 400

Settings

Lower: 0

400

300

200

100

0

1 2

3

400

300

200

100

0

1 2

Scrolling at display range end

400

3

300

200

100

0

1 2 3

Setting Portion Settings

<Monitor Device>tab Device: D100

<Graph>tab

(GOT-A900 series)

<Others>tab

(GOT-F900 series)

Scale display (V H): Scale points: 5

3


: Value no.: 5

3

Upper: 400

3

Lower: 0

1


5 - 39 5 - 39

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The trend graph display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Line/Trend/Bar Chart" dialog box


Basic

Graph

Shape

Frame

Plate

Form

Direciton

Number

Points

Frame

Monitor Device

Edit

Trend

Unchecked/checked

Shape



Right/Left

Designation of Number (1 to 8)

Designation of Points (2 to 100)

Checked/unchecked

Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape No.

Delete

Data type

Device

Attribute dialog box

Graph

Style

Width

Deletion of setting

Device


16bit/32bit

Continuous/Random

Designation of Graph (0 to 255)

Designation of Style

Designation of Width


Case

Upper/Lower


Device


Graph

Scale display

Unchecked/checked

Scale points

Color

Designation of Scale points (V H) (0, 2 to 11)


Option

Trigger

Scale value display

Security

Offset

Store memory

Trigger type

Checked/unchecked

Size

Value no.

Upper/Lower


Designation of number of numerical values (V H) to be displayed (0,2 to 11).

Designation of displayed upper limit value

/displayed lower limit value (V H)

Designation of Color (0 to 255) Color


Unchecked/checked

Device

Unchecked/checked

Device dialog box

No clear trigger/

Clear on trigger rise/Clear on trigger fall

Rise/Fall

Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval)

ON Sampling/OFF Sampling

Unchecked/checked

Device


Device dialog box


Initial display

Expression

Mask None/AND/OR/XOR

Pattern

Shift

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right


Expression



5 - 40 5 - 40

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Graph

Shape

Frame

Plate

Form

Direciton

Number

Points

Frame

Trend

Unchecked/checked

Shape




Right/Left



Unchecked/checked

Monitor Device

Edit


Graph

Style

Device




Delete

Data type

Deletion of setting


16bit/32bit

Case

Upper/Lower




Others

Scale display

Trigger type

Store memory

Unchecked/checked

Scale points

Color

Designation of Scale points (V H)


Specify the cycle time (1 to 3600).

No clear trigger/


Device

Device dialog box


(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up trend graph display" from

Contents of Help.

POINT


• As the condition for graphing the specified word device value, you can combine and set the monitoring cycle and bit condition (ON/OFF).

• Up to eight graphs (for eight devices) can be displayed on one trend graph.

• Up to 100 pieces of collected data can be displayed on the screen.

• Scales and scale values can be set.

• Graph frame can be set.

5 - 41 5 - 41

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.4.2 Line graph display function (shows word device values on line graph)


This function gathers the data of multiple word devices and shows a line graph.


(a) Batch-collects the data of multiple word devices and shows a line graph.

D100 100 200 300

D101 50 0 400

D102 300 400 100

D103 0 100 0

D104 400 400 300

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Form>tab

<Case>tab

Graph: Line

Number : 1

Points : 5

Settings

Upper: 400 Lower: 0

400

300

200

100

0

100 101 102 103 104

400

300

200

100

0

100 101 102 103 104

400

300

200

100

0

100 101 102 103 104


<Monitor Device>tab Device: D100 (Continuous)

<Graph>tab

(GOT-A900 series)

<Others>tab

(GOT-F900 series)

Scale display (V H): Scale points: 5 5


: Value no.: 5 5

Upper: 400 104 Lower: 0 100


(b) When the line graph display is updated, the old graph is not erased but a new graph is overlaid on the old one. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is displayed)

D100 100 200 300

D101 50 0 400

D102 300 400 100

D103 0 100 0

D104 400 400 300

400

300

200

100

0

100 101 102 103 104

400

300

200

100

0

100 101 102 103 104

400

300

200

100

0

100 101 102 103 104

Cleared by erase trigger

400

300

200

100

0

100 101 102 103 104

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Form>tab

<Case>tab

<Option>tab

Settings

Graph: Line

Number : 1

Points : 5

Upper: 400 Lower: 0

Locus: checked: Clear on trigger rise

Device (Clear trigger): X0



<Graph>tab

(GOT-A900 series)

Scale display (V H): Scale points: 5 5

Scale value display (V H)

: Value no.: 5 5

Upper: 400 104 Lower: 0 100

POINT

Note the following when setting a line graph which is specified to show a locus.

• Only one graph may be set to one project.

• It cannot be set to a window screen.

• When there is line graph setting, the window screen's overlap window 2 or test window cannot be displayed.

• The base screen where line graph setting has been made cannot be displayed as multiple called screens simultaneously by the screen call function.

• The maximum size of a line graph is equal to the maximum size of an overlap window.

5 - 42 5 - 42

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The line graph display function consists of the following setting items.



Basic

Graph

Shape

Frame

Plate

Form

Direciton

Number

Points

Frame

Monitor Device

Edit

Line

Unchecked/checked

Shape



Right/Left



Checked/unchecked


Delete

Data type


Deletion of setting

Edit

Continuous/Random

2 Device point

Graph

Style

Width



Unchecked/checked



Designation of Width

16bit/32bit

Case

Upper/Lower




Graph

Option

Scale display

Scale value display

Unchecked/checked

Checked/unchecked

Scale points

Color

Size

Value no.

Upper/Lower

Color

Designation of Scale points (V H) (0, 2 to 11)



Designation of number of numerical values (V H) to be displayed (0, 2 to 11).

Designation of displayed upper limit value/displayed lower limit value (V H)


Security

Offset

Locus

Value not displayed


Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Device

Device dialog box


No clear trigger

Clear on trigger rise/Clear on trigger fall unchecked/Checked

Device

Designation of Value not displayed


Trigger

Trigger type

Initial display

Expression

Rise/Fall/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval)/ON Sampling/OFF Sampling

Unchecked/checked

Mask

Pattern

None/AND/OR/XOR

Set the mask value.




......Set the calculation expression.

5 - 43 5 - 43

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Graph

Shape

Frame

Plate

Form

Direciton

Number

Points

Frame

Monitor Device

Edit

Line

Unchecked/checked

Right/Left

Unchecked/checked


Shape





Edit



Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)

Delete

Data type

Case

Upper/Lower

Deletion of setting


16bit/32bit

Style


Device



Others

Scale display

Trigger type

Store memory

Unchecked/checked

Scale points

Color

Specify the cycle time (1 to 3600).

Unchecked/checked



No clear trigger/


Device


Value not displayed

Unchecked/checked

Designation of Value not displayed

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up line graph display" from

Contents of Help.

POINT


• Security, offset, expression and hidden values can be set.

• Up to eight graphs can be displayed.

• Up to 500 devices can be monitored with one graph.




• Up to four graphs can be displayed.

• Up to 50 devices can be monitored with one graph.

• Scales can be set.


5 - 44 5 - 44

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.4.3 Bar graph display function (shows word device values on bar graph)


This function shows data stored in word devices on a bar graph.


(a) Batch-collects the data stored in multiple word devices and shows them on a bar graph.

D100 -200 -400 200

D101 400 300 400

D102 200 300 -400

D103 -200 100 -200

400

200

0

-200

-400

D100 D200 D300 D400

400

200

0

-200

-400

D100 D101 D102 D103

400

200

0

-200

-400

D100 D101 D102 D103

Drawn as figures/texts.

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Form>tab

Graph: Bar

Number: 4

<Case>tab Upper: 400

Settings

Lower: -400



<Graph>tab

(GOT-A900 series)

<Others>tab

(GOT-F900 series)

Scale display (Vertical): Scale points: 5

(Vertical)

Scale value display (Vertical) 1

: Value no.: 5 (Vertical)

Upper: 400 (Vertical) Lower: -400 (Vertical)


(b) Sorts the bar graph (ascending order, descending order) according to the word device values. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is displayed)

D100 300 200 400

D101 200 300 100

D102 400 100 200

D103 100 400 300

400

300

200

100

0

400

300

200

100

400

300

200

100

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab Graph: Bar

Settings

<Monitor Device> tab

Device: D100 (Graph: 0)

D101 (Graph: 3)

D102 (Graph: 255)

<Form>tab Number: 3

Setting Portion

<Case>tab

<Graph>tab

<Option>tab

Settings

Base : Fixed 0

Upper : Fixed 400

Lower : Fixed 0

Scale display (Vertical): Scale points: 5

(Vertical)

Scale value display (Vertical)

: Value no.: 5 (Vertical)

Upper: 400 (Vertical) Lower: 0 (Vertical)

Sort: Ascending

5 - 45 5 - 45

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The bar graph display function consists of the following setting items.



Basic

Graph

Shape

Frame

Plate

Bar

Unchecked/checked

Shape




...Choose the Shape No.

Form

Direciton Vertical/Horizontal

Number

Offset

Width


Designation of offset value (0 to 100)

Designation of bar width in bar graph (1 to 500)

Width + Space Designation of spacing including bar width. (1 to 500)

Frame

Monitor Device

Edit

Delete

Data type

Device


Graph

Pattern

Background

Deletion of setting

Device


16bit/32bit

Continuous/Random


Designation of Pattern



Case

Base/Upper/Lower

Graph


Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Option

Trigger

Scale display

Scale value display

Security

Offset

Sort

Unchecked/checked

Scale points

Color

Unchecked/checked

Size

Value no.

Designation of Scale points (0, 2 to 11)



Upper/Lower

Designation of number of numerical values to be displayed (0, 2 to 11).

Designation of displayed upper limit value/ displayed lower limit value


Color


Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Device



Specify the order of bar graph sorting.


Device

16bit/32bit



Range

Initial display

Hold display

Bit trigger

Edit Range dialog box ...Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked


Expression

Expression



Mask

Pattern

None/AND/OR/XOR

Set the mask value.





5 - 46 5 - 46

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Graph

Shape

Form

Frame

Plate

Direciton

Frame

Scale Position

Bar

Unchecked/checked

Shape



Vertical/Horizontal

Unchecked/checked

Left/Down/Right/Up


...Choose the Shape No.

Monitor Device

Edit Attribute dialog box

Graph



Delete

Data type

Deletion of setting


16bit/32bit

Case

Base/Upper/Lower


Device


Others

Scale display

Unchecked/checked

Scale points

Color



(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up bar graph display" from

Contents of Help.

POINT



• Bar graphs can be displayed above/under the designated base value.

• Up to eight graphs (for eight devices) can be displayed.

• Graphs can be sorted in ascending/descending order.




• Bar graphs can be displayed above/under the designated base value.

• Up to one graph (for one device) can be displayed.



5 - 47 5 - 47

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.4.4 Statistical graph display function (shows word device values on statistical graph)


This function graphs the ratios of the collected word device data to the total.


(a) Collects the data of multiple word devices and shows the ratios of the word device data to the total on a circle graph.

D0 40 20 50

D1 60 30 70

D2 70 90 40

D3 30 60 40

0 0

0

75 25

75 25 75 25

50

50 50

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Graph>tab

Graph

No. of Partitions

Settings

: Circle graph

: 4

Scale display: Scale points: 4

Scale value display 1: Value no.: 4

Setting Portion

<Division>tab

Settings

Device

: D0 (Graph 255, Pattern 8)

D1 (Graph 182, Pattern 8)




(b) Shows the ratios of the gathered multiple word device data to the total on a percentage bar graph.

D0 40 20 50

D1 60 30 70

D2 70 90 40

D3 30 60 40

100 100

100

50 50

50

0

0 0

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Graph>tab

Graph

No. of Partitions

Settings

: Rectangle graph

: 4

Scale display: Scale points: 3

Scale value display 1: Value no.: 3

Setting Portion

<Division>tab

Settings

Device

: D0 (Graph 255, Pattern 8)





5 - 48 5 - 48

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The statistical graph display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Statistics Chart" dialog box


Basic

Graph

Shape

Frame

Plate

No. of

Partitions

Direciton

Division

Edit

Rectangle graph

Circle graph




Designation of No. of Partitions (0 to 255)

Up/Down/Right/Left

Data type

Device


Graph

Pattern

Background

Device


16bit/32bit

Continuous/ Random




Device dialog box

Graph

Scale display Unchecked/checked

Scale points

Color

Designation of Scale points (0, 2 to 11)


Scale value display

Unchecked/checked

Size

Value no.

Color


Designation of Value no.


Option

Security

Offset

Sort


Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Device

Device dialog box



Trigger


Device


16bit/32bit


Range Edit Range dialog box ...Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Initial display

Hold display

Bit trigger

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked




Expression

Mask

Pattern

None/AND/OR/XOR

Set the mask value.



Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

5 - 49 5 - 49

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Graph

Shape

Frame

Plate

No. of

Partitions

Direction

Division

Edit

Rectangle graph

Circle graph




Designation of No. of Partitions (0 to 8)

Up/Right


Data type

Graph

Scale display


Graph

Device


16bit/32bit

Unchecked/checked

Scale points

Color


Device dialog box

Designation of Scale points (2 to 50)


(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up statistical graph display" from

Contents of Help.

POINT



• Statistical graphs of up to 32 divisions (for 32 devices) can be displayed.



• Rectangle graph or circle graph is available.


• Statistical graphs of up to eight divisions (for eight devices) can be displayed.



• Rectangle graph or circle graph is available.

5 - 50 5 - 50

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.4.5 Scattered chart display function (shows word device values on scattered chart)


This function gathers data stored in word devices associated with the X and Y axes and shows them on a scattered chart.


(a) Collects and shows the data of one point device. By updating the display with the previous display remaining, shows the variation of the point device value as a locus.

X axis device

D100 200 300 50

Y axis device

D200 50 200 300

400

300

200

100

0

0 100 200 300

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Case>tab

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Case(Word)>tab

<Case>tab

Graph

X: Upper (400)

X: Lower (0)

Y: Upper (400)

Y: Lower (0)

Settings

: Sample

Setting Portion


<Graph>tab

Settings

X axis Device: D100

Y axis Device: D200

Scale display: Scale point: 5 5

Scale value display

: Size: 5 5

Upper: 400 400

Lower: 0 0

(b) Batch-collects and shows the data of multiple point devices. By changing the display switching device value, shows different data as different point figures.

X axis devices

D100 100 50

D101 250 125

D102 150 300

D103 300 350

400

300

200

100

0

0 100 200 300

Y axis devices

D200 100 300

D201 200 340

D202 250 50

D203 300 100

Display switching device

D300 1 2

Point figures are changed according to display switching device value.

Setting Portion Settings Settings

Graph

Mode

: Batch

: Locus

Case1: Defined case (2==$V), Type: ,

Color: 224

Normally: Type:

, Color: 255

X: Upper (400)

X: Lower (0)

Y: Upper (400)

Y: Lower (0)


Display trigger: ”Device” (D300)

Points: 4

X axis Device: D100, Y axis Device: D200

<Graph>tab

Scale display: Scale point: 5 5

Scale value display

: Size: 5 5

Upper: 400 400

Lower: 0 0

5 - 51 5 - 51

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The scattered chart display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Scatter Chart" dialog box

Basic

Graph

Shape

Frame

Plate

Mode

Sample/Batch

Unchecked/checked



Graph Frame Unchecked/checked


Replace/Locus

......Choose the Shape.

Device/Attribute

Display switching Fixed/Device

Device

Device


Case

Data type

Display Attribute Point/Line

Fixed Attribute

Points

Device

Type

Size

Bit/Word (BIN16)/Word (BCD16)

/ / / / / / /

Small/Medium/Large

Color 0 to 255

Numerical setting

Continuous/Random

16 Bit/32 Bit


Device (X axis)

Device (Y axis)

Device dialog box

Device dialog box



X: Upper Fixed (Numerical setting)


X: Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)

Device


Y: Upper

Y: Lower


Device


Device

Device dialog box


Device dialog box


Case (Bit)

ON

OFF

Type

Size

Color

Type

Size

Color

Case (Word)

Edit


Delete

Edit

(Ordinary)

/ / / / / / /

Small/Medium/Large

0 to 255

/ / / / / / /

Small/Medium/Large

0 to 255



...Set the display range, type, size and color.

...Set the display range, type, size and color.

5 - 52 5 - 52

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Graph

Scale display

Checked

/unchecked

Scale value display

Scale points

Color

Size, Value No., Upper, Lower, Color

Option

Security

Offset Checked

/unchecked

Store memory Checked/unchecked

Clear trigger Checked

/unchecked




Device

Device dialog box


Value not displayed

X: Unchecked/checked (Hidden value setting)

Y: Unchecked/checked (Hidden value setting)

Operation at frequency over time

Accumulate/Average

Trigger

Trigger Type

Interrupt

Initialize and continue

Checked

/unchecked

Writing interval



Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval)/Rise/Fall/ON Sampling/OFF Sampling


Initial display


Expression

Mask

Pattern

Shift

None/AND/OR/XOR

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right



......Set the calculation expression.

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up scattered chart display" from

Contents of Help.

POINT


• The scattered chart display function allows up to 24 points to be set on one screen.

• Make setting to avoid a superimpose window to be overlaid on the scattered chart which is not stored into memory.

If it is overlaid, the overlaid scattered chart part is erased.

5 - 53 5 - 53

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.4.6 Level display function (shows a word device value as a level)


This function shows a word device value as a level at the ratio to the upper/ lower limit.


(a) Shows a word device value as a level in any closed figure at the ratio to the upper/lower limit.

D100 100 200 300

Setting Portion



<Form>tab

Upper: 300

Lower: 0

Settings

(b) Used with the numerical display function (refer to Section 5.1.1) or comment display function (refer to Section 5.2.1). 1

25 98


Setting Portion


Settings

1: On an object of the numerical or comment display function, set the drawing mode (transparent/XOR) which is used to superimpose the object on the level display.

POINT

• Level display can be overlapped with a value or comment of the numerical or comment display function.

• Refer to Section 4.4.2 for overlapping with an object.

5 - 54 5 - 54

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The level display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Level" dialog box

Basic

Device

Form

Boundary

Level

Pattern

Background

Direction

Data type

Uppe/Lower

Case

Device dialog box

16bit/32bit

Set the device value range. (0 to 255)

Designation of Level (0 to 255)

Designation of Pattern (0 to 255)


Right/Left/Up/Down




Device

Device dialog box


Edit

Delete

‰ ‚Ö ^ ¶ ‚Ö ^ ã ‚Ö ^ ‰ ‚Ö

Deletion of setting

Range

Level

Pattern

Background


...Set the device range.

Designation of Level (0 to 255)



(0 to 255) Option

Security

Offset

Setting of Security

Unchecked/checked

Device


Trigger


Device

16bit/32bit




Initial display

Hold display

Bit trigger

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked


Set

Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.

Expression

Mask

Pattern

None/AND/OR/XOR

Set the mask value.





5 - 55 5 - 55

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up level display" from Contents of

Help.

POINT


• A level can be displayed at top, bottom, left or right of a figure.

• The level display color and filling pattern can be changed when the monitor device value reaches a given value.

5 - 56 5 - 56

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.5 Touch Key Functions (When Touched, Touch Keys Perform such Functions as Device

Value Change and Screen Switching)


Function name

Bit function

Word function

Base switching function

Window switching function

Extended function

Station switching function

Creation of numerical/ASCII input key

The touch functions are designed to perform the following operations when the corresponding touch keys are touched.

Operation

GOT-A900 series

GOT-F900 series

Refer to

Turns the bit device ON/OFF by touching the key.

Changes the word device value by touching the key.

Switches the base screen by touching the key.

Switches the window screen by touching the key.

Switches to the extended function screen such as ladder monitor or test window by touching the key.

Switches the station by touching the key.

(a)

(b)

(c), (d), (e), (f),

(g)

(h)

(i)

Creates the key for numerical or ASCII input.

(j)


(a) Turns a bit device ON/OFF.

By changing the operation type, any of the following four operations can be performed.

Bit SET

Bit

Setting Portion

<Action>tab Bit Device: X1

Settings

Action: Set

Bit RST

When touched, the specified bit turns ON.

Bit

Setting Portion


Setting Portion


Settings

Action: Reset

Bit ALT

When touched, the specified bit turns OFF.

Bit

ON OFF

OFF ON

Action: Alternate

Settings

Bit momentary

When touched, the currently specified bit status is reversed.

Bit

Setting Portion


Settings

Action: Momentary

Only while touched, the specified bit turns ON.

5 - 57 5 - 57

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Setting Portion

<Action>tab

Setting Portion

<Action>tab

Setting Portion

<Action>tab

Setting Portion

<Action>tab

(b) Changes the word device value.

By changing the operation type, any of the following three operations can be performed.

Fixed

Fixed value 20

D100

100 20

Touching writes the specified value.

Word

Word

Word

Device: D101

Device: D102

Device: D103

Action: Fixed (20)

Settings

Device

D100 200

D102

100 200

Touching writes the present value of the specified word device.

Settings

Action: Device (D100)

Fixed + device

Fixed + D100

100 + 30 = 130

D103

100 130

Touching writes the present value of the specified word device + the fixed value.

Settings

Action: Fixed (100) + Device (D100)

(c) Switches to the specified base screen.

Base screen switching device

1 10

Base screen No. 1

Base screen No. 10

Specified value: 10

Settings

Base screen of the specified value appears.

Base Basic Next screen: Fixed (10)

POINT

• Choosing window switching with the operation setting tab enables window screens to be switched.

• By setting this function to window screens, window screens can be switched.

Base screen No.1

Window screen No. 1

Base screen No.1

Window screen No. 2

5 - 58 5 - 58

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Setting Portion

<Action>tab


When X0 is ON

10 15

When X0 is OFF

10 20

(d) Turning the specified bit device ON/OFF switches between two different base screens.

When OFF

When ON

Base screen No. 10

Base screen

No. 20

Base screen

No. 15

When X0 is ON: 15/OFF: 20

Base screen

No. 20 appears.

Base screen

No. 15 appears.

Base

Settings

Basic Next screen: Device (X0)

Action ON: No. (15) OFF: No. (20)


1 New value

depends on

comparison

expression.

Setting Portion

<Action>tab

POINT



Base

(e) Switches the base screens according to the present value of the specified word device.

When normal

Base screen No. 10

1 D100 10 D100=100

D100>0

Base screen

No. 10

Base screen

No. 20

Base screen

No.30

Base screen

No.80

When 1 D100 10 : 10

When D100=100 : 20

When D100>0 : 30

When normal : 80

Base screen

No. 10 appears

Basic Next screen: Device (D100)

Action Range: 1<=$$<=10 No.: 10

:$$=100 No.: 20

:0<$$ No.: 30

:Normally No.: 80

Settings

Base screen

No. 20 appears

Base screen

No. 30 appears

Base screen

No. 80 appears

POINT



• Up to 64 different comparison expressions (including those for normal setting) may be set.

(f) Switches to the higher-level base screen.


20 15

Base screen No. 20 Base screen No. 15

More previous base screen

Previous base screen

No.: 15

Base Basic Next screen: Previous

Base screen No. 15 appears


<Action>tab

5 - 59 5 - 59

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

POINT

• The GOT stores up to 10 higher-levels of base screen Nos. which had been displayed up to now. Therefore, the base screens can be switched according to the history.

1

2 3 4

<Screen switching transition>

: Touch key for switching to specified

screen is touched

: Touch key for switching to higher

level is touched

1 3 5 3 1

5 6 7 8 9

• The level information is made invalid when the GOT is powered off.

Note that if you switch power off, then on again on any midway level, the screen displayed first will be on the top level.

(g) Closes a window screen.


0 1 0

Base screen No. 1 Base screen No. 1 Base screen No. 1

Window screen

No. 1

Setting Portion

<Action>tab

Window Basic

Window Basic

Specified value: 1

Settings

Specified value: 0

Next screen: Fixed (1)

Next screen: Fixed (0)

POINT

By setting this function to window screens, window screens can be switched.

(h) Starts the ladder monitor function (e.g. extended function).

P0

187

M999

D1

1

D2

2 90

D167

110

D172

100

MOV 1 D1

MOV 2 D2

MOV 90 D162

MOV 110 D167

K

MOV 100 D172

Setting Portion

<Action>tab

Ladder monitor function appears.

Settings

Exlended Extended action: Ladder monitor

POINT

The touch key (extended) function can be used to set the following different items.

• Utility • Ladder monitor 1 • Key window

• System monitor • Test window 1, 2 • Special function

monitor 1, 2

• Start hardcopy

• Clock setting

• Brightness adjustment

• Servo amplifier monitor

• Abort hardcopy

• Clean screen

• List editor

• Password

• Network monitor

• Motion monitor

1 Cannot be set when the A95 GOT is used.

2 Cannot be set when the A956WGOT is used.

5 - 60 5 - 60

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(i) Performs the station switching function.

The station switching function allows multiple stations to be monitored on the same screen by switching the object device currently monitored on the data link/network system to the same device of a different station.

1) Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number.

Setting Portion

<Action>tab Station No.

Monitoring the host station

Specified station number

Other station NW No.

Station No.

: 2

: 10

Monitoring the other station

NW No.

: 2

Station No.

: 10

Basic

Settings

Next station: Other (NW No.: 2 Station No.: 10)

Mode :All

2) Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number according to ON/OFF of the specified bit device.


When OFF


Station No.: 5

When ON


Station No.: 15

Setting Portion

<Action>tab

Station No.

When X0 is ON

When OFF.

: Station No. 15

: Station No. 5

Station No. 5 appears.


Settings

Basic Next station: Device(X0)

Mode :All

Action ON: Station No.(15) OFF: Station No.(5)

3) Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number when the present value of the specified word device corresponds to the set comparison expression.


1 D100 100


Station No.: 5

101 D100 300


Station No.: 10

When normal


Setting Portion

<Action>tab

When 1 D100 100

When 101 D100 300

When normal

: Station No. 5

: Station No. 10

: No switching

Station No.


Settings

Basic Next station: Device (D100)

Mode :All

Action Range: 1<=$$<=100

: 101<=$$<=300

: Normally


No switching

Switching type: Other Station No.5

Switching type: Other Station No.10

Switching type: Host

5 - 61 5 - 61

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Setting Portion

<Action>tab

4) Switches between different station numbers according to the screen type

(four types of base screen, overlap windows 1, 2, and superimpose window).

Touch key 1

Touch key 2

Base screen


1

2

1

2

Overlap window 1

1

2


Touch key 1

Other station N/W No. :2

Mode : Screen (Base)

Touch key 2

Other station N/W No. :10

Mode : Screen (Overlap window 1)

Station No.

Station No.

Basic

Basic


Station No.: 2

1

2


Settings

Next station: Other (NW No.: 2)

Mode :Screen (Base)

Next station: Other (NW No.: 10)

Mode :Screen (Overlap window1)


Station No.: 2

1

2


Station No.: 10

(j) Creates keys for numerical and ASCII inputs.

Setting Portion

<Action>tab

Type

A B C D 1 2 3

C

D

A

B

Key code: 0061H

Key code: 0062H

Key code: 0063H

Key code: 0064H

Key code: 002DH

Settings

1

2

3

Key code: 0031H

Key code: 0032H

Key code: 0033H

Key code: 000DH

POINT

• Refer to Appendix 3 for details of key codes.

• Numerical and ASCII input keys are supplied in the template of GT Designer.

5 - 62 5 - 62

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The touch key function consists of the following setting items.

• "Touch key" dialog box


Basic

Display trigger

Shape

Buzzer

Key/ Bit/ Word



Range

Edit range dialog box ...Set the device value range.

Data length

Data type

Basic figure/ Free figure

16bit/32bit


No/

Switch area reverse

Unchecked/checked

Always set/Set only fill requirements/Always not set

One shot

During Push

Case

ON/OFF

Text

Direct

Indirect

Shape (Basic figure)


Choose the Shape.

Frame

(Free figure) Panelkit dialog box


Choose the Shape.

Switch

Designation of Switch (0 to 255)

Pattern

Background



Style

Color

Solid

V H

High quality font

ON Text/

OFF Text

Copy from ON





Text dialog box

...Set the touch key text.


Device

Fixed

Preview No.


ON/Off (Numerical setting)

Setting of Comment No.

(To the following page)

5 - 63 5 - 63

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(From the previous page)

Action

Bit

Word

Extended

Base

Key Action (Bit) dialog box

Key Action (Word) dialog box

Key Action (Extended Key) dialog box

Key Action (Base switching) dialog box

Device

Action

Device dialog box


Set/

Reset/

Alternate/

Momentary



Type

Data type

16bit/32bit

Fixed

Indirect

Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/

Real

Set the fixed value to be written to word device.


Initial value condition

Extended action

Condition value

Reset value

Utility/Key Window/Test Window/Start hardcopy/

Password/Clean screen/Change Brightness/

Ladder monitor/System monitor/Special function monitor/

Abort hardcopy/Clock setting/Network monitor/

Basic

Servo amplifier monitor/List editor/motion monitor

Previous

Fixed

Device

Screen Image dialog box ...Choose the

Screen.


Window

Key Action (Window switching) dialog box

Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)

/Word (BCD16)

Action

(for bit)

No.

Hold

Action

(for word)

Screen Image dialog box ...Choose the

Screen.

Basic

Edit

Delete

Up/Down


...Set the conditional expression and switching

method.

Deletion of operation

Move operation sequence up/down

Edit

Next screen


...Set the switching method for the case where conditional expression is not applicable.

Fixed


Type

...Setting of Device

No.

Data type

Bit/Word (BIN16)/

Word (BCD16)

Overlap Window1/Overlap

Window2/Superimpose Window

Action

(for bit)

Same as the settings of Operation setting

(for bit) tab in Key operation setting (base switching) dialog box

Action

(for word)

(To the following page)

(for word) tab in

Key operation setting (base switching) dialog box

5 - 64 5 - 64

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(From the previous page)

Station

No.

Key Action (Switching

Station No.) dialog box

Basic

Next station

Host

Other

Device

NW No.

Station No.

Device dialog box ...Setting of

Device No.

Data type Bit/Word (BIN16) /

Word (BCD16)

Mode All

Action

Screen

Type

(For bit)

Host

Other

Base/Overlap window1/Overlap window2/Superimpose window

NW No.

Station No.

Action

Hold

(For word)

tab in Key operation setting (base switching) dialog box

Edit

Delete

Key code

Change the setting.

Delete the setting.

Set the Key code

Option

Security (Display)

Security (input)

Simultaneous press

Delay

Specify of Security (0 to 15)

Specify of Security (0 to 15)

On preference/ Off preference

No/

ON/OFF/Press twice

Attribute for middle of two presses

Edit key group Checked/unchecked

Unchecked/checked

Device

Shape

Frame

Switch

Pattern

Background

Choose the Shape




Text

Style

Color


(0 to 255)

Text dialog box



Solid

V H

Designation of Solid of chraracters.


High quality font


Offset

Trigger

Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Range/Bit trigge



16bit/32bit


Range Edit Range dialog box ...Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)


5 - 65 5 - 65

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Case

Display trigger

Shape

Action

Bit

Key

Bit

No

Basic figure

Basic figure

(ON/OFF)

Shape

Frame

Switch

Text

Color

V H

Copy from ON

Device

Key Action (Bit) dialog box

Device dialog box

Device


Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape.



Text dialog box ...Set the touch key text.




Device dialog box


Action

Set/Alternate/Reset/Momentary

Word

Base

Edit

Delete

Key code

Key Action (Word) dialog box

Key Action (Base switching) dialog box

Device

Type

Initial value condition

Device dialog box


16bit/32bit

Data type

Fixed

Indirect


Set the fixed value to be written to word device.

Device

Device dialog box

Condition value

Reset value

Basic

Previous

Change the setting.

Delete the setting.

Set the Key code.

Fixed

Screen Image dialog box

...Choose the Screen.

Option/Trigger

Simultaneous press

Trigger type

Auto repeat

Unchecked/checked

Ordinary

ON/OFF

Device

Unchecked/checked


5 - 66 5 - 66

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up touch key" "Setting up touch key" from Contents of Help.

POINT


• Security can be set to display/hide data and to enable/disable the touch key.

• Idling period from when the key is touched until operation starts (set period, touch again) can be set in increments of one second with a minimum value of one second. (Delay setting)

• Setting can be made to disable touch keys from being touched simultaneously.

• The following multiple functions can be set to one touch key. If the touch key is set as an extended key, multiple functions cannot be set.

Function Quantity

Operation priority under multiple setting

High Bit momentary

Bit SET

Bit RST

Bit ALT

Word SET

Base screen switching

Window screen switching (overlap window 1)

Window screen switching (overlap window 2)

Window screen switching (superimpose window)

Station switching

20

20

20

20

20

1

1

1

1

1

Low

5 - 67 5 - 67

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.6 Data Input Functions

The data input functions write any data to devices.


• Numerical input function ..............Writes any value to a device.

• ASCII input function .....................Writes any key code to word devices.

5.6.1 Numerical input function (writes any value to device)


This function writes any value to the specified word device.


(a) Writes any value to a word device (D100).

D100 100 1000

D100 100 D200 100 D100 100 D200 100

D100 1000 D200 100

Key window Key window

Touch an input area to display the input key window.

Setting Portion


Numerical input

Settings

Move the cursor to the next input area.

(b) You can change the display color and attributes when entering a given value to the monitor device. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

Temperature target value

5 8

Key window


58



-20


125

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

Settings

Device: D0

Shape: checked

Setting Portion

<Case>tab

Settings

Case1: Defined case ($W<0), Numeral: 255

Case2: Defined case (100<$W), Numeral:0, Plate: 255

(c) You can set the input cursor display order as you like when there are multiple numerical input areas.

A 550

B

3 A 100 B 0 A 550 B 0 A 550 B 0

C 200 D 50

C 200 C 200 D 180 C 200 D 185

Item

Numerical

Input A

Numerical

Input B

Numerical

Input C

Numerical

Input D

Common

Input cursor moving path

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Basic>tab

<Basic>tab

<Basic>tab

Device: D101

Device: D102

Device: D103

Device: D104

Numerical input

Move the input cursor to D.

Settings

Numerical input

Move the input cursor to B.

Setting Portion

<Option>tab

<Option>tab

<Option>tab

Screen auxiliary setting

Cursor Movement Defined key action: User ID order

<Option>tab

Numerical input

Move the input cursor to C.

Settings

User ID: 1

Move destination ID: 4

User ID: 2


User ID: 3


User ID: 4


5 - 68 5 - 68

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(d) Controls the input cursor position on the PLC CPU side and also develops the device value whose numerical input has been established into other control.


Use the system information function to make sure that the numerical input has been established.

Under the conditions of the "numerical input number storage area" and

"numerical input signal" data, develop the numerical input value into other control.

[System information function devices used in this setting example]

Item

D6: Numerical input number storage area

D2.b4: Numerical input signal

D1.b4: Numerical input completion signal

Description

Stores the user ID of the established numerical input function.

Turns ON when the numerical input is established.

Turns ON to turn OFF the numerical input signal.

M1 OFF ON

M2 OFF

M3 OFF

M4 OFF

A 0 B 0

C

0

When M1 turns ON, the operation condition of numerical input A is enabled to display the cursor and key window.

Use the key window to enter and establish the value.

Numerical input

(Write to D101)

D101 0 100

D6 0 1

D2.b4 OFF ON

A 100 B 0

C

0

When numerical input is established, D6 and D2.b4 make changes. Under conditions of their data, develop the D101 value into other control.

D6 : Stores the user ID (1) of the established numerical input.

D2.b4: Turns ON the numerical input signal of the system

information.

M1 ON OFF

M2 OFF

M3 OFF

M4 OFF

A

100

B

0

C 0 D 0

When M1 turns OFF, the cursor and key window disappear.

Until the operation condition (M1 to M4) of numerical input is enabled (ON), the cursor and key window do not appear.

D2.b4 ON OFF

D1.b4 ON OFF

D1.b4 OFF ON

D2.b4 ON OFF

After making sure that D2.b4 turned OFF, turn OFF D1.b4.

After developing the D101 value into other control, turn

ON D1.b4 to turn OFF D2.b4.

D1.b4: Turns ON to turn OFF the

numerical input signal of the

system information.

Item

Numerical

Input A

Numerical

Input B

Numerical

Input C

Numerical

Input D

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Trigger>tab

<Basic>tab

<Trigger>tab

<Basic>tab

<Trigger>tab

<Basic>tab

<Trigger>tab

Common

Project Auxiliary Setting dialog box

Settings

Device: D101

Trigger type: ON, Device: M1

Device: D102


Device: D103


Device: D104


Action when condition success:

Display cursor and key window.

Action when condition fail:

Erase cursor, key window and input object.

Setting Portion

<Option>tab

<Option>tab

<Option>tab

<Option>tab

System Information

dialog box

User ID: 1

User ID: 2

User ID: 3

User ID: 4

Settings

Read device: D1

Write device: D2

POINT

Refer to Section 5.8.2 for details of the system information function.

5 - 69 5 - 69

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The numerical input function consists of the following setting items.

• " Numerical Input" dialog box


Basic

Device

Shape

Frame

Plate

Color

Blink

Reverse

Device

Data type




Unchecked/checked



Designation of Backgroud (0 to 255)


No/Low/Middle/High

Text/Text and Plate

Unchecked/checked

Form

Format Signed Decimal/Unsigned Decimal/Real/Octal/Binary/Hexadecimal


Disp all digits

High quality font

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked




Adjust decimal point range

Expression

Mask

Pattern

Shift

None/AND

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right


Monitor word

Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

Write word

Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

Case

Option


Set

Delete


...Set the display attribute changing conditional expression and display attribute.

Security (Display)

Security (Input)

Offset

Write device

User ID

Move destination ID

Trigger

Trigger Type

Unchecked/checked


Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Set the User ID.

Unchecked/checked


Set the Move destination ID.

Screen Setting

Screen Auxiliary Setting ...Set the Defined key action.

Range

Ordinary/ON/OFF/Range/Bit trigge


16bit/32bit


Edit Range dialog box ...Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)

Set


5 - 70 5 - 70

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Device Device


Data type



Shape

Frame

Plate

Numeral

Form

Unchecked/checked





Format

Signed decimal/UnSigned decimal/Real/Octal/Binary/Hexadecimal


Disp all digits

Unchecked/checked




Trigger

Trigger Type

Device

Ordinary/ON/OFF

Device dialog box


Others




Upper Fixed Setting of Fixed

Lower

User ID

Move destination ID

Device

Fixed

Device

Unchecked/checked

Device dialog box

Setting of Fixed

Device dialog box



Unchecked/checked

Setting of User ID No.

Setting of Move destination ID No.

Screen setting

Screen auxiliary setting dialog box

.........Confirmation key operation setting

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Data input" "Setting up numerical input" from Contents of

Help.

POINT



• The system key window of the GOT is available for value input. (Input keys can be created freely.)

• Values including decimal points can be displayed or input.


• The input keys of the F940GOT are available from the key window and GOT's system window.

• The input keys of the F930GOT are available from the GOT's system window only.

5 - 71 5 - 71

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.6.2 ASCII input function (writes any key code to word devices)


This function writes any key code to the specified word devices.


(a) Writes any key code to word devices, starting from the specified one (D100).

1 ABC 2 ABC

1 2 3 4 5

C D E F

A B DEL

1 2

ABC

1 2 3 4 5

C D E F

A B DEL

1 CDEF 2

1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL

C D E F C C C C

Touch an input area to display the cursor for input.

Setting Portion


Text input Move the cursor to the next input area.

Settings

(b) You can set the input cursor display order as you like when there are multiple

ASCII input areas.

A 123 B ABC

C CDE D 45

1 2 3 4 5

C D E F

A B DEL

B ABC

C CDE D 45

1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL

C D E F C C

A FED B ABC

C CDE

1 2 3 4 5

C D E F

A B DEL

A FED

C CDE D CBA

1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL

C D E F C C

Input cursor moving path

Text input

Move the input cursor to D.

Text input

Move the input cursor to B.

Text input

Move the input cursor to C.

Item

Ascii Input A

Ascii Input B

Ascii Input C

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Basic>tab

<Basic>tab

Device: D10

Device: D20

Device: D30


<Option>tab

<Option>tab

<Option>tab

Settings

User ID: 1


User ID: 2


User ID: 3


Ascii Input D <Basic>tab

Common

Device: D40

Screen auxiliary setting

Cursor Movement Defined key action: User ID order

<Option>tab

User ID: 4


5 - 72 5 - 72

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The ASCII input function consists of the following setting items.

• " Ascii Input" dialog box


Basic

Device

Shape

Frame

Plate

Text

Blink

Reverse

Device

Unchecked/checked






No/Low/Middle/High

Text/Text and Plate

Unchecked/checked

Form

Size(Height width size setting)

Digits(Digit count setting)

Option

Security (Display)

Security (Input)

Offset

Checked/unchecked

Device


User ID

Unchecked/checked

Device

Move destination ID

Unchecked/checked

Device

Set the User ID.

Set the Move destination ID.

Screen Setting Screen Auxiliary Setting ...Set the Defined key action.

Trigger

Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Range/Bit trigge

16bit/32bit


Device

Device dialog box ...Set the DeviceNo.

Range

Bit trigger

Edit Range dialog box

...Set the conditional expression for word device range.


Set


5 - 73 5 - 73

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Basic

Device

Trigger

Trigger Type

Device

Shape

Frame

Plate

Text

Unchecked/checked



..Choose the Shape.



Form



Alignment

Left/Right/Center

Ordinary/ON/OFF


Option

Device

User ID

Move destin.


Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

Setting of User ID No.

Setting of Move destination ID No.

Screen setting

Screen auxiliary setting dialog box

.........Confirmation key operation setting

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Data input" "Setting up ASCII input" from Contents of

Help.

POINT



• Input keys can be created freely.

• By setting the user ID and move destination ID, the position of the next input area can be set freely.


• The input keys of the F940GOT are available from the key window and GOT's system window (10-key pad).

• The input keys of the F930GOT are available from the GOT's system window

(10-key pad) only.

• Input keys can be created freely.

• By setting the user ID and move destination ID, the position of the next input area can be set freely.

5 - 74 5 - 74

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.7 Report Function (Prints Values Stored in Devices or Buffer Memory)


OFF

X10

ON

This function gathers and prints numerical data stored in the word devices or the buffer memory of a special function module every time a data collection trigger occurs, or prints numerical data and comments associated with bit device ON/OFF.


(a) Gathers and prints data per data collection trigger. (Real-time report)

The current data and next data are printed continuously without the printer paper page being renewed.

Device states

D100

D101

D102

D103

10

20

30

40

Device states

D100

D101

D102

D103

50

60

70

80

D100: Device used to monitor processed products in line 1




Every time collection trigger X10 turns

ON, device values of D100 to D103 are gathered and printed.

[Print example] The following print layout is created on report screen.

00/08/02 16:53:24

Production List

1

Texts and table are drawn with report figures.

Products

Products

Products

Line Name

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

Amount

10pcs.

20pcs.

50pcs.

60pcs.

90pcs.

100pcs.

Line Name

Line 3

Line 4

Line 3

Line 4

Line 3

Line 4

Amount

30pcs.

40pcs.

70pcs.

80pcs.

105pcs.

115pcs.

Set as repeat lines.

Set print objects (values).


Report Comment Setting dialog box

Edit Parameter dialog box <Format/Trigger tab>tab

Trigger watch cycle: 3 minutes (Initial)

Report style

Page No.

Collect trigger type

: Real/cont.

: print (at right top)

: Rise (X10)

Numerical Print dialog box <Basic>tab

Set to D100, D101, D102 and D103, respectively.

Device : D100 to D103

Print style

Digits

: Unsigned decimal

: 3

5 - 75 5 - 75

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(b) Gathers and stores data onto the PC card per data collection trigger. Then, prints the data stored on the PC card when a print trigger occurs. (Logging report)

Before printing, the printer paper page is renewed.

Device states

D100

D101

D102

D103

10

20

30

40

Device states

D100

D101

D102

D103

50

60

70

80





X10

OFF ON

Every time collection trigger X10 turns ON, device values of D100 to D103 are gathered and stored onto

PC card.

Collection trigger occurs.

Report data file

PC card

Print trigger occurs.

ON

X100

OFF

Every time print trigger X100 turns ON, collected data stored on PC card are printed.

Data stored when the first data collection trigger occurred

Data stored when the second data collection trigger occurred

[Print example] The following print layout is created on report screen.

Printed when print trigger turns ON second time

Production List

Products

Products

Line Name

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

Amount

10pcs.

20pcs.

50pcs.

60pcs.

Line Name

Line 3

Line 4

Line 3

Line 4

Amount

30pcs.

40pcs.

70pcs.

80pcs.

Texts and table are drawn with report figures.

Set as repeat lines.

Set print objects (values).

Printed when print trigger turns ON first time

Production List

Products

Products

Line Name

Line 1

Line 2

Line 1

Line 2

Amount

90pcs.

100pcs.

110pcs.

120pcs.

Line Name

Line 3

Line 4

Line 3

Line 4

Amount

105pcs.

115pcs.

125pcs.

135pcs.


Report Comment Setting dialog box

<Format/Trigger tab>tab

Trigger watch cycle: 3 minutes (Initial)

Report style

Page No.

: Log/page

: Not print

Collect trigger type : Rise (X10)

Print trigger : Rise (X100)

Edit Parameter dialog box

<Log>tab

Report num.

Sampling num.

: 1

: 2

Over processing : Overwrite

Delete trigger type : Print

Numerical Print dialog box <Basic>tab

Set to D100, D101, D102 and D103, respectively.

Device : D100 to D103

Print style : Unsigned decimal Digits: 3

5 - 76 5 - 76

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The report function consists of the following setting items.

• [Report Common Setting] dialog box

Make setting used commonly to all report screens.

Change page (before print)

Trigger watch cycle

Abort trigger type

Unchecked/checked

Set the trigger monitoring cycle (1 to 60)

None/

Rise/Fall

Device

Device dialog box


Initialize change page after aborting

Print Format

Unchecked/checked

Print Format dialog box

...Lines, Columns, Margin

• [Edit Parameter] dialog box

Set the report type and operations to each report screen.

Format/Trigger

Report style

Page No.

Time

Collect trigger type

Real/cont. / Log/page

Print (at right top) /Not print

Not print/at center top/at left top/at right top

Sampling ( Setting of Sampling cycle (3 to 3600) )

Rise/Fall


Print trigger Rise/Fall

Device dialog box


Log

Report num.

Sampling num.

Over processing

Logging

Delete trigger type

File name

Set the repeat count of repeated row at print trigger occurrence.

Set the number of times when collected data is stored onto PC card.

Overwrite/break

Oldest/Latest

Rise/Fall/

Turn on/Print



Set the file name stored onto PC card.

• [Numerical Print] dialog box

Set the print position, print device, print format and others of the numerical data to be printed on report paper.

Basic

Device

Device dialog box


Print style

Digits

Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real


SignedDecimal/UnsignedDecimal/Hexadecimal/Binary/Real

Right alignment/Left alignment

Specify the number of digits to be printed (1 to 13).

Disp. all digits

Specify the decimal fraction part to be displayed (0 to 32).

Decimal point

Expression

Mask

Pattern

Shift

No.of shift

Expression

None/AND/OR/XOR

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right

Set the shift count.



5 - 77 5 - 77

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

• [Comment Print] dialog box

Set the print position, print device, print format and others of the comment data to be printed on report paper.

Basic


Print digits

Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)

Set the number of digits to be printed (1 to 255).

Comment No. (bit)...Set the comment number of ON/OFF.

Expression

Mask

Pattern

Shift

No.of shift

Expression

None/AND/OR/XOR

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right




Header range

Repeat range

• [Header/Repeat Range] dialog box

Set the header (title, etc.) range on the report screen and the range where printing will be repeated per data collection trigger.

Unchecked/checked Set

Start/ End

End

Start/ End

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Report Function" "Introduction-Report Function" from

Contents of Help.

POINT

• For restrictions on the report function, refer to Section 4.3.1.

• You can print the numerical data of word devices and special function module's buffer memory in decimal or hexadecimal.

• You can print numerical data and comments associated with bit ON/OFF.

• You can print the rules and characters drawn on the report screen. It should be noted that the report screen displays all rules in continuous line but vertical rules are actually printed as "-----".

• You can register data of up to eight reports (eight report screens) to a single project.

• You can set up to 256 points of print objects (values, comments) on a single report screen.

• You can perform data operations..

5 - 78 5 - 78

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8 Other Object Functions

This section explains the objects which have various functions other than the monitor and data input functions. There are the following other object functions.

• Hardcopy function.....................Prints a displayed monitor screen on a printer.

• System information function .....Confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU.

• Observe status function............Writes to the PLC CPU when a condition is enabled.

• Floating alarm function .............Causes comments associated with ON bit devices to flow from right to left on a base screen.

• Recipe function .........................Writes the specified data to devices or writes and saves device values in the specified device range to a PC card.

• Sound function ..........................Plays the touch sound of a touch key or a sound (sound file in WAV form) in the observe status function.

• Test function..............................Shows a test window during monitor screen display to allow a device value to be changed.

• Barcode function.......................Writes the data read with a barcode reader to the PLC CPU.

• Operation panel function ..........Enables operation from an external operation panel connected to the GOT.

• Time action function..................Performs device write or similar operations at the specified times of day on the specified days of week.

• Sampling function .....................Gathers data at specified intervals or on bit condition and shows them as a graph.

• Script function ...........................Controls a GOT display under the GOT side program (script).

• Video display function...............Displays the picture taken with a video camera in the GOT video window.

• RGB window display function...Displays the personal computer screen on the GOT.

5.8.1 Hardcopy function (prints a monitor screen or converts it into image file)


This function prints the current monitor screen of the GOT on a printer or saves it onto a PC card.


(a) Prints the current monitor screen of the GOT on a printer according to

ON/OFF of a bit device.

Start trigger occurs.

OFF ON

X10

No.

25

D10

D20

10

20

No.

25

D10

D20

10

20

Setting Portion

Hardcopy dialog box Start trigger: X10

Settings

5 - 79 5 - 79

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

POINT

• When the specified bit device is turned ON to trigger a hardcopy start, hold the specified bit device ON for longer than the preset monitor time.

• When the touch key function is used to turn ON the hardcopy starting trigger, set the operation type to "Bit SET" or "Bit ALT". If you set it to "Bit momentary", the hardcopy function is not performed.

(b) Saves the current monitor screen of the GOT onto a PC card in BMP/JPEG format.

Instead of a bit device, a touch key (extended) may also be used to determine the save timing. (Both the PC card saving and touch key (extended) functions may be used only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

Saved as BMP/JPEG file.

No.

10

PC card

No.

10

Setting Portion

Hardcopy dialog box

Touch the touch key (extended). 1

Settings

Target: PC card (PCMCIA)

1: Set the operation setting of the touch key to the extended (hardcopy) function.

Target

Style

(2) Setting items

The hardcopy function consists of the following setting items.

• "Hardcopy" dialog box


Printer/PC card (PCMCIA)

BMP/JPEG

The minimum number's file is deleted when capacity is exceeded and make initial state when the maximum is filed.

Print mode

Unchecked/checked

256 Color/16 Color/Monochrome

Rev. /Norm

Change page

Start trigger

Abort trigger

Trigger watch cycle

Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

After-printing page feed setting

Unchecked/checked

Device


Unchecked/checked

Device

Set the Trigger watch cycle.


5 - 80 5 - 80

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Rev. /Norm

Change page

Start trigger

Abort trigger


Unchecked/checked

Unchecked/checked

After-printing page feed setting (1 to 4)

Unchecked/checked


Unchecked/checked


Trigger watch cycle Set the Trigger watch cycle.

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Hardcopy" from

Contents of Help.

POINT


• For restrictions on the hardcopy function , refer to Section 4.3.1.

• When using the hardcopy function, always install the extended function operating system (ESC printer/PCL printer) to the GOT.

• If a hardcopy is executed with the GOT in the screen save status, video pictures will not be output correctly in hardcopy. When making a hardcopy of the monitor screen which displays a video picture, start a hardcopy after making sure that the GOT is not in the screen save status.

5 - 81 5 - 81

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.2 System information function (confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU)


This function confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU or transmits the information on the GOT900 series operating status from the PLC CPU to the GOT.


(a) Reads information on the GOT operating status from the PLC CPU and controls the GOT operating status.

1) Read device (D10) data is changed.

2) Read device data is confirmed.

3) Display is cleared according to

the new data of read device

(D10.b1: ON).

(Forced screen saver enable signal ON)

When bit turns ON, screen save status is forcibly chosen.

D10 b2 b1 b0

No.

25

OFF ON

Setting Portion

System Information dialog box

System Signal 1: D10

Settings

POINT

The GOT reads the following GOT operation states from the PLC CPU.

• Automatic screen saver disable signal • Forced screen saver enable signal 1

• Key code read completion signal

• Barcode input disable signal

• Numerical input read completion signal 1

• Key-in disable signal

• Hardcopy monochrome print signal

• GOT error reset signal

• Buzzer output signal

• Current Recipe No. 2

• Barcode input read completion signal

• Hardcopy setting enable signal

• Hardcopy reverse video signal

• External I/O function's output signal area

• Buzzer one-shot output signal

1 System information with which GOT-F900 series is compatible

2 System information with which only GOT-F900 series is compatible

(b) Writes the GOT operating status to the PLC CPU.

1) GOT display screen is changed from base screen 1 to 2.

Base screen 1 Base screen 2

2) As the GOT operating status changed, new data is written to

the write device.

Display screen number is stored into the write device.

When GOT-A900 series is used

D21 (displayed base screen number

storage area)

When GOT-F900 series is used

D20 (displayed base screen number

storage area)


System Information dialog box

<GOT-A900 Series>

System signal 1: D20

On-screen Base Screen Number: Checked

<GOT-F900 Series>

On-screen Base Screen Number: D20

5 - 82 5 - 82

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Read device

Write device

POINT

The following information can be written to the PLC CPU every time the GOT operating status changes.

• GOT error code

• On base screen number 1

• PC card battery error detection signal

• GOT ready signal

• On window screen number

• Numerical value input number

• Current cursor position 1

• Hardcopy output signal

• Key code input signal

• Numerical value input signal 1

• Previous cursor position

• Key code input signal

• Recipe processing signal

• GOT error detection signal

• Printer error detection signal

• Barcode input signal 1

• Human sensor detection signal

• Currently printed report number

• Superimposed screen number 1 2

• Superimposed screen number 2 2

• Previous numerical value input

• Current numerical value input

• Cursor position numeric value input

• Hardcopy sub-signal

• Report output signal

• Grip switch hold-down status

(A950 handy GOT, F940 handy GOT only)

• Input completion object ID 2 • Key window output signal

1 System information with which GOT-F900 series is compatible

2 System information with which only GOT-F900 series is compatible

(2) Setting items

The system information function consists of the following setting items.

• "System Information" dialog box


System Signel 1


External I/O Function output information

System Signel 2

GOT Error Code


On-screen Base Screen Number

On-screen Window Screen Number

Numeric Value Input Number

Current Cursor Position

Previous Cursor Position

Key Code Input

Previous Numeric Value Input(32bit)

Current Numeric Value Input(32bit)

Currently printed report screen

External I/O Function Input Information

Cursor Position's Numeric Value Input

Select All/Unselect

5 - 83 5 - 83

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Read device

Write device


System Signel 1


Current Recipe No.

On-screen Base Screen Number


On-screen Overlap Base Screen Number 1

On-screen Overlap Base Screen Number 2

After input Object ID

System Signel 2

Reserve area (10 points)

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up GOT Action (System information)" from Contents of Help.

5 - 84 5 - 84

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.3 Observe status function (writes to the PLC CPU when the specified condition is enabled)


This function writes data to the PLC CPU or performs GOT operation when the specified condition is enabled, e.g. when the specified bit device turns ON/OFF or the specified word device value falls within the specified range (only when the GOT-A900 series is used). Two modes are available in this function: to perform write/operation when the specified condition is enabled, independently of the display monitor screen

(per project); and to perform write/operation for each display screen when the specified condition is enabled (per screen).


(a) When the specified bit device X1 turns ON (condition), writes 100 to D10 (write).

X1

D10 0

D10 100

OFF

When X1 turns ON, GOT recognizes it.

ON

When condition is enabled, 100 is written to word device D10 of PLC CPU.


Trigger/Action dialog box

Observe

Status dialog box

<Project>tab

<Trigger>tab

<Action>tab

Trigger 1: ON Device: X1

Action : Word set (16bit)

Device : D10

Fixed : 100

POINT

• The observe status function can perform the following write/operation.

• Turn ON a bit device only while the condition is enabled. (Momentary)

• Turn ON a bit device. (Bit SET)

• Turn OFF a bit device. (Bit RST)

• Reverse the current status of a bit device. (Bit ALT)

• Write a value to a word device. (Word SET)

• Play a sound file with an external speaker. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

(b) When the value of the specified word device D100 falls within the the specified range (100 or more) (condition), turns OFF X10 (write). (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

When D100 value rises to or above 100, condition set to

GOT is enabled.

When condition is enabled (D100 value rises to or above 100), bit device X10 of PLC CPU is turned OFF.

X10

D100 26

D100 100

ON

Current temperature

: 26

Operating status

Operating

Current temperature

: 100

Operating status

Standby

OFF

Setting Portion

Trigger/Action dialog box Observe

Status dialog box

<Project>tab

<Trigger>tab Trigger 1: Word Range

<Action>tab

Action : Reset

Device : X10

Device: D100

Settings

Range: D100>=100

5 - 85 5 - 85

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The observe status function consists of the following setting items.

• "Observe Status" dialog box


Project

Add


Trigger

Trigger 1/

Trigger 2

ON/OFF/Word Range

Data length 16Bit/32Bit

Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real

Operator

Constant

==/</<=/!=/>=/>

Constant setting

Device


Delete (Condition 2 only)

Action

Action

Storing device

Momentary/Set/Reset/Alternate/Word set (16bit) /Word set (32bit) /

Sound

Sound

Points

Data type

Setting of Sound

Setting of Points (1 to 40)

Sound File List dialog box

...Choose the Sound File.


Device Device dialog box/Multiple Device dialog box


Fixed Unchecked/checked

Indirect

Unchecked/ checked

Setting of Fixed

Device

FMOV/BMOV

Device dialog box


Screen

Edit

Delete

Observe cycle

Ordinary

Sampling Setting of Sampling

Screen type

No./Browse

Base screen/Window screen

Screen Image dialog box ...Choose the Screen.

Add


Trigger

Trigger 1/

Trigger 2

Same settings as in Condition/operation dialog box for

Project tab setting

Offset

Unchecked/checked

Edit

Observe cycle

Delete


Action


Project tab setting

Ordinary

Sampling Setting of Sampling

5 - 86 5 - 86

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Project

Add


Trigger

Trigger 1/

Trigger 2

ON/OFF

Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Action

Action Momentary/Set/Reset/Alternate/Word set (16bit) /Word set (32bit)

Storing device

Points

Device

Setting of Points (1 to 40)

Device dialog box/

Multiple Device dialog box


Fixed

...Set the fixed value to be written to word device.

Indirect Unchecked/checked



FMOV/BMOV

Edit

Delete

Observe cycle

Ordinary

Sampling Setting of Sampling (1 to 60)

Screen

Base screen No./Browse

Screen Image dialog box ... Choose the Base screen.

Add Trigger/Action dialog box


Project tab setting

Edit

Delete

Observe cycle

Ordinary

Sampling

Setting of Sampling (1 to 60)

5 - 87 5 - 87

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Status Observation

Function" from Contents of Help.

POINT


• Up to two bit/word devices can be specified as conditions.

• Only one type of write/operation can be specified for the set condition.

• Up to 512 points of "condition + write/operation" can be specified for each project and each screen (up to 512 points per screen).

• Monitoring operation of the condition device may cause a delay in object display on the GOT screen.

Monitoring operation takes longer as the total number of condition device points increase or the monitoring intervals shorten. Be careful for setting.


• Up to two bit/word devices can be specified as conditions.

• Only one type of write/operation can be specified for the set condition.

• Up to 40 points of "condition + write/operation" can be specified for each project and each screen (up to 40 points per screen).

• Monitoring operation of the condition device may cause a delay in object display on the GOT screen.

Monitoring operation takes longer as the condition bit device points increase

(the number of device points will be up to 80 if project-based or screen-based settings overlap) or the monitoring intervals shorten. Be careful for setting.

5 - 88 5 - 88

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.4 Floating alarm function (causes comments to flow from right to left on a base screen)


Setting Portion

Floating Alarm dialog box

Screen Auxiliary

Setting dialog box

This function causes comments associated with multiple bit devices to flow from right to left on a base screen in occurrence order of comments corresponding to the bit devices which are ON.

Comments keep flowing until the ON bit devices turn OFF.


(a) When a bit device X1 turns ON, a comment indicating error occurrence associated with the bit device X1 flows.

X1

Error

D100 10

OFF

Error

ON

Error

Left Right

Settings

Device: X1

Carry out display of alarm flow: checked

(b) When comments are associated with multiple bit devices, the comments flow from right to left on a base screen in occurrence order of comments corresponding to the bit devices that currently are ON. Simultaneously, how many monitoring bit devices are ON is also checked.

(How many devices are ON is monitored only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

Indicates how many monitor devices are ON using numerical display object.

(Only when the GOT-A900 series is used) 1

Line 3 error Error

Number of errors

6

3 error Error Line

Setting Portion

Floating Alarm dialog box

Screen Auxiliary

Setting dialog box

Error

Left

Line 1 error

Right

Settings

Device points : 8

Continuous device : X1

Storage device D10

Carry out display of alarm flow: checked

1: Set the numerical display monitor devices to the occurrence count storage device (D10).

5 - 89 5 - 89

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The floating alarm function consists of the following setting items.

• "Floating Alarm" dialog box


Device points

Device

Storage device


Unchecked/checked


Comment No.

Size

Delete

Browse Comment List dialog box

...Register the comment.


Device points

Device

Comment No.

Size

Delete


Browse Comment List dialog box ...Register the comment.

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Floating Alarm

Function" from Contents of Help.

POINT

• Devices to be monitored are common to all screens, but whether floating alarms are displayed or not can be set for each base screen.

• Floating alarms appear at the bottom of the screen.

5 - 90 5 - 90

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.5 Recipe function (reads/writes values in the specified device range)


This function writes/reads device values to/from the specified devices of the PLC CPU on the specified condition (device ON/OFF).

The read data are stored as indicted below depending on whether the GOT is the

GOT-A900 series or GOT-F900 series.

• GOT-A900 series: Stored onto a PC card in CSV format (except A950 handy GOT)

• GOT-F900 series: Stored into the GOT.


(a) Turns ON the specified device X1 at a machining start or the like to write the initial device values of the PLC CPU from the GOT.

1) Specified device

(write trigger) X1 turns ON.

X1

OFF

ON

D10 10

D11 20

D12 30

D13 40

Recipe


Setting Portion

<Operation

Contents>tab

Device: D10

Device points: 4

<Write Trigger>tab

Trigger 1

X1 ON time

<Recipe

Device>tab

Recipe Device

D10: 10, D11: 20, D12: 30, D13: 40

Settings

D10 10

D11 20

D12 30

D13 40

2) Device values are written

to specified devices of

PLC CPU.

POINT

Device values may also be written to the specified devices of the PLC CPU from a

PC card fitted to the GOT. (Only when the GOT-A900 series (except the A950 handy GOT) is used)

5 - 91 5 - 91

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(b) Turns ON the specified device X2 at a machining end or the like to store the specified device values at machining end onto a PC card.

(Only when the GOT-A900 series (except the A950 handy GOT) is used)

1) Specified device

(read trigger) X2 turns ON.

X2

PC card

OFF

Setting Portion

Recipe


<Operation

Contents>tab

<Read Trigger> tab

Device

Device points

PC card

Trigger 1

X2 ON time

ON

D20 10

D21 20

D22 30

D23 40

2) Specified device values are read and

stored onto PC card.

Settings

: D20

: 4

: Use (Not set recipe device value)

D20 10

D21 20

D22 30

D23 40

POINT

Periodically writing device states to a PC card in the method (b) to back up the data enables a return to the status (b) when a next startup or the like is made in the method (a).

(For the GOT-F900 series, both the read and write triggers should be set in the recipe operation setting since the read data are stored into the GOT.)

(c) Using the spreadsheet or similar software of the personal computer, edit the device values read from the PLC CPU and saved on the PC card as a CSV format file.

(Only when the GOT-A900 series (except the A950 handy GOT) is used)

1) Device value data read

from PLC CPU

D10

D11

D12

100

200

300

2) Perform read, edit, etc. of PC card file on

spreadsheet software or like.

Value

100

50

250

Fit

PC card

PC card

Fit

D10

D11

D12

100

50

250

3) Save on PC card in CSV file format the device value

data edited on personal computer, and use them on

GOT.

Specify the same file name as that of the edit source.


Recipe


<Operation

Contents>tab

<Read Trigger> tab

Device points: 3

Device: D10

PC card: Use

Trigger 1

X2 ON time

5 - 92 5 - 92

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Edit

(2) Setting items

The recipe function consists of the following setting items.

• "Recipe" dialog box


Recipe Attribute

dialog box

Operation Contents

Recipe name Set the recipe operation name.



Device points

Setting of Device points (1 to 8192)

File register

Data type Signed 16bit/Unsigned 16bit/

Signed 32bit/Unsigned 32bit/

Unchecked/checked

File

PC card

Read Trigger

Trigger 1

Drive

File name

File name

Not used/Use (In the case of a file not being used, a file will be created with the recipe device) /Use (Not set recipe device value)

Trigger 2

Device

ON/Off

Unchecked/checked


Device

ON/Off

Device dialog box


Write Trigger

Trigger 1

Trigger 2

Device

ON/Off

Unchecked/checked


Copy

Paste

Delete

Delete all

File name

Device

Recipe Device

ON/Off

Device value

Copying of recipe operation

Setting of Device value

Creation of copied recipe operation duplicate

Deletion of recipe operation

Deletion of all recipe operations

Fixed/ Free

Device dialog box


5 - 93 5 - 93

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT


Edit

Recipe Attribute dialog box

Operation Contents

Recipe name

Device

Set the recipe operation name.


Device points Setting of Device points (1 to 4000)

Data type Signed 16bit/Unsigned 16bit

Read Trigger

Trigger1 Device

ON/Off


Write Trigger

Trigger1

Device

ON/Off


Delete

Delete all

Recipe Device

Device value

Deletion of recipe operation

Deletion of all recipe operations

Setting of Device value

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Recipe" from

Contents of Help.

POINT


• Up to two devices can be specified as conditions.

• For restrictions on the recipe function, refer to Section 4.3.1.


• Up to two devices can be specified as conditions.

5 - 94 5 - 94

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.6 Sound function (plays a sound on GOT)


Set WAV format sound files to play sounds as error warning messages and touch sounds provided when touch keys are touched.


(a) When playing a sound file with the observe status function

(Condition: When the bit device X1 turns ON, a sound file is played.)

Specified bit device X1 turns ON.

X1

OFF

ON

Operation stops.

When X1 turns ON, GOT recognizes that condition was enabled and plays specified sound file.

Setting Portion


Observe

Status dialog box


<Trigger>tab

Trigger 1 : ON

Device : X1

<Action>tab Action : Sound

Settings

Click the Edit button to register the WAV format file as a sound file.

POINT

To play a WAV format sound file when a touch key is touched, turn on the [Change touch key sound] check box in the [Project Auxiliary Setting] dialog box to make setting.

5 - 95 5 - 95

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Edit

Delete

(2) Setting items

The sound function consists of the following setting items.

• "Sound File List" dialog box

Sound File dialog box

No.

File name

Browse Set the WAV format sound file.

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Creating Sound Files" from

Contents of Help.

POINT

• For restrictions on the sound function, refer to Section 4.3.1.

• Sound files that can be played on the GOT are in the [8.000kHz, 16 bits, monaural] audio format. However, most of the sound files used generally are created in other audio formats.

Hence, when using generally used sound files on the GOT, they must be converted into the GOT format using general-purpose sound editing software

(e.g. "Sound Recorder" of Windows

R

95).

For conversion, refer to the help of GT Designer.

• Sound files of within eight seconds can be played on the GOT.

Data longer than eight seconds will be cut.

5 - 96 5 - 96

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.7 Test function (changes the device value of the PLC CPU)


This function shows a test window during monitor screen display to change a device value.

(This function is available while the ladder monitor function is used.)


(a) Touch a touch key to show a test window and change a device value.

NETWK No.[ ] STATION[ ]

DEVICE[ ] [ ] RST:0 SET:1

X Y M L S

B F

G AC DEL

Setting Portion

Touch Key dialog box

<Action> tab

Exlended: Test Window

Settings

POINT

• The device types whose values can be changed with the test function are as follows.

• Bit device ON/OFF

• Word device's current value change

• Timer/counter's set value change

• Buffer memory's current value change

• For restrictions on the test function, refer to Section 4.3.1.

5 - 97 5 - 97

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.8 Barcode function (writes data read with barcode reader to PLC CPU)


This function writes to the PLC CPU the data which are read with a barcode reader connected to the GOT.


(a) Reads barcode data with a barcode reader and writes them to the specified devices (D0 to D5) of the PLC CPU.

Barcode

Setting Portion

Barcode dialog box

Read data

"123456789"

D0 9 (Byte : 9)

D1 3231

H

(Data : 21)

D2 3433

H

(Data : 43)

D3 3635

H

(Data : 65)

D4 3837

H

(Data : 87)

D5 2039

H

(Data : 9)

Device : D0

Device points : 6

PLC CPU

GOT

Settings

(2) Setting items

The barcode function consists of the following setting items.

• "Barcode" dialog box

Device

Device points

Delete


123456789

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Barcode" from

Contents of Help.

POINT

For restrictions on the barcode function, refer to Section 4.3.1.

5 - 98 5 - 98

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.9 Operation panel function (operates GOT externally)


This function writes touch inputs, numerical inputs, screen switching, etc. to devices from outside the GOT using an operation panel.


(a) Turns ON the bit device X0 of the PLC CPU from an operation panel outside the GOT.

Press key preset to turn ON X0.

X0

OFF

ON

X0

X0 ON

External I/O unit must be fitted.

Setting Portion

Edit Operation Panel dialog box

Edit Action/Key code dialog box

<Action> tab

Available Operation Panel

Key

Bit Device : X0

Action : Set

: Checked

: X39

Settings

5 - 99 5 - 99

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The operation panel function consists of the following setting items.

• "Edit Operation Panel" dialog box

Operation panel key

Initialize

Action / key code

Available Operation Panel

Initialize Mode A8GT-TK

Edit Action/Key code dialog box

Action

Bit

.................

Word

...........

Base

.............

Window

........

Station No.

Same settings as in touch keys can be made. Refer to Section

5.5 for setting details.

Key Action

(Switching

Station No.) dialog box

Basic

Host

Other

Device

Action

NW No.

Station No.

Device dialog box


Data type

(For bit)

Bit/Word (BIN16)

/Word (BCD16)

Host

Other NW No.

Station No.

Action

Hold

(For word)

Edit


Delete

...Set the conditional expression

and switching method.

Deletion of operation

Up/Down

Move operation sequence up/down

Edit


Edit

Delete

Key code

Change the setting.

Delete the setting.

Set the Key code.

... Set the switching method

for the case where

conditional expression is

not applicable.

Security

Set the Security.

Simultaneous press Unchecked/checked

Trigger

Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Range

Device

Device dialog box

16bit/32bit



Range Edit Range dialog box

...Set the conditional expression for word device range.

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Operation Panel" from Contents of Help.

POINT

• For restrictions on the operation panel function, refer to Section 4.3.1.

• The operation panel is incompatible with the operation screens dedicated to the utility menu, system monitoring function, ladder monitoring function, special module monitoring function, list editor function and motion monitor function.

• If you have pressed the touch key and operation panel at the same time, both are made valid and the one detected first is processed first.

5 - 100 5 - 100

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.10 Time action function (performs specified operation at preset time)


This function performs the following operations at the preset times of day on the preset days of week.

• Turns a bit device ON/OFF.

• Writes a value to a word device. (GOT-A900 series only)

• Plays a sound file from an external speaker. (GOT-A900 series only)


(a) Holds M0 ON between 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM from Monday to Friday.

8:00

Monday

17:00

Tuesday to Thursday

8:00

Friday

17:00

M0

OFF

M0

ON

Setting Portion

<Time>tab (GOT-A900 series only)

<Time>tab (GOT-F900 series only)

<Action>tab

ON ON

M0

Starting time

OFF

End time

Settings

Mode: Daily, Start: 8h 0min Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri, End: 17h 0min.

Start: 8h 0min. 0sec. Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri, End: 17h 0min. 0sec.

Bit Device: M0

Starting time

OFF

End time

(b) Plays sound 1 and writes "9999" to D100 at 8:00 AM on Monday, and plays sound 2 and writes "0" to D100 at 5:00 PM on Friday.

(GOT-A900 series only)

Monday Tuesday to Thursday Friday

8:00 17:00

D100 0000 9999

<Time>tab

<Action>tab

Setting Portion

It's a start of this week!!

D100 9999 0000

Settings

Mode: Through, Start: 8h 0min Mon, End: 17h 0min Fri

Word Device: D100, Start write value: 9999, End write value: 0

Sound Start: 1, End: 2

Have a nice weekend!!

5 - 101 5 - 101

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Edit

Delete

Delete all

(2) Setting items

The time action function consists of the following setting items.

• "Time action" dialog box


Time action attribute dialog box

Time

Mode

Start

End

Daily/ Through h/min.

Starting time setting

Sun/Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri/Sat Starting day-of-week setting h/min.

End time setting

Sun/Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri/Sat

Ending day-of-week setting

Action

Bit Unchecked/ checked

Device

Device dialog box


Deletion of time action

Deletion of all time actions

Word

Unchecked/ checked

Device

Data

Data type

Device dialog box



16bit/32bit

Sound

Start write value

End write value

Unchecked/ checked

Start

Set the value to be written at start.

Set the value to be written at end.


...Browse sound file.

End


...Browse sound file.

Send mail Unchecked/

(GT checked

SoftGOT

only)

Alarm history data/Screen image/Recipe file

5 - 102 5 - 102

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Edit

Time action attribute dialog box


Time

Mode

Start

End

Daily h:min.:sec.

Starting time setting

Sun/Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri/Sat Starting day-of-week setting h:min.:sec.

End time setting.

Delete

Delete all

Action

Bit

Deletion of time action

Deletion of all time actions

Unchecked/ checked



(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Time action" from

Contents of Help.

POINT


• Up to 32 points can be set to one project.

Also, "bit", "word" and "sound output" can be set together per point.

• For restrictions on the time action function, refer to Section 4.3.1.

• You can send various data, such as the alarm history data, recipe file and screen image, as electronic mail. (GT SoftGOT only)

For details of the mail sending function, refer to the GT SoftGOT Version 5

Operating Manual.


• Up to 8 points can be set to one project.

5 - 103 5 - 103

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.11 Sampling function (reads PLC CPU data under specified condition)


This function collects data stored in word devices at specified intervals or on bit condition.


(a) Samples four consecutive devices, starting from the specified word device

(D0).

Sampling results can be displayed on the GOT in list or graph format.

Also, they may be read to GT Designer and saved onto FD or processed as text data on a personal computer.

Sampling condition: Intervals (1 minute)

400

300

200

100

0

D100 D101 D102 D103

Displayed as graph or list.

Upload

Sampling at intervals of 1 minute.

Save onto FD

Edited as text data.

Setting Portion

Sampling dialog box

Device

Trigger

Use Sampling

: D0

: Cycle (1 min.)

: checked

Settings

5 - 104 5 - 104

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Device

Trigger

Start

End

Use Sampling

(2) Setting items

The sampling function consists of the following setting items.

• "Sampling" dialog box


Device

Cycle

Device


Rise/Fall

Set the Sampling Interval.


Rise/Fall

Set the Time.

Time

Device

Device dialog box

Time

Rise/Fall

Set the Time.

Frequency

Set the Frequency.


Unchecked/Checked

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Sampling" from

Contents of Help.

POINT

Sampling results can be printed by a printer connected to the GOT.

(This cannot be performed when the PLC is connected by RS-232C communication.)

5 - 105 5 - 105

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.12 Script function (exercises display control under GOT program)


This function controls a GOT display under the GOT's original programs (hereafter abbreviated to scripts).

Using the GOT side scripts to exercise GOT display control, load on the system side

(PLC CPU, microcomputer, etc.) display can be reduced significantly.

POINT

Refer to "Chapter7 Script functions" for details of the script function. This chapter provides details on the specifications, setting procedures, program examples and troubleshooting of the script function.

Also refer to Section 7.4 for the setting methods of specific examples explained in the function outline and the program data of scripts.


Using the script function enables the following display controls.

(a) Touch keys with interlock functions

The Running lamp is lit when the Ready and Run/Stop switches turn

ON.

Running

Ready Run/Stop

Running

Ready Run/Stop

Running

Ready Run/Stop

Running

Ready Run/Stop

Touch Ready button.

Touch Run/Stop button.

Running lamp is lit.

(b) Lamp which changes in display text under multiple conditions

Operation controls of lines are exercised with corresponding touch keys and the control states of the three lines are represented by one lamp.

All lines stop

Line 1 Line 2 Line 3

Stop all lines

Line 1 running


Stop all lines

Lines 1, 3 running


Stop all lines

All lines stop


Stop all lines

Line 1 running appears.

Lines 1, 3 running appears.

All lines stop appears.

Manager

(c) Password input screen with clock limit function

The password input screen returns to the previous screen if a correct password is not entered within 10 seconds after it appeared.

Touching Manager button switches to

Manager password input screen.

Manager password Manager screen

3238


135 25 4328

Touch Manager button.

Manager password input screen returns to previous screen if there is no correct password entry for 10 seconds.

Type Manager password.

Manager screen appears.

5 - 106 5 - 106

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The script function consists of the following setting items.

• "Script setting" dialog box

Project

Add Script No.

Script number setting list Script View dialog box Choose the Script.

Script Edit dialog box

File name Script file name designation reference Browse Choose the File name.

Comment Comment setting to script file

Data Format Signed BIN 16Bit/Unsigned BIN 16Bit/BCD 16Bit/Signed BIN

32Bit/Unsigned BIN 32Bit/BCD 32Bit/Real 32bit

Trigger

Format

Ordinary

ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Sampling/ON Sampling/OFF Sampling

Sampling Interval

Set the Sampling Interval.

Previous

Next

Script Edit

Syntax check

Device

Switch to preceding script file.

Device dialog box

Switch to next script file.


Script file editing

Grammar check on script file

Edit

Copy

Paste

Delete

Up

Screen

Down

Screen

Type

Add

Edit

Copy

Paste

Delete

Up

Down

Option

Copying of script setting

Pasting of script setting

Deletion of script setting

Move up the script setting execution order.

Move down the script setting execution order.

Base/Window Screen No.

Script Editing dialog box ............ Same settings as in project

Copying of script setting

Pasting of script setting


Move up the script setting execution order.

Move down the script setting execution order.

Enable internal device [GD/GB] assignment delay

Script View Script View dialog box Browse

Browse dialog box ...Path reference

Script Edit

Path Replace

Syntax Check

All Check

Delete

Script No.

Script file editing

Convert file path dialog box

Before

After

All the same passing is converted

Grammar check on script file

Grammar check on all script files


Unchecked/ checked

Setting of script file number to be displayed

Symbol Setting Script Symbol dialog box ...Character string replacement

Editor Select

Editor Select dialog box

Use Notepad/ Use Word Pad

Select

Path

Option

Setting of path to editor

Editor option designation

5 - 107 5 - 107

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Script" from Contents of Help.

5 - 108 5 - 108

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.8.13 Video display function


This function displays the picture taken with a video camera in the GOT video window.

POINT

Refer to Section 4.1.4 for details of video windows used in the video display function.


(a) The picture taken with a video is displayed on the GOT as-is.

(Full mode)

In the full mode, up to four video windows can be displayed at the same time.

Video picture

Setting Portion

Switching Screen dialog box

<Video/RGB> tab

Video window/RGB screen: Selection

Device: D100

Settings

(b) The specified part of the picture taken with a video can be displayed on the GOT. (Clip mode)

Video picture

Specified part

Setting Portion


<Video/RGB> tab


Device: D100

1: Two or more video windows cannot be displayed in the clip mode.

Settings

(2) Setting items

The video display function consists of the following setting items.

• "Switching Screen" dialog box

Video window/RGB screen Unchecked/checked

Device

Data

Device dialog box

Use A9GT-80V4/

A9GT-80V4R1

Setting of the number of video windows to be displayed

Use A9GT-80R1

(RGB screen only)

.............

Setting of device number

BIN

BCD

5 - 109 5 - 109

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings.

1) Choose [Help]-[Firstly].

2) Choose "Setup operations using the "Common" menu" "Setting up screen switching devices".

POINT

Video windows can be used with the A985GOT-V only.

5.8.14 RGB screen display function


This function displays a personal computer screen on the GOT.

POINT

Refer to Section 4.1.5 for details of the RGB screen.


(a) When the RGB display controlling bit turns on, the screen of a personal computer is displayed on the GOT.

(RGB screen display/hide selection bit ON: b15)

Turning the bit on changes the GOT monitor screen to the RGB screen.

D10

OFF ON

A FED

B

CDE


RGB screen

Setting Portion

Monitor screen

Settings

<Video/RGB> tab


RGB screen: Selection

Device: D100

(2) Setting items

The setting items of the RGB window display function are the same as those of the video display function.

Refer to Section 5.8.13.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings.


2) Choose "Setup operations using the "Common" menu" "Setting up screen switching devices".

POINT

The RGB window display can be used with the A985GOT-V only.

5 - 110 5 - 110

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.9 Useful Functions

The following functions are useful.

• Screen call function.......................... Reduces project data capacity.

• Security function............................... Limits users.

• Offset function .................................. Shows multiple devices by setting of one device.

• Expression function.......................... Processes PLC CPU operation on GOT.

• Station number switching function... Switches the monitor destination to the same device of another station number.

5.9.1 Screen call function (reduces project data capacity)


This function shows other called screens over a basic screen as a single screen.


(a) Shows the same display information on multiple screens.

Necessary screen memory space/display setting is for one screen only.

98/7/25

Setting Portion

Base screen 4 call setting dialog box


Base screen 4

Base screen 2

Screen type: Base screen


Settings

No.: 2

No.: 2

D10 70

D20 10

Base screen 8

(b) Shows multiple called screens on a single screen.

B CDE

Base screen 1 Base screen 2

Base screen 5

Setting Portion




Settings

No.: 1

No.: 2

(c) Shows a screen having a layered (nest) structure.

As a single screen can display up to 16 levels of nesting, screen design of high freedom can be performed. (Only the GOT-A900 series)

A 1254

B 348

A 1254

B 348

2000/8/15

A 1254

B 348

A 1254

B 348

A 1254

B 348

A 1254

B 348

Window screen 1

Base screen 1

Base screen 5

Window screen 3

Level 1

Base screen 6

Level 2 Level 3

5 - 111 5 - 111

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Setting Portion




Settings



No.: 5

No.: 6

Screen type: Window screen No.: 1

Screen type: Window screen No.: 3

(2) Setting items

The screen call function consists of the following setting items.

• "Overlap Screen" dialog box

Set the overlap screen.

(a) When the GOT-A900 series is used

Screen type

No

Screen Image

Base screen

Window screen

Screen number designation


Display of screen image list


No.

Screen number designation

Screen Image Screen Image dialog box

Display of screen image list

• "Replace Overlap Screen" dialog box

Batch-change the overlap screen numbers.


Object

Overlap screen

Base/ Window

All/ Selected

Base/ Window

From/ to

Start/End

Browse



Object All/Selected Start/End

Overlap screen From/to

Browse


5 - 112 5 - 112

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

• "Overlap Screen List" dialog box

Display the overlap screen numbers hierarchally.


Screen type

Base/Window

Browse

Screen No.

Edit

Delete



Screen No.

Browse


Edit

Delete

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Operations after making screens" "Setting up Screen call" from

Contents of Help.

POINT

• The items available for the screen call function change with the GOT used as indicated below.

Item When using GOT-A900 series When using GOT-F900 series

Setting target screen

Max. number of called screens 1

Max. number of layered

(nesting) levels 2

Base screen, window screen

2047

16 (excluding source screen)

Base screen

5

Nesting not allowed

1: Indicates the maximum number of called screens relative to the basic screen (source screen).

2: Indicates levels on which screens will be further called.

• Called screen combinations cannot be changed during screen display after transfer to the GOT.

5 - 113 5 - 113

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

1

2000/8/15

A 1254

C 348

B 1254

D 348

(4) What you should know to use the screen call function (when using

GOT-A900 series)

(a) Order of displaying called screens

When multiple called screens exist on one screen, the display order is determined by the order of setting on GT Designer and the order of called screen levels.

Called screens are displayed in the following numerical order.

Since screens displayed later are shown on earlier ones, latter screens come to front.

Order of call setting to one screen on GT Designer

Line

1

Line

2

A 1254 B 1254

C 348 D 348

Line

3

• Up to 16 nesting levels, not including the base screen, are displayed.

• When multiple call settings were made on the same screen, screens are shown in the setting order on GT Designer.

• Among called screens having a layered (nest) structure, deeper screens are shown later.

• A screen having multiple call settings is displayed later than a called screen having a layered structure.

POINT

The security function, observe status function and script function set on called screens are also processed in the same order as the called screen displaying order.

5 - 114 5 - 114

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(b) Instructions for superimposing a called screen

When superimposed, a called screen is shown as described below, and therefore, setting should be made carefully.

1) When screen displays are overlapped

• Figure data

A called screen figure appears at the front.

+

Base screen Called screen Called screen display

• Object data

Out of the objects on a base/window screen and on a called screen, the object whose value changed appears at the front.

12345

+

000001


Every time object value changes, object whose value changed comes to front.

• Touch keys

At first, the touch key on the screen displayed later appears at the front. After that, the touch key whose display condition changed appears at the front.

Base screen

+

Called screen Screen display

5 - 115 5 - 115

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

POINT

• If screens are called in the same place, the touch keys set to the call screens 1 to

99 operate. The other touch keys are all invalid. (The touch keys set to the call screens 100 and later do not operate.)

However, if the touch keys have been set one over another, the touch keys of up to the sixth screen counted from the basic or call source screen operate.

Touch Touch Touch Touch Touch

Called screen 100

Called screen 99

Called screen 98

Called screen 9

Called screen 8

Called screen 7

Called screen 6

Called screen 5

Called screen 4

Called screen 3

Called screen 2

Called screen 1

Basic screen (source screen)

: Touch key activated.

: Touch key not activated.

: Represents that called screens 9 to 98 do not have overlapping touch keys.

• When called screen touch keys are overlapping, the touch keys are activated in order of upper to lower ones. Hence, the key may not be activated if touching time is short.

• If simultaneous touch disable keys are overlapped, they are inactive.

2) When objects that may be set only once on a single screen are superimposed

When objects that may be set only once on a single screen, e.g. data list and alarm list, are superimposed, they are all displayed but the function is restricted and the display is not provided correctly.

5 - 116 5 - 116

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(5) What you should know when using the screen call function (when the GOT-F900 series is used)

When superimposed on a base screen, a called screen is shown as described below, and therefore, setting should be made carefully.

(a) When screen displays are overlapped

1) Figure data

A called screen figure appears at the back.

+


2) Touch keys

The touch key on the called screen appears at the front.

If touch keys are overlapped, only the base screen touch key functions when touched.

+

Base screen Called screen Screen display

(b) When objects that may be set only once on a single screen are superimposed

When objects that may be set only once on a single screen, e.g. keyboard and alarm list, are superimposed, they are all displayed but the function is restricted and the display is not provided correctly.

5 - 117 5 - 117

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.9.2 Security function (limits users)


By setting the security level (0 to 15) for each object or screen, display data can be displayed or hidden according to the security level of the user.

A password can be set for each security level, which can be changed by inputting the corresponding password.

(The GOT-F900 series allows only the security level of the base screen to be set.)

Security level 0 : No security function is set.

Security level 1 : Low

Security level 15: High

Operator

1

Field worker

2

Field responsible person

POINT

In addition to the password of the security level, there are specific screens/functions that can restrict users by setting specific passwords.

• Utility screen

Set a password at a start of the utility screen to prevent accidental upload operation.

• Parameter change screen (only when GOT-A900 series is used)

Set the password on the parameter setting screen of the motion monitor function or servo amplifier monitor function to prevent accidental changes from being made to the parameter settings of the motion controller CPU

(Q172CPU/Q173CPU) or servo amplifier at the connection destination.

• Data transfer operation

Set a password at the time of uploading the screen data of the GOT to GT

Designer to prevent accidental upload operation.


(a) Changes the object functions which can be performed by specific persons.

On the following screen where many object functions have been set, change the operative items depending on operators.

Power

Line control screen

Production target

Run Stop

Password

Ladder

Power

Run

Stop

Ladder

Password

For display/changing the production target

(Security level 1/3)

Switches line power ON/OFF.

(Security level 2)

Starts the line.

(Security level 1)

Stops the line.

(Security level 15)

Starts the ladder monitor function.

(Security level 15)

Shows the password input screen.

(Security level 0)

Security level of operator display Change

Operation items ( : Operative, : Inoperative)

Power

Run Stop Ladder

Password

1

2

3

Plant manager 3

4

Maintenance/insp ection person

Others

15

0

5 - 118 5 - 118

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Security level: 0

Security password input screen appears.

Ladder

Password

Line control screen

Password

Security level: 1

Security level: 2

Security level: 3

Security level: 15

Line control screen

Production target

150

Run Stop

Power

Line control screen

Production target

150

Run Stop

2

Password

Line control screen

Production target

Power Run

3

Stop

Password

Line control screen

Production target

Line control screen

Production target

150

Run Stop

Password

You can perform operation for line run/stop.

Power

Line control screen

Production target

150

Run Stop

Password

You can perform operation for line power ON/OFF.

Line control screen

Production target

You can perform operation for production target changing.

Power Run

’â~

Password

P0

187

D1

1

M999

D2

K

- 1234 D100

2

V D162

47 90

D167

110

K

MOV 1 D1

K

You can perform

RST V

K

MOV 90 D162

K maintenance

MOV 110 D167

K

MOV 100 D172

D172

K K

/inspection using

SET M9028 ladder monitor

100 function.

Each operator enters security password.

Item

Production target

Power

Run

Stop

Security level: 5

Power Run Stop

Password

Ladder

4

Setting Portion

Numerical Input dialog box

<Basic>tab

<Option>tab





<Action>tab

<Option>tab

<Action>tab

<Option>tab

<Action>tab

<Option>tab

<Action>tab

<Option>tab

Touch Key dialog box <Action>tab

Settings

Device: D100

Security (Display): 1 Security (Input): 3

Bit Device: X1 Action: Alternate


Bit Device: X2 Action: Set


Bit Device: X2 Action: Reset


Extended Extended action: Ladder monitor


Extended Extended action: Password

(b) Restricts the screen switching of base screens.

By making the security level of a destination screen higher than that of the current screen, you can restrict the display of the destination screen. (Security level of destination screen: 6)

Security level: 5 Security level: 5 Security level: 5 Security level: 6

Line1

Destination screen security level: 6

Cancel Cancel

Line No.1

A 1254

B 348

A 1254

B 348

Touch the touch key

(base switching) to switch the base screen.

Since the security level of the destination screen is higher than that of the current screen, the password screen for changing the security level is displayed.

After pressing the Cancel key, press the - key to return to the previous screen.

Item

Destination screen security level

Setting Portion

Screen auxiliary setting dialog box Security: 6

The security level is changed to a level higher than that of the destination screen.

The base screen is changed.

Settings

5 - 119 5 - 119

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Level device

(2) Setting items

The security function consists of the following setting items.

• "Security" dialog box

Set whether the security level is valid or invalid and the password for converting the security level.


Unchecked/ checked

Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device

Edit Password dialog box ...Setting of Password

Delete Password Verify dialog box ...Deletion of level password

Date Transmission/

Utility

Level device

Register Password dialog box ...Setting of Password

Delete

Password Verify dialog box

...Deletion of Password


Unchecked/ checked

Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device

Edit Password dialog box ...Setting of Password

Delete Password Verify dialog box ...Deletion of level password

Date Transmission/

Utility

Register

Password dialog box ...Setting of Password

Password Verify dialog box

...Deletion of Password

Delete

Display password input error.

• "Screen Auxiliary Setting" dialog box

Set the security level for the screen.

Security Setting of Security (0 to 15)

• "Security function setting object setting" dialog box

Set the security level for each object.

Input object

Security (Display)

Security (Input)

Display object

Security




5 - 120 5 - 120

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setup operations using the "Common" menu" "Setting up

Password" from Contents of Help.

POINT

• How to set the security password

Before using the security function, you must set the password of each security level.

Refer to the help of GT Designer for details of the setting method.

• How to change the security level

When you want to change the security level during operation of the GOT, use the following procedure.

1) Perform either of the following operations on the GOT monitor screen to show the password.

• Touch the touch key (extended) for switching to the password screen.

• Touch the password on the utility screen.

2) On the password screen, type the password of the security level you want to change, and touch .

When stopping the security level change, touch in the password display window.

3) The security level of the current screen is changed and the screen provides the display which matches the security level.

• If you forgot the security password, security cannot be canceled. Write down the password so that it may never be forgotten.

5 - 121 5 - 121

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.9.3 Offset function (monitors multiple devices by setting of one device)


The value of the set offset device is added to the monitor device address to monitor devices.


(a) Shows multiple device values with one numerical display function.

(Monitor device: D100 to D199, offset device: D200)

Production screen

Line

1

Production

1025

Production screen

Line 1

Production 1025

Production screen

Line

Production screen

Line

Production

5

28532

Production of line 1 is displayed.

Offset value: 1

Device: D100+1=D101

Item

Line

Production

Touch the line input area.

Setting Portion

Numerical Input dialog box <Basic>tab

Numerical Display dialog box

<Basic>tab

<Option>tab

Type the line you want to display.

Settings

Production of line 5 is displayed.

Offset value: 5

Device: D100+5=D105

Device: D200

Device: D100

Offset Device: D200

(b) Shows comments in synchronization with the offset function.

(Input devices: D100 to D199, offset device: D200, displayed comment No.:

D200)

Production setting screen

Line

Product

Production

1

Engine

0

Settings of line 1 are displayed.

Offset value : 1

Comment No.: 1

Device: D100+1=D101


Line

Product

Production

1

Engine

0

Touch the production input area.

Line

Product

Production

Item


Line

1

Product

Production

Engine

Key window

30

Type production count of engines.


Line

Product

Production

1

Engine

100

Engine production setting is complete.


Line

Product

Production

5

Tire


Line

Product

Production

Engine

Key window

30


Line

Product

Production

Engine

0

Settings of line 5 are displayed.

Offset value : 5

Comment No.: 5

Device: D100+5=D105

Setting Portion

Numerical Input dialog box <Basic>tab

Comment Display dialog box

<Basic>tab


<Basic>tab

<Option>tab

Type the line you want to display.

Device: D200

Device: D200

Device: D100

Offset Device: D200

Settings

Touch the production input area.

5 - 122 5 - 122

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Offset

(2) Setting items

The offset function consists of the following setting items.

• "Offset function setting object setting" dialog box

Unchecked/checked

Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

(3) Setting method



2) Type "Offset" in Keyword of Help.

5 - 123 5 - 123

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.9.4 Expression function (performs operation processing of PLC CPU on GOT)


This function operates on the device value set to the corresponding object with the preset calculation expression to perform the corresponding object function with the resultant value.


(a) Shows a monitor device (D100) value as a numerical value having a decimal point.

(Operation expression (monitor): $$/100)

D100 50

0.5

Operation: 50/100=0.5


Numerical Display dialog box


<Format>tab Format: Real Decimal point: 1

<Expression>tab (GOT-A900 series only)

Expression: $$/100

1

1 Not needed when you use the function "that automatically adjusts the number of decimal digits" of the numerical display functions.

(b) Writes a numerical value with a decimal point to the PLC CPU.

(Operation expression (write): $W 100, operation expression (monitor):

$$/100)

D100 50

0.5

D100 90

0.9

Key window

Operation (monitor): 50/100=0.5

Operation (input): 0.9 100=90

Setting Portion


Settings


<Format>tab Format: Real Decimal point: 1

<Expression>tab (GOT-A900 series only)

Expression: $$/100, Write word: $W 100

2

2 Not needed when you use the function "that automatically adjusts the number of decimal digits" of the numerical input functions.

5 - 124 5 - 124

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(c) Operation is performed with PLC CPU values handled as values with decimal points.

When the operation result is changed, the value reflecting the change is written to the PLC CPU. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used.)

D100 10

D101 3

0.18

D100 442

D101 3

4.50

key winodw

Operation expression

Operation


:

:

Setting Portion

<Basic>tab

<Format>tab

$$ + 0.05 + D101

0.1 + 0.05 + 0.03 = 0.18

$W - 5 - D101

450 - 5 – 3 = 442

The " " part is automatically adjusted by the numerical input object function.

<Expression>tab

Settings

Device: D100

Format: Real Decimal point: 2

Adjust decimal point range: checked

Expression: $$+0.05+D101, Write word: $W-5-D101

(2) Setting items

The expression function consists of the following setting items.

• "Data operation function setting object" dialog box


Expression

Mask

Pattern

Shift

No.of shift

Expression

None/AND/OR 1/XOR 1

Set the mask value.

None/Left/Right



Monitor word 2

Write word 2

1

:You may set only the numerical display function.

2 :You may set only the numerical input function.

Expression Operator

Numerical term

+,-,*,/,%

Hexadecimal/Decimal/Octal

Expression style

Variable term

Device

$$

$W

$V

Enter numerical value.


Expression




(3) Setting method



2) Type "Expression" in Keyword of Help.

5 - 125 5 - 125

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(4) Expression performed when GOT-A900 series is used

There are the following methods for expression performed for the GOT-A900 series.

(a) Mask operation

Logical product (AND), logical addition (OR), or exclusive logical addition

(XOR) operation is carried out by the mask value which was used for setting the monitor device value.

1) Logical product (AND)

The result is 1 only when both bit numbers are 1.

If not, the result is 0.

Monitor device value

Preset mask value

(set in hexadecimal)

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Operation result

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

2) Logical addition (OR)

The result is 0 only when both bit numbers are 0.



Preset mask value


0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Operation result

Operation result

0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

3) Exclusive logical addition (XOR)

The result is 0 when the bit numbers are the same.



Preset mask value


0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

(b) Shift operation

The monitor device value is shifted in the specified direction (to right or left) by the preset bit count.

Shifted 4 bits to the right.


1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Operation result

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

Shifted 4 bits to the left.


0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

Operation result 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

5 - 126 5 - 126

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(c) Operation by formula

This function carries out the arithmetic operation of the monitor device value using the specified expression, and displays the object according to the result of operation.

1) Expression format

A

A • B

(A • B) • C

A • ((B • C) • D)

A • (B • C) A • (B •(C • D)

• Values available for A to E

((A • B) • C) • (D • E)

(A • B) • ((C • D) • E)

((A • B) • (C • D)) • E

Numerical value .......... Numerical value of up to 32 digits (decimal) including minus and decimal point are available.

$$ ................................. Used to specify monitor device values as values A to E.

$W ............................... Used to specify input values as values A to E.

(Available only when the numerical input function is used.)

$V................................. Used to specify the monitor device values/ expression result values as values A to E.

Device.......................... Used to specify the current device values as values A to E.

2) Available operations

Addition: + Reminder operation: % 1

Multiplication: Subtraction:

Division: /

1 The left side of the symbol is divided by the right side, and the reminder is the result of operation.

100%3 = 1 (100/3 = 33 with remainder 1)

(d) Operation sequence

1) Sequence of expressions for other than numerical input function


Mask operation

Shift operation

Operation using expression

GOT display

If no expression is specified

2) Sequence of expressions for numerical input function

Input value


(Write word operation)

Input value is calculated using the expression.

Shift operation

Mask operation 2

(AND)

Data is written to destination device

Numerical value display


(Monitor word operation)

Written value is calculated using the expression.

Reverse shift operation 1

If no expression is specified

Mask operation

(AND)

1 It is opposite to the write shift operation.

For example, if the shift operation is performed 2 bits to the right, the reverse shift operation is carried out 2 bits to the left.

5 - 127 5 - 127

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

2 What arithmetic is done by write mask operation

Write mask operation is different from ordinary logical product (AND) operation.

The following arithmetic is done.

Operation result (write value)=

(processing result up to shift operation AND mask value) OR (present value AND reverse pattern of mask value)

Example: This example assumes the following setting.

Item

Input value

Operation by expression

Shift operation

Mask value

Device value prior to write

(present value)

Processing result up to shift operation and mask value are ANDed.

5555

H

AND 00FF

H

= 0055

H

Setting

5555

H

None

None

00FF

H

AAAA

H

Device value prior to write (present value) and reverse pattern of mask value are

ANDed.

AAAA

H

AND FF00

H

= AA00

H

The above two processing results are

ORed and its result is handled as a write value.

0055

H

OR AA00

H

= AA55

H

(5) Expression performed when GOT-F900 series is used

There are the following methods for expression performed for the GOT-F900 series.

The value resulting from four function arithmetic done on the data of a word element with the values entered into Gain 1, Gain 2 and Offset is displayed or entered.

(a) Gain 1

Multiplication is performed. (Defaults to 1 when not used)

• Word element data Gain 1

(b) Gain 2

Division is performed. (Defaults to 1 when not used)

• Word element data/Gain 2

(c) Offset

Addition or subtraction is performed. (Defaults to 0 when not used)

Enter a negative value to perform subtraction.

• Word element data + Offset

Calculation is made in the following format.

Word element data Gain 1 / Gain 2 + Offset

5 - 128 5 - 128

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

5.9.5 Station number switching function (Switches the monitor destination to the same device of another station number)


This function allows you to switch the device of the currently monitored object to the same device of another station number on the same data link/network/CC-Link system to monitor multiple PLC stations on the same monitor screen.

This function is available only when the connection target PLC is the MELSEC-A,

MELSEC-QnA or MELSEC-Q series.


(a) The same object is used to monitor the devices of the other stations.

Station No. 1

(For data link)

Station No. 0

(master station)

Station No. 2

D100 100

D100 200

D100 40


D100 40

Station No. 3

Station number change device

D20 00FF (Hexadecimal)

D100 10

Monitoring station

No. 1

D100 100

Monitoring station

No. 2

D100 200

Monitoring station

No. 3

D100 10


D20

0001

(Hexadecimal)


D20

0002

(Hexadecimal)


D20

0003

(Hexadecimal)

Setting Portion

Switching Station No. dialog box

Screen Auxiliary setting dialog box

< Auxiliary >tab

Settings

All

Device: D100

Carry out station no. change: checked

(b) The network/station is selected and monitored according to the screen type.

Base screen

Overlap window 1




N/W No.: 1

Station No.: 3


Screen Auxiliary setting dialog box

Station number change device (hexadecimal)

Base screen :D20 00FF

Overlap window screen 1 :D21 00FF

Setting Portion

Switching Station No. dialog box

< Auxiliary >tab

0103

00FF

Settings

Screen type

Base: D20

Overlap window 1: D21

Overlap window 2: D21

Carry out station no. change: checked


N/W No.: 1

Station No.: 3


N/W No.: 2

Station No.: 6

0103

0206

5 - 129 5 - 129

5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Switching station No.

(2) Setting items

The station number switching function consists of the following setting items.

• "Switching Station No." dialog box

Checked/Unchecked

All

Checked/Unchecked


Screen type

Checked/Unchecked

Base

Checked/Unchecked


Overlap window1

Checked/Unchecked


Overlap window2

Checked/Unchecked


Superimpose window

Checked/Unchecked


Include Touch key action/observe Status(Screen)/Script(Screen)

(3) Setting method



2) Choose "Setup operations using the "Common" menu" "Setting up the switching station number device" from Contents of Help.

POINT

• The stations accessible by switching station number are equal to the stations that can be accessed for monitoring the objects.

For details, refer to the operating manual for the GOT-A900 Series Operating

Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection

System Manual)

• The devices for the following objects do not allow the switching station number.

Even when a switching station number is instructed, the GOT continues the monitoring using the same device specified by the object.

• Alarm list 1

• Trend graph display 1

• Switching screen

• Alarm history display

• Hardcopy function

• System information function

• Switching station number

• Report Function

• Clock display • Scatter chart display function 1

1: Unusable only when the memory save function is used.

• The station number can be changed by performing station number switching operation with the touch key.

Refer to Section 5.5 for the station number switching operation with the touch key.



NW No.: 2

Station No.: 10

5 - 130 5 - 130

6

6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT

MELSOFT

CHAPTER6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT

6.1 Operations to Be Set for the First Time


The following describes the outline of the procedures for common setting required for preparing screens on the GT Designer.

For operation procedures of each item, refer to the help window of the GT Designer.

Start

Select [ New ] in the selection dialog box of the project displayed when the drawing software is started, and set the GOT/PLC type.

Select the [Common]-[Switching Screen] menu to set the switching device for the base screen and the window screen

(Base screen switching device default value : D0)

Select [Common]-[Switching Station No.] menu to designate the device for switching the station number

⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅

If station number is not switched, setting is not required

Select the [Common]-[Password] menu to set password for each security level to show/hide objects

(Default value of the security level : 0 (lowest))

⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅

If the security function is not used, setting is not required

Select the [Project]-[Option] menu to set the operation environment (Toolbar status (shown/hidden), Display method of grid, etc.) of the GT Designer

Select the [View]-[Color Setting] menu and designate display colors for each object and figure by using the color list box

(Available only for 256-color TFT display)

End

6 - 1 6 - 1


MELSOFT

6.2 Operations for Drawing Figures


Operations for drawing figures are described in the help window.

For further details, refer to the help window of the GT Designer.

6.3 Operations for Object Setting


The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for drawing objects.


Start

•

Select the object to draw from the [Draw] menu

•

Click the button of the object to draw on the tool palette

The object drawing dialog box is displayed

Designate the basic tab items (basic setting, display setting, etc.)

If extension tab is not designated

If extension tab is designated

Click the Extended>> button

Designate the extended tab items

(option, expression, etc.)

After setting, click the OK button g ’£â ƒ “ ‚ð ƒ

End

6

6 - 2 6 - 2


MELSOFT

6.4 Operations for Creating a Report Screen


The following flowchart gives an outline of operation procedure for creating a report screen.

For full information, refer to the help function of the GT Designer.

Start

Choose the [Screen]-[New Screen] menu and create a new report screen.

Choose the [Report]-[Common] menu and set the page renewal, watch interval, abort trigger device, report print format, margins, etc.

Choose the [Report]-[Parameter] menu and set the report screen parameters (report style selection, page number/time-of-day print selection, collection trigger designation).

Using report figures (line/text), set the print layout.

Using print objects (numerical/comment), set the data to be printed.

Specify the header/repeated lines.

End

6 - 3 6 - 3


MELSOFT

6.5 Installation Operations of System Program


POINT

When using GT SoftGOT, you need not perform this operation.

6.5.1 Types of system program installed on GOT

To operate the GOT, the following system programs must be installed on the GOT.

POINT

• If the system program of GT Designer used to create the screen data is newer than the system program installed in the GOT unit, the older system program may not be compatible with some new functions.

When downloading the screen data, it is recommended to install the system program again.

• The versions (leftmost versions) of the basic function OS, PLC communication driver and extended function OS to be installed into the GOT should be the same.

If they are different, the GOT will not operate.

(Example 1) (Example 2)

Basic function OS : Ver. 9.*.*

PLC communication driver : Ver. 9.*.*

Extended function OS : Ver. 9.*.*

Basic function OS : Ver. 9.*.*

PLC communication driver : Ver. 8.*.*

Extended function OS : Ver. 8.*.*

The GOT operates.

The GOT does not operate.

(1) Standard monitor OS

The system program to control the monitor function

(2) Communication driver

The driver to communicate between the GOT and the PLC CPU

(3) Extended function OS (Installed as required)

(a) The system programs which provides the GOT with the following extended functions

• Ladder monitoring function

• System monitoring function

• Special unit monitoring function

• Network monitoring function

• Motion monitoring function

• Recipe function

• Sound function

• Printer function

• Operation panel function

• Report function

• Barcode function

• Video display function • RGB screen display function

• Gateway function • Servo amplifier monitor function

6 - 4 6 - 4


MELSOFT

(b) Combination of installable extended function Operating

Systems

Up to nine of the following extended function OSs can be selected as a combination of extended function OSs that can be installed into the GOT.

The number of installable extended function OSs varies with the GOT builtin memory space. (If an extension memory board is not fitted, the extended function OSs equivalent to a total of up to six required memories in the table can be stored.)

Refer to Appendix 6 for details of the GOT built-in memory and installed extended function OSs.

Extended Function OS Name

System monitor

Ladder monitor

MELSEC-A ladder monitor

MELSEC-QnA ladder monitor function 1

MELSEC-Q ladder monitor function

MELSEC-FX ladder monitor

1

Motion Monitor

Special unit, Recipe, Sound

Network monitor

List editor function (MELSEC-A) 1

Gateway (Server/Client, FTP Server, Mail)

Servo amplifier monitor

Other

ESC Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Key board 2

PCL Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Key board 2

ESC Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, I/O 2

PCL Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, I/O 2

ESC Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Video/RGB 2

PCL Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Video/RGB 2

Chinese(Big5) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Key board 2

Chinese(Big5) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, I/O 2

Chinese(Big5) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV,

Video/RGB 2

Chinese(GB) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Key board 2

Chinese(GB) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, I/O 2

Chinese(GB) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV,

Video/RGB 2

Number Equivalent to Required

Memories at Installation

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

2

1

2

1

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

Remarks

Only one may be selected.

Only one may be selected.

1: If the OSs are installed into the GOT where multiple extended/optional functions have already been installed, they may not be installed depending on the status of the GOT memory area.

In such a case, install them again after removing the extended/optional functions installed in the

GOT.

6 - 5 6 - 5


MELSOFT

2: Install the "Other" extended function OSs when using the following functions.

• Report function • Operation panel function • Printer function

• Barcode function • Video display function • RGB display

• External I/O function • When object function is used to create CSV format files

For this extended function OS, refer to the following 1) and 2) and select the OS that meets the language to be output to the printer or CSV file and the optional device used.

1) Language to be output to the printer connected to the GOT or the CSV file (alarm history display function, recipe function)

ESC printer : Output in Japanese

PCL printer : Output in English

Chinese (Big 5) printer : Output in Chinese (traditional language)

Chinese (GB) printer : Output in Chinese (simplified language)

2) Used optional device

External key input

Proximity I/O

Video/RGB input

: Operation panel, ten-key panel (operation panel function)

: External I/O device (external I/O function)

: Video camera (video display function), personal computer

(RGB display function)

(4) ROM_BIOS (Reinstalled as required)

ROM_BIOS is a system program designed to control the GOT hardware and to make communication between the personal computer and GOT.

ROM_BIOS is installed the GOT before it is shipped from the factory, but when specific functions are used, ROM_BIOS of the compatible version or later must be reinstalled in the GOT.

Before starting reinstallation, always check the precautions in Section 6.5.2.

6 - 6 6 - 6


MELSOFT

6.5.2 Required knowledge before installation of system program

(1) Operations required to use new functions supported by the new version of the GT Designer

1) When using the following function, check that the version of ROM_BIOS installed in the GOT is compatible with the function used.

Function Name

Applicable version of ROM_BIOS

For A985 / 97 / 960GOT For A95 GOT

When using the flash PC card 1

QnA ladder monitor function, Q ladder monitor function

When using the A9GT-

FNB8M/

A9GT-QFNB8M

Maximum number of base screens set (when using 1025 to 4096 screens)

Ethernet connection function

Gateway function

Version F or later

Version H or later

Version J or later

Version P or later

Version S or later

Not allowed for use

Not allowed for use

Not allowed for use

Version Q or later

1: If either of the following status has occurred during use of the flash PC card, perform the scan disk of the flash PC card on the personal computer used.

•

PC card-related error code (334, 351, 352, 353, 354, and 355) was detected by the alarm list (System Alarm) function.

•

The "Data transfer error" message was displayed when you executed the screen copy of the utility functions.

2: The corresponding ROM_BIOS is factory-installed in the GOT unit.

POINT

•

How to check the ROM_BIOS version installed in the GOT

Use the memory information function of the GOT.

MEMORY INFORMATION

[ S/W Version ]

ROM BIOS Ver.2.0.0 [C]

SYSTEM Ver.2.0.0

COMM. DRIVER Ver.2.0.0

PLC MONITOR Ver.2.0.0

ESC PRINT.B-CODE Not Installed

LADDER (A) Ver.2.0.0

SP. UNIT MON Ver.2.0.0

(SP,RECIPE,WAVE)

SP. UNIT DATA Not Installed

NET WORK MON Ver.2.0.0

ROM_BIOS

Version

2) If ROM_BIOS of the GOT is not compatible, reinstall ROM_BIOS of the GT

Designer in the GOT.

POINT

•

How to check the ROM_BIOS version of the GT Designer

Select the [Communication] - [Install] - [ROM_BIOS] menu, and check the version of ROM_BIOS in the [ROM_BIOS Install] dialog box.

3) Install the OS in the GOT.

6 - 7 6 - 7


MELSOFT

(2) Precautions for installing the system program

• Before installing the system program to the GOT under use, be sure to make a backup of the screen data stored in the GOT. (Backup data is not required if the screen data is stored in FD or HD.)

If the system program is installed, the screen data stored in the memory of the

GOT will be deleted.

Back-up operation can be carried out by using the upload function.

• Check that the communication cable connectors are firmly attached to the connection ports on the GOT and the personal computer.

• Set up communication of the personal computer (RS-232C port, communication speed).

Select the [Project]-[Option] menu and set up communication.

• Do not input other data to the PC card to which the ROM_BIOS is to be installed.

When the ROM_BIOS is installed from the PC card to the GOT, other data will be deleted.

• Before installing the system program, be sure to remove the communication unit/communication board/option unit from the GOT.

If the GOT has the built-in communication interface, disconnect the communication cable.

(3) Precautions while the system program is installed

• Do not turn OFF the GOT or the personal computer.

Do not disconnect the communication cable.

If the GOT or the personal computer is turned OFF or if the communication cable is disconnected during installation, the GOT may stop operating.

• Once installation of the ROM_BIOS is started, it cannot be canceled.

If canceled, the GOT may stop operating.

• Once installation of the OS is started, it can be canceled, but re-installation is required.

If the GOT or the personal computer is turned OFF or if the communication cable is disconnected to cancel installation, the GOT may stop operating.

POINT

If the GOT does not run due to any of the above-indicated operations, reinstall the system program in the following procedure.

1) Switch off the GOT unit.

2) Remove the communication board/communication unit/option unit loaded to the GOT.


3) Hold down the following two places of the GOT display section at the same time and switch on the GOT.

4) The "Reinstall the ROM_BIOS/OS" message appears on the GOT display section.

5) Follow the instructions on the GOT display section to complete the installation operation.

6 - 8 6 - 8


MELSOFT

6.5.3 Installation of ROM_BIOS

The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for installation of the

ROM_BIOS.


Start

Select the [Communication]-[Install]-[ROM_BIOS] menu

The ROM_BIOS installation dialog box is displayed

Select the source path name and the destination (GOT/PC card) g ’£â ƒ “ ‚ð ƒ

End

POINT

The ROM_BIOS is installed as follows according to the destination (GOT/PC card).

• If installed to GOT

The ROM_BIOS is installed to the built-in memory of the GOT via RS-232C.

• If installed to PC card

The ROM_BIOS is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot.

Mount the PC card which contains the ROM_BIOS to the GOT, and install the

ROM_BIOS to the built-in memory of the GOT by the following procedure.

1) Mount the PC card to the GOT.

2) Turn OFF the GOT.

3) Remove the communication board/communication unit/option unit from the

GOT.


4) Turn ON the PC card access switch.

5) Turn ON the GOT while pressing the following two areas on the GOT display simultaneously.

6) The message to indicate that ROM_BIOS is being installed appears on the

GOT display, and installation is carried out.

7) Complete installation according to the instruction on the GOT display.

6 - 9 6 - 9


MELSOFT

6.5.4 Installation of OS

The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for OS installation.


Start

Select the [Communication]-[Install]-[OS] menu

The OS installation dialog box is displayed g ’£â ƒ “ ‚ð ƒ g ’£â ƒ ^ ƒ g ’£â ƒ ^ ƒ

Click the Install button

End

POINT

The OS is installed as follows according to the destination (GOT/PC card).

• If installed to GOT

The OS is installed to the built-in memory of the GOT via RS-232C.

• If installed to PC card

The OS is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot of the personal computer.

Mount the PC card which contains the OS to the GOT, and install the OS to the built-in memory of the GOT by the following procedure.

1) Mount the PC card to the GOT.

2) Turn OFF the GOT.

3) Remove the communication board/communication unit/option unit from the

GOT.


4) Turn ON the PC card access switch.

5) Turn ON the GOT while pressing the following two areas on the GOT display simultaneously.

6) The message to indicate that OS is being installed appears on the GOT display, and installation is carried out.

6 - 10 6 - 10


MELSOFT

6.6 Download of Screen Data


The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for downloading the screen data.


Start

Select the [Communication]-[Download (to GOT)]-[Monitor Data] menu

The download dialog box for the monitor data is displayed

Select the destination (GOT/PC card)

Select whether to download all data or part of data

(If part of data is selected, designate the screen number to

download)

Click the Download button

End

POINT

• For screen data downloading (reading) operation performed when GT SoftGOT is used, refer to the GT SoftGOT Version 5 Operating Manual.

• The screen data is downloaded as follows according to the destination

(GOT/PC card).

(When using the GOT-F900 series, you cannot select the PC card.)

If downloaded to GOT

The screen data is downloaded to the built-in memory of the GOT via RS-232C.

If downloaded to PC card

The screen data is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot of the personal computer.

Mount the PC card which contains the screen data to the GOT, and select the screen copy function from the utility screen of the GOT to copy the screen data to the built-in memory of the GOT.

For details of the screen copy function, refer to the GOT-A900 series operating manual (extended • option functions manual).

6 - 11 6 - 11


MELSOFT

6.7 Debugging of Screen Data


POINT

When using GT SoftGOT, you cannot use GT Debugger.

The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for debugging the screen data downloaded to the GOT between the personal computer and the GOT.

For further details, refer to the help window of the GT Debugger.

Start

Activate the GT Debugger

Read the screen data downloaded to the GOT by either of the following operations

•

Select the [File]-[Open] menu

•

Click the button

Start communication between the GOT and the personal computer by either of the following operations

•

Select the [Communication]-[Start] menu

•

Click the button.

Debug each screen

Save the device values designated by the debugging operation

(By reading this file next time, device values set previously can be used for debugging)

End

6 - 12 6 - 12

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7

CHAPTER7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

7.1 Overview

This chapter explains the script functions which can be used with the GOT-A900 series.

The script functions are designed to control the GOT display with the GOT's original programs (hereafter abbreviated to "scripts").

Controlling the GOT display with the GOT side script reduces the load sharply on the system side (e.g. PLC CPU, microcomputer) display.

7.1.1 Features

(1) Ease of system maintenance

Using the script functions, the system side needs only machine control programs, facilitating system maintenance.

(2) A variety of screen controls exercised by GOT alone

Using the script functions enable the following operations which could not be achieved by the GOT alone.

(a) Cooperation with various object functions

• A single lamp represents multiple bit device states.

• A specific part is displayed if any of multiple bit devices is on, and is erased if they are all off.

• As soon as a numeric value is input, a part denoting "Already input" is pasted to the place adjacent to the input value indication frame.

• A single touch switch is used to perform multiple operations corresponding to multiple states.

• As soon as the alarm list (system alarm) function detects an error, the troubleshooting screen appears automatically.

(b) Complicated arithmetic processing

• A polynomial operation which was difficult to be represented in a ladder program is represented simply on a single line.

Ladder program Script

D5=(D1-D2)/100+(D3-D4)/100

• Not only four fundamental operations but also various application arithmetic functions, such as trigonometric and exponential functions, can be used optionally.

(c) Unlimited application fields

• The corresponding year, month and day are found by the entry of year, month and day and the entry of the number of days.

When will it be 345 days after May 20, 2000? April 30, 2001

• The day of the week is found by the entry of year, month and day.

What day of the week is February 21, 1961? Tuesday

7 - 1 7 - 1

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(3) Easy-to-understand programming language

As a script is a language type program like the C language, all you need is entrylevel programming knowledge to create programs.

(4) Programming editors available on the market

You can use the familiar text editors (e.g. Microsoft

R

Windows

R

-standard memo pad, Wordpad) for programming to improve program productivity.

(5) Execution condition selectable on script basis

Any of various conditions (any time, periodic, bit OFF to ON/ON to OFF, during bit ON/OFF, periodic during bit ON/OFF) may be chosen as a trigger to execute each script, enabling script execution scheduling.

(6) Fully useful debugging functions

Since a script is like the C language, the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g. Microsoft

R

Visual C++) can be used for simulation by making slight corrections. This is effective for debugging a complicated script which uses many control statements.

The system monitor function is useful for hardware debugging using the GOT.

You can use the test and device monitor functions to check conditional branching in a script. By monitoring the GOT special registers (GS), you can easily check error information and a script in execution.

(7) Grammar check on created scripts

Before executing created scripts on the GOT, you can make a grammar check on

GT Designer, increasing programming efficiency.

(8) Digital's script language convertible

You can convert the script language (D script/global D script) created on Digital package "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows 95 (Ver. 3.0)" and operate it on the GOT.

7

POINT

• Make "execution condition setting" and "grammar check" on GT Designer at the time of monitor screen creation. Refer to GT Designer help for details.

• Digital's script language is converted on GT Converter.

Refer to the GT Converter help for convertible data and converting method details.

7 - 2 7 - 2

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7.1.2 Operating instructions

You should know the following instructions to use the script functions.

(1) Usable range of the script functions

Since these functions are designed to control the GOT display, do not use them to exercise machine control which demands severe timings.

For data changes to be made from the GOT to the PLC, configure up an interlock circuit in a sequence program to ensure that the whole system will operate safely.

(2) Stopping the script processing

In any of the following cases, the corresponding script processing is stopped, resulting in an error.

• A numerator is divided by a denominator of 0

• A monitor device value cannot be handled as BCD when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit

BCD" was selected as a script data format.

Example) [D0]=[D1]: Present value of D1 is "0x991A"

• An operation result is outside the BCD range when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit

BCD" was selected as a script data format.

Example) 16-bit: Other than 0 to 9999

32-bit: Other than 0 to 99999999

• As the write destination device of the while statement, a temporary work (TMP) was not used but the PLC CPU device or GOT internal device (GD) was used.

POINT

• Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the usable data ranges.

• Refer to Section 7.2.2 for details of the while statement.

• Refer to Section 7.5 for the actions to be taken when script processing has stopped.

(3) Differences in processing result between data formats

Note that any of the following cases will produce an unintended processing result.

• When the script data format selected is other than "16-bit BCD" and "32-bit

BCD", the constant described is outside the range of the selected data format.

• When the script data format selected is "16-bit unsigned BIN" or "32-bit unsigned BIN", the constant described is negative.

• When the script data format selected is other than "real number", the constant described is with a decimal point.

POINT

Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the data formats.

(4) Instructions for monitor device description

Some PLC CPU devices to be monitored require their device numbers to be described in the specific number of digits.

Note that a malfunction may occur if they are not described in the specific number of digits.

POINT

Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the describing method.

7 - 3 7 - 3

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(5) Instructions for substitution delay

The script function writes the operation result to the PLC CPU at an end of one script.

Hence, performing substitution processing as in "Example 1" causes a write delay.

Describe a script as in "Example 2" and "Example 3" to minimize the frequencies of communications with the PLC CPU and avoid influence on monitor processing.

Example 1) Substitution processing using PLC CPU devices

[w:D1]=[w:D0];

[w:D2]=[w:D1];

//substitutes D0 into D1.

//substitutes D1 into D2.

D0 100

D1 200

D2

300

100

100

200

Script start Script end

In this script, the D0 value is not reflected on D2 immediately, causing a write delay. This status persists until this script is processed.

Note that using the GOT internal devices (GD, GB) as the substitution devices will give the same result.

Example 2) Substitution processing using temporary works

[w:TMP0001]=[w:D0];

[w:D1]=[w:TMP0001];

[w:D2]=[w:TMP0001];

//substitutes D0 into TMP0001.

//substitutes TMP0001 into D1.


D0 100

D1 200

D2 300

100

100

100

Script start Script end

Using the temporary works designed for script functions prevents a write delay.

POINT

Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the temporary works.

7 - 4 7 - 4

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Example 3) Substitution processing using GOT internal devices (GD, GB)

[w:GD1]=[w:D0];

[w:D1]=[w:GD1];

[w:D2]=[w:GD2];

//substitutes D0 into GD1

//substitutes GD1 into D1.

//substitutes GD1 into D2.

As the processing timing using GOT internal devices (GD, GB) is the same as that using temporary works, a write delay can be prevented.

When using the GOT internal devices to prevent a substitution delay, perform GOT internal device substitution delay cancel in the script setting of GT Designer.

POINT

• Refer to the help of GT Designer for details of the script setting using GT

Designer.

• When GOT internal device (GD, GB) substitution delay cancel is performed, a link scan is made on each line having the GOT internal device (GD, GB). Note that the monitor processing of the GOT may delay when GD internal devices (GD,

GB) are used in many places.

(6) Precautions for converting Digital's script language

The LS devices described in Digital's script language are designed to be free from a substitution delay.

Hence, when Digital's script language using LS devices as shown in "Example 1" in (5) is converted, different operation may be performed on the GOT.

As shown in "Example 2" in (5), use temporary works in Digital's script language using LS devices to prevent a substitution delay.

7 - 5 7 - 5

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7.2 Specifications

This section describes the specifications of the script functions.

7.2.1 Types

There are the following types of script functions.

(1) Project script function

This type of script operates for the whole project created on GT Designer.

The project script function can always be performed during online processing of the GOT.

A script is executed when its preset execution condition is enabled.

Up to 256 scripts can be set to one project.

POINT

• Operating for the whole project, a project script is useful for the following case:

Example) As soon as the alarm list (system alarm) function detects an error, the troubleshooting screen appears automatically.

• The project script monitor devices are always operating.

Therefore, note that a larger number of monitor points will make the monitor screen slower in response.

(2) Screen script function

This type of script operates for each screen created on GT Designer.

The screen script function may be performed only while the corresponding screen appears during online processing of the GOT.

A script is executed when its preset execution condition is enabled.

These scripts may be set on base screens/window screens (super impose window, overlap window 1, overlap window 2).

Screens called by the screen calling function will also be the target of script processing.

However, screens shown by the part display function will not be the target of script processing.

Up to 256 scripts can be set to one screen (including the screen called by the screen calling function).

POINT

• Refer to Section 4.1 for details of each screen.

• Refer to Section 5.10.1 for details of the screen calling function.

• Refer to Section 5.4.1 for details of the part display function.

• The project script monitor devices are always operating. Hence, a larger number of monitor points will make the monitor screen slower in response.

• Note that a larger number of screen script monitor device points will make the monitor screen slower in response.

7 - 6 7 - 6

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7.2.2 Control structure

Item

Control statement

; if while switch case default brake return

This section describes the control structure of the script functions.

The following commands (control statements, operators, functions, etc.) are used to program scripts.

Nesting is allowed in if, while and switch statements.

A return statement is used to end a script.

Command if to else

Description

[Statement example] if(conditional expression){set of expressions}

[Function] Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression),

[Point] and if its result is true (other than 0), executes the {set of expressions}.

An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to perform specific processing for a given value or to change a program sequence.

[Statement example] if(conditional expression){set of expressions 1}else{set of expressions 2}

[Function] Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression), and if its result is true (other than 0), executes the {set of expressions 1}, or if false (0), executes the {set of expressions 2}.

[Point] An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to perform specific processing for a given value or to change a program sequence.

[Statement example] while(continuous conditional expression){set of expressions}

[Function] Evaluates the (continuous conditional expression), and if its result is true

(other than 0), repeats executing the {set of expressions}.

If the "continuous conditional expression" is false (0), execution exits

[Point] from the while statement.

• A while statement is used to perform given processing for up to a

specific purpose.

(For example, waiting for touch key input)

Making the continuous conditional expression always true (other than 0)

results in an endless loop.

• A temporary work must be used as the write destination device.

[Statement example] switch(term)

{ case constant:set of expressions;break; case constant:set of expressions;break;

[Function]

} default:set of expressions;

Creates a control statement using four reserved words of switch, case, break and default.

[Point]

In either of the following cases, executes the "sets of expressions" following the case and default statements.

• The (term) value matches the "constant"

• It does not match the case statement and there is a default statement

In either of the following cases, execution exits from { } of switch.

• There is a break statement within a script

• There are no case statements having the "constants" corresponding

to the (term) and no default statement.

Note that there may be no break and default statements in the control statement.

The switch statement is used when a given variable value requires different processings to be performed.

[Statement example] return;

[Function] Ends a script.

[Point] A single script can have multiple returns.

[Statement example] ;

[Function] Represents the end of a single statement. This symbol is necessary at the end of a single statement.

7 - 7 7 - 7

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Item

Operator

Logical

Command

Relational

Arithmetic

Bit device

Substitution

&&

!

||

<

<=

>

>=

!=

==

+

/

%

&

|

~

^

<<

>>

=

Description

[Statement example] if ((relational operation expression)&&(relational operation expression)){.....}

[Function] 1 if two (relational operation expressions) are both true, or 0 if either is false.

(Logical AND operator)

[Statement example] if ((relational operation expression)||(relational operation expression)){.....}

[Function] 1 if either of relational operation expressions is true, or 0 if both are false.

(Logical OR operator)

[Statement example] if (!(relational operation expression)){.....}

[Function] 1 if the relational operation expression is 0, or 0 otherwise.

(Logical NOT operator)

[Statement example] <Term 1> < <term 2>

[Function] <Term 1> is less than <term 2>. (Left inequality operator)

[Statement example] <Term 1> <= <term 2>

[Function] <Term 1> is less than or equal to <term 2>.

(Equivalence left inequality operator)

[Statement example] <Term 1> > <term 2>

[Function] <Term 1> is greater than <term 2>. (Right inequality operator)

[Statement example] <Term 1> >= <term 2>

[Function] <Term 1> is greater than or equal to <term 2>.

(Equivalence right inequality operator)

[Statement example] <Term 1> != <term 2>

[Function] <Term 1> is not equal to <term 2>. (Non-equivalence operator)

[Statement example] <Term 1> == <term 2>

[Function] <Term 1> is equal to <term 2>. (Equivalence operator)

[Statement example] <Term> + <factor>

[Function] Adds <factor> to <term>. (Addition operator)

[Statement example] <Term> <factor>

[Function] Subtracts <factor> from <term>. (Subtraction operator)

[Statement example] <Term> <factor>

[Function] Multiplies <term> by <factor>. (Multiplication operator)

[Statement example] <Term> / <factor>

[Function] Divides <term> by <factor>. (Division operator)

[Point] If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.

[Statement example] <Term> % <factor>

[Function] Finds a remainder derived from division of <term> by <factor>.

[Point]

(Remainder operator)

If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.

[Statement example] <Term> & <factor>

[Function] Finds the logical product (AND) of <term> and <factor>.

(Bit product operator)

[Statement example] <Term> | <factor>

[Function] Finds the logical add (OR) of <term> and <factor>. (Bit addition operator)

[Statement example] ~ <bit>

[Function] Negates (inverts) <bit>. (Complement operator)

[Statement example] <Term> ^ <factor>

[Function] Finds the exclusive logical add (XOR) of <term> and <factor>.

(Bit difference operator)

[Statement example] <Term> << <factor>

[Function] Shifts <term> to the left by <factor>. (Left shift operator)

[Statement example] <Term> >> <factor>

[Function] Shifts <term> to the right by <factor>. (Right shift operator)

[Statement example] <Device> = <term>

[Function] Stores <term> into <device>. (Substitution operator)

7 - 8 7 - 8

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Item

Operator

Function

Others

Device device

Command operation

Continuous operation

Application arithmetic operation

Constant

Device and temporary work

Comment set rst alt bmov fmov sin cos tan asin acos atan abs log log10 exp

1dexp sqrt

//

Description

[Statement example] set(<bit device>)

[Function] SETs <bit device>.

[Statement example] rst(<bit device>)

[Function] RSTs <bit device>.

[Statement example] alt(<bit device>)

[Function] Inverts <bit device>.

[Statement example] bmov(<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)

[Function] Batch-transfers the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from <word device 1>, to the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting from <word device 2>.

[Statement example] fmov(<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)

[Function] Transfers <word device 1> to the number of devices specified at

<integer>, starting from <word device 2>.

[Statement example] sin(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the sine of the specified <word device or constant>. (Sine)

[Statement example] cos(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the cosine of the specified <word device or constant>.

(Cosine)

[Statement example] tan(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the tangent of the specified <word device or constant>.

(Tangent)

[Statement example] asin(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the arcsine of <word device or constant>. (Arcsine)

[Statement example] acos(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the arccosine of <word device or constant>. (Arccosine)

[Statement example] atan(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the arctangent of <word device or constant>. (Arctangent)

[Statement example] abs(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the absolute value of <word device or constant>.

(Absolute value)

[Statement example] log(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the logarithm of <word device or constant>. (Logarithm)

[Statement example] log10(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the logarithm (common logarithm) of base 10 <word device or constant>. (Common logarithm)

[Statement example] exp(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the power of base e <word device or constant>. (Exponent)

[Statement example] 1dexp(<word device 1 or constant 1>, <word device 2 or constant 2>)

[Function] Calculates the <word device 2 or constant 2> power of <word device 1 or constant 1> 2. (Exponential product)

[Statement example] sqrt(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the square root of <word device or constant>. (Square root)

[Statement example] Constant

[Function] Represents a constant (decimal/hexadecimal/BCD/real number).

Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of constants.

[Statement example] [Device type:device number]

[Function] Represents a PLC CPU device, GOT internal device or temporary work.

Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the devices and temporary works.

[Statement example] //(comment)

[Function] A comment for a script can be described in (comment).

7 - 9 7 - 9

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7.2.3 Usable data and representation methods

(1) Script data formats

You can choose any of the following seven different data formats for the script functions.

Note that the data format selected is fixed on a script basis.

• 16-bit, signed BIN

• 16-bit, unsigned BIN

• 32-bit, signed BIN

• 32-bit, unsigned BIN

• 16-bit BCD

• 32-bit BCD

• 32-bit real number

POINT

Select the data format on GT Designer at the time of monitor screen creation.

For selective operation details, refer to the GT Designer help.

(2) Usable constants and representation methods

The following four different constants are usable with the script functions.

Constant

Decimal number

Hexadecimal number

Real number

BCD

Representation Method

124

0xFF12, 0x14AC67F1

32.124, 3.2124e + 10

344

Note that the data format of each script determines the usable constants and data ranges as listed below.

Data Format

16-bit, signed BIN

16-bit, unsigned BIN

32-bit, signed BIN


16-bit BCD

32-bit BCD

32-bit real number

Usable Constant

Decimal number

Hexadecimal number

Decimal number

Hexadecimal number

Decimal number

Hexadecimal number

Decimal number

Hexadecimal number

BCD

Hexadecimal number

BCD

Hexadecimal number

Real number

Hexadecimal number

Usable Data Range

-32768 to 32767

0 to 7FFF

0 to 65535

0 to FFFF

-2147483648 to 2147483647

0 to 7FFFFFFF

0 to 4294967295

0 to FFFFFFFF

0 to 9999

0 to 270F

0 to 99999999

0 to 5F5E0FF

0 to FFFFFFFF

7 - 10 7 - 10

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(3) Usable devices and representation methods

The devices available for the script functions are the same as those of the other monitor functions.

The device types and whether the station number is specified or not change how devices will be represented as indicated below.

PLC CPU Used

OMRON PLC

Device Name

..

LR, AR, HR, WR

B

Allen-Bradley PLC

N, TP, TA, CP, CA

TT, TN, CU, CD,

CN

SIEMENS PLC D

Device Type

Word device

Bit device

Specified bit of word device

Specified word of bit device

Station number-specified device 1

Statement Example

[w:device number 2]

[b:device number 2]

[b:device number 2. bit position]

[w:device number 2]

[Network number-station number:w:device number 2]

Representation Example

[w:D100]

[b:X100]

[b:D100.01]

[w:X100]

[0-FF:w:D100]

1: When the QCPU, QnACPU or ACPU is used, omitting the network number and station number monitors the devices of the own station (0-FF).

2: Depending on the PLC CPU device monitored, the device number must be described in the number of digits as indicated below.

Number of Digits Described (Digits)

Word specified Bit specified

2

2

6

6

7

6

9

Representation

Example

[b:..2303]

Remarks

[b:HR207]

[w:B000003]

[b:MB02343]

[w:N007255]

[b:TT004255]

[w:D000100000]

Because of the channel + relay format, the relay part is described in

2 digits.

The file number is described in 3 digits, the element number in 3 digits, and the bit position in 1 digit.

The file number is described in 3 digits, and the element number in 3 digits.

The data block (DB) is described in

4 digits, and the data word (DW) in

5 digits.

POINT

Devices that may be monitored on the GOT depend on the monitor destination PLC

CPU. Refer to Section 4.8 for details.

7 - 11 7 - 11

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(4) Usable temporary works and representation methods

Up to 1024 points of temporary works may be used with global variables (double word type) without initial values.

The temporary work representation changes with the specified device type as indicated below.

Device Type

Word device

Bit device

Statement Example

[w: temporary work number]

[b: temporary work number. bit position]

Representation Example

[w:TMP0001]

[b:TMP1023.01]

Temporary works are used in the following cases.

Example 1) Prevention of a write delay in substitution processing performed for the PLC CPU (refer to Section 7.1.2)

Example 2) Write destination device of while statement (refer to Section 7.2.2)

Example 3) Variable for operation

When substituting a D0 + 1 value into D1 and substituting a D1 + 1 value into D2

[w:TMP0001]=[w:D0]+1;

[w:D1]=[w:TMP0001];

[w:D2]=[w:TMP0001]+1;

//substitutes D0+1 into TMP0001.


//substitutes TMP0001+1 into D2.

POINT

The temporary work is a 32-bit global variable.

Note that a correct value may not be read in either of the following cases.

• A value is read is read in the script whose data format is different from that of the script used to write the value to the temporary work.

(Example) Script A (data format: 16-bit unsigned)

[w:TMP0000] = 0x1234;

Script B (data format: 32-bit unsigned)

[w:GD0000] = [w:TMP0000]

• A value is read is read in the script whose representation (word device/bit device) is different from that of the script used to write the value to the temporary work.

(Example) Script C (data format: 16-bit unsigned)

[w:TMP0000] = 0x3; if( [b:TMP0000.b0] == ON {• • •

When writing and reading a value to and from one temporary work, use the same data format and representation.

7 - 12 7 - 12

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(5) How to represent bit devices (system define)

Bit devices can be represented as indicated below.

(a) When performing relational operation of bit device

A device value, which is normally represented "1" or "0", may also be represented "ON" or "OFF".

if([b:X100]==1){[w:D0]=100;}

//if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.

if([b:X100]==ON){[w:D0]=100;}

//if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.

(b) When performing substitution processing of bit device

A bit device, which is normally represented with a set or rst statement or by substituting "1" or "0", may also be represented by substituting "ON" or

"OFF".

set([b:X100]); //X100 turns ON.

[b:X100]=1;

//X100 turns ON.

[b:X100]=ON;

//X100 turns ON.

(6) How to replace devices and constants (user define)

A device or constant used in a script can be replaced by any character string.

Make user define setting in the script symbol setting of GT Designer.

For details of the setting method, refer to the GT Designer help.

Example: When replacing "X100" with "LS1-ERROR" on GT Designer if(LS1-ERROR==1){[w:D0]=100}; //if X100(LS1-ERROR) is ON, D0 is 100.

7 - 13 7 - 13

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7.2.4 Script execution

This section explains how to execute the script functions.

(1) Execution conditions

The script function execute a script whose execution condition is enabled and writes the result to the PLC CPU.

There are the following execution conditions.

• Any time

• Bit OFF to ON/ON to OFF

• During bit ON/OFF

• Periodic during bit ON/OFF

• Periodic (1s increments)

POINT

Set the execution condition on GT Designer at the time of monitor screen creation.

For details of setting, refer to the GT Designer Help.

(2) Execution unit

The script function executes scripts one by one.

If the execution conditions of multiple scripts are enabled, they are not processed concurrently.

7 - 14 7 - 14

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Function Type Order

Project script function

(3) Execution sequence

The script functions are executed in the following order.

Setting Screen Order

Screen Calling Function

Layer Order

Execution Order Set on GT

Designer

Max.

Execution

Count

Script A

Script B 256

Execution

Sequence

1)

Base

Script A

Script B

2)

First called screen

Script A

Script B

Base 256

16th called screen

Superimpose window

First called screen

Script A

Script B

Script A

Script B

Script A

Script B

3)

Superimpose window 256

Screen script function

Overlap window 1

16th called screen

Overlap window 1

First called screen

Script A

Script B

Script A

Script B

Script A

Script B

256

4)

16th called screen

Overlap window 2

First called screen

Script A

Script B

Script A

Script B

Script A

Script B

5)

Overlap window 2 256

16th called screen

Script A

Script B

POINT

Refer to Section 5.10.1 for details of the screen calling function.

7 - 15 7 - 15

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(4) Execution status

The script function performs any of the following processings according to the script status.

Script Status

Waiting for turn

Waiting for execution

Execution

Stop

Processing

• A script waits its processing turn in accordance with the execution sequence.

• When its turn has come, the script "waits for execution".

• Processing changes depending on whether the execution condition is enabled or disabled.

Enabled: The corresponding script is "executed".

Disabled: The corresponding script "waits its turn" and the next script "waits for execution".

• When the script ends, the processing result is written to the PLC

CPU and the corresponding script "waits its turn".

Also, the next script "waits for execution".

• If an error occurs, the corresponding script "stops" and the next script "waits for execution".

• When a screen change takes place during use of the screen script function, the scripts set on the corresponding screen are all

"executed" and the next script then "waits for execution".

• The script is kept "stopped" until error history clear is performed.

7 - 16 7 - 16

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7.3 Settings and Procedure for Execution

This section provides the settings and procedure for executing the script functions.

Start

Create/edit scripts on the text editor commercially available.

.........

Refer to Section 7.4.

When many control statements were used to create a complicated script, perform operation simulation as required with a general C complier.

.........


Read the created scripts to project data on GT Designer and set the data format, trigger type, etc.

.........

Refer to GT Designer Help.

Make grammar check on the read scripts on GT Designer.

.........

Refer to GT Designer Help.

No

Grammatical?

Yes

Download the project data from the personal computer to the

GOT on GT Designer.

.........

Refer to Section 6.6.

Start monitoring and check the script operating status using the system monitor function.

.........


No

Is operation normal?

End

Yes

POINT

The grammar check function diagnoses whether the created scripts are grammatical or not. If a grammatical mistake is found, the corresponding script number, line number and error definition appear. Correct the script.

7 - 17 7 - 17

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7.4 Program Examples

This section explains script program examples.

7.4.1 Touch keys with interlock function

(1) Operation

When the

Ready

and

Run/Stop

keys turn ON, the

Running

lamp is lit.

The system operation is controlled synchronously with the

Running

lamp.

Screen Image Part Operation Definition

Running

lamp

Ready key

Run/Stop

key

: Indicates the operating status of the

system.

: Acts as an interlock for the

Run/Stop

key.

: Used to change the operating status

(run/stop) of the system.

Part Name

Ready key

Run/Stop

key

Running

lamp

Item

Data format

Trigger type

Script

(2) Monitor screen settings

Object Type

Touch key function (bit)


Lamp indication function (bit)

Setting Item

Monitor device

Operation setting

Monitor device

Operation setting

Monitor device

Setting

M0001

Bit ALT

M0002

Bit ALT

M0003

(System operation controlling device)

(3) Program example

{ if ([b:M0001]&[b:M0002]==1)

} set([b:M0003]);

} else{

rst([b:M0003]);

Description

16-bit, signed BIN

Any time

//if the ready and run/stop keys both turn ON

//the running lamp is lit and the system starts operating.

//if not

//the running lamp is extinguished and the system is stopped.

7 - 18 7 - 18

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7.4.2 Lamps which change their indications under multiple conditions

(1) Operation

The operation of each line is controlled with a touch key and the control states of three lines are represented by one lamp.


Control status

Line 1

key

Line 2

key

Line 3

key

Stop all lines

lamp : The lamp color and comment are changed

according to the operating states of the

lines.

: Used to control the operation of line 1.

key



: Used to stop all lines.

Part Name

Control status

lamp

Lamp indication function (word)

Line 1

key

Line 2

key

Line 3

key

Stop all lines

key


Object Type





Setting Item

Monitor device

Indication method (word)

Monitor device

Operation setting

Monitor device

Operation setting

Monitor device

Operation setting

Monitor device

Operation setting

Setting

D10

Indication range: $V==0 Lamp color: 182

Characters : All lines stop


Characters : Line 1 running






Characters : Lines 1, 2 running






Characters : Lines 1, 2, 3 running

X1

Bit ALT

X2

Bit ALT

X3

Bit ALT

X0

Bit SET

7 - 19 7 - 19

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Item

Data format

Trigger type

Script

(3) Program example

Description

16-bit, signed BIN

Any time if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))

{[w:D10]=0;} //stores 0 into D10 if lines 1, 2 and 3 are all OFF.

if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))

{[w:D10]=1;} //stores 1 into D10 if line 1 is ON and lines 2 and 3 are OFF.

if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF))


if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON))


if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF))

{[w:D10]=4;} if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON))

{[w:D10]=5;} if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON))

{[w:D10]=6;} if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON))

{[w:D10]=7;}

{ if ([b:X0]==ON)

rst([b:X1]);

rst([b:X2]);

}

rst([b:X3]);

rst([b:X0]);

//stores 4 into D10 if lines 1 and 2 are ON and line 3 is OFF.



//stores 7 into D10 if lines 1, 2 and 3 are ON.

//if all lines stop turns ON

//turns OFF line 1.

//turns OFF line 2.

//turns OFF line 3.

//turns OFF all lines stop.

7 - 20 7 - 20

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7.4.3 Password input screen with time limit function

(1) Operation

The password input screen returns to the previous screen if a correct password is not entered within 10 seconds after it appeared.


Screen change Returns in 10 seconds

Manager

button

Password

input

1 to 0

keys

Clear

Confirm

key

key

: Used to shift to the password input screen

(base screen 4).

: Password entered with

1 to 0

keys

appears.

: Used to enter a value.

: Used to clear the value entered.

: Used to confirm the value entered.

Password match

Part Name

Manager

button

Password

input

1

key

2

key

3

key

4

key

5

key

6

key

7

key

8

key

9

key

0

key

Clear

key

Confirm

key

Manager screen (base screen 5) appears.


Object Type

Touch key function

Numerical input function

Touch key function

Touch key function

Touch key function

Touch key function

Touch key function

Touch key function

Touch key function

Touch key function

Touch key function

Touch key function

Touch key function

Touch key function

Setting Item

Operation setting

Monitor device

Operation setting

Operation setting

Operation setting

Operation setting

Operation setting

Operation setting

Operation setting

Operation setting

Operation setting

Operation setting

Operation setting

Operation setting

Setting

Switching to base screen 4

D10

Key code [0031

H

]

Key code [0032

H

]

Key code [0033

H

]

Key code [0034

H

]

Key code [0035

H

]

Key code [0036

H

]

Key code [0037

H

]

Key code [0038

H

]

Key code [0039

H

]

Key code [0030

H

]

Key code [0088

H

]

Key code [000D

H

]

7 - 21 7 - 21

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(3) Program example

Item

Data format

Trigger type

Description

16-bit, signed BIN

Any time

} if([b:GS1.01]==ON){

[w:TMP0001]=[w:GS7];

Script if([w:D10]==3238){

[w:D0]=5;

}

[w:D10]=0;

//only when the password input screen has appeared

//substitutes GS7 into TMP0001.

//when the correct password is entered

//switches to the manager screen (base screen 5).

//clears the password.

} if([w:GS7]-[w:TMP0001]>=10){ //if more than 10 seconds have elapsed after the password input screen had appeared

[w:D0]=3; //returns to the screen with manager button (base screen 3).

POINT

This program example uses GOT special registers (GS).

The GOT special registers (GS) store the GOT's internal information, communication states, script error information and others.

A wide variety of operations can be achieved by making proper connections of the

GOT special registers (GS) with the script functions.

Refer to Section 4.5 for details of the GOT special registers (GS).

7 - 22 7 - 22

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7.5 Troubleshooting

The script functions do not provide error indications and so on caused by errors.

They stop the script in error to prevent the other scripts and various monitor functions from stopping.

Hence, refer to the following description and debug each script without fail.

7.5.1 Simulation on general C language compiler or debugger

Since a script is like the C language, slight corrections made to it allows simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g. Microsoft

R

Visual C++).

This function is effective for debugging a complicated script which uses many control statements.

Use the following procedure to perform simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger.

Changing file extension text1. txt text1. c

1) Change the script file (extension ".txt") created for the GOT into a C language source file

(extension ".c").

Additional description


Additional description of main and include

#include<stdio.h> main(){

[w:TMP0001]=0;

while([w:TMP0000]<[w:D100]){

if(!(([w:TMP0000]-1900)%4)){


[w:TMP0001]=[w:TMP0001]+1;

......

(Omitted)

......

[w:TMP0010]=[w:TMP0002]+[w:TMP0003]

}

+[w:TMP0004]-1;

[w:D200] = [w:TMP0010]%7;

2) Open the C language source file on the commercially available text editor and crate a frame with "main(){}". Also, describe

"#include<stdio.h>" at the beginning.

Description change

Description change

Description change

Description change

Description change

Description change

Description change

Changing device (variable) describing method

#include<stdio.h> main(){

wTMP0001 =0;

while( wTMP0000 < wD100 ){

if(!(( wTMP0000 -1900)%4)){

wTMP0001 = wTMP0001 +1;

......

(Omitted)

......

wTMP0010 = wTMP0002 + wTMP0003

+ wTMP0004 -1;

}

wD200 = wTMP0010 %7;

3) Change the device (variable) describing method for script function into that for C language.

When changing the variables for script function into those for C language, changing them in the following definitions enables smooth restoration to the GOT script.

Definition 1 "[w:" "_w"

Definition 2 "[b:" "_b"

Definition 3 "]" "_ _"

Using the batch replacement function of the commercially available text editor will be convenient to make changes.

(To the next page)

7 - 23 7 - 23

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(From the preceding page)

Description change

Variable definition (auto variable declaration)

#include<stdio.h> void main(void){

Addition

Addition

Addition

Addition

unsigned short wTMP0000 ;



unsigned short wD100 ;

......

(Omitted)

wTMP0001 =0;

......

while( wTMP0000 < wD100 ){

if(!(( wTMP0000 -1900)%4)){

wTMP0001 = wTMP0001 +1;

......

(Omitted)

......

wTMP0010 = wTMP0002 + wTMP0003

+ wTMP0004 -1;

}

wD200 = wTMP0010 %7;

4) In the C language, the variables used must be defined beforehand.

As only one data format may be selected for one script in the script function, the variable types of the C language must all be the same.

Being conscious of the script data format, assign the variables as indicated below.

Script Data Format

16-bit, signed BIN


32-bit, signed BIN


32-bit real number

Variable Type short unsigned short long unsigned long float

32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD

: Selecting "32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD" as the script data format disables simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger.

Execution of simulation

5) Perform simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger.

(The example shown on the left uses Microsoft

R

Developer Studio.)

You can utilize the step run, variable watch and other functions available specifically from the debugger.

On completion of debugging, reverse the steps

1) to 4) to restore the GOT script file.

POINT

• Choosing "32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD" as the script data format disables simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger.

• Designed for use with only the script functions, the set, rst, alt, bmov and fmov statements disables simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger.

Use substitution of 1 or 0 instead of the set or rst statement.

• When the system define (ON, OFF description) of the GOT is used unchanged, the description of the define must be added to the C language source file.

• A substitution delay which occurs at the time of script execution on the GOT does not occur during simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger.

Hence, take the occurrence of a substitution delay into consideration when performing simulation.

• By applying the above, a new program created in C language and then debugged may also be used as a GOT script.

7 - 24 7 - 24

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

7.5.2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT

(1) Error checking method

The error information of the script functions is stored into the GOT special registers (GS).

Check the stored information using the system monitor function and various object functions (numerical display, lamp indication and others) of the GOT.

The GOT special registers (GS) have the following types of script function-related items.

Address

GS14

Item Name

Script common information (read only)

Description

Stores the information which indicates error occurrence.

GS14.00: Turns ON at error occurrence.

GS14.07: Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.

GS14.08: Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.

GS14.12: Turns ON at communication error occurrence (including access to outof-range device).

Stores the pointer value (16 to 46) which indicates the address where the script error data (GS16 to 47) is stored. (Default: -1)

Every time error data is stored, the pointer value changes as indicated below.

"-1" "16" "18" "20"

.....

"46" "16"

GS15 Script error pointer

GS16 to 47

GS48

Script error data

Script execution pointer

The pointer value denotes the address of the script error data (GS16 to 47) as indicated below.



Store the script numbers and error codes of the scripts in error in due order, starting from the higher addresses of the storage area.

When an error occurs, a script number and error code are stored on a 2-word basis as a history.

Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the upper addresses are overwritten in order.

Stores the pointer value (49 to 79) which indicates the address where a script execution number (GS49 to 79) is stored. (Default: -1)

Every time an execution number is stored, the pointer value changes as indicated below.

"-1" "49" "50" "51"

.....

"79" "49"

The pointer value denotes the address of the script execution number (GS49 to

79) as indicated below.



GS49 to 79 Script execution number

GS384 Script common information (write only)

Store the script numbers of the scripts executed as a history.

Turning ON GS384.0 clears the script error data (GS16 to 47).

7 - 25 7 - 25

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

Address Item Name

GS385 Script monitor time

GS386 Screen script initial operation

Description

Set the monitor time of one script in seconds.

If a script does not end the preset time after its start, script processing is stopped.

(Error code: 15)

The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.

Setting Example

0 (default)

1

10

11

Monitor Time

10 seconds

1 second

10 seconds

11 seconds

Set whether initial operation will be performed or not when any of the following conditions is enabled.

• The screen script function is used.

• The execution condition (trigger type) selected is "Rise/Fall".

• Switching to the screen having scripts takes place.

Setting Example

0

Other than 0

Trigger Type

Bit OFF to ON

Bit ON to OFF

Bit OFF to ON

Bit ON to OFF

Bit Value of

Trigger

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Initial Operation

Performed

Not performed

POINT

• Refer to Section 4.5 for details of the GOT special registers (GS).

• For details of the system monitor function, refer to the GOT-A900 Series

Operating Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Compatible

Extended • Option Functions).

7 - 26 7 - 26

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MELSOFT

(2) Error code list

Error Code

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Error Definition

Initialization of project script functions failed.

Initialization of screen script functions

(base) failed.


(superimpose window) failed.


(overlap window 1) failed.


(overlap window 2) failed.

Corrective Action

• Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts.

• Reduce the number of project script functions to be executed.

• Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and base screens.

• Reduce the number of screen script functions (base) to be executed.

• Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and superimpose screens.

• Reduce the number of screen script functions (superimpose window) to be executed.

• Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and overlap window screens 1.

• Reduce the number of screen script functions (overlap window 1) to be executed.

• Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and overlap window screens 2.

• Reduce the number of screen script functions (overlap window 2) to be executed.

The operation result is a value outside the usable data range determined by the data format of the script.

The number of scripts executed exceeded the limit. Hence, there were scripts that were not executed.

• Review the processing for the device which was brought outside the data range of the corresponding script, and correct the script.

• Change the number of scripts to be executed in one project to 256 or less.

• Change the number of scripts to be executed on one screen to 256 or less.

When "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" was selected as the script data format, the monitor device value could not be handled as BCD.

• Check whether the device you want to monitor is correct.

• Review the processing for the device which could not be handled as BCD, and correct the script and sequence program.

When "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" was selected as the script data format, the operation result was brought outside the

BCD data range.

• Review the processing for the device which was brought outside the BCD data range.

The numerator was divided by the denominator of 0.

Write to a device failed.

• Review the factor which caused zero division in the corresponding script, and correct the script.

• Review the device description of the corresponding script.

Securing an internal area for device write failed.

• Reduce the number write device points in the corresponding script.

The while statement has the description of a device other than a temporary work.

• Replace the write device in the while statement with a temporary work.

An expression was too complicated to process.

A script did not end within the script monitor time.

• Simplify or divide the operation expression in the corresponding script.

• Check whether the corresponding script has gone into an endless loop.

• Increase the value of script monitor time (GS385).

7 - 27 7 - 27

7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

MEMO

MELSOFT

7 - 28 7 - 28

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

APP

APPENDICES

Appendix1 Operations for Use of the Conventional Model Data

When using the monitor screen data for GOT800 as that for GOT900, the data must be converted using the GT Converter.

This section outlines the operation to be performed to convert the monitor screen data for GOT800.

For details of the GT Converter, refer to the help function of the GT Converter.

POINT

•

By converting the monitor screen data for GOT800 with the GT Converter, it can be used as the monitor screen data for GOT900 without any restrictions.

Also, the data capacity of the data converted into the monitor screen data for GOT900 is about 30% less than that of the monitor screen data for GOT800.

•

When using the GOT data of earlier than the GOT800 as the monitor screen data for GOT900, perform the following operation after converting it into the GOT data for GOT800 series using the drawing software for

GOT800 series 1 contained in GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5.

For the converting operation, refer to the SW3NIW-A8GOTP Drawing Setting Software Package

Operating Manual (Monitor Screen Creation Manual).

1 Install the software by executing "setup.exe"in the "GOT800" folder on the CD-ROM.

START

Start the GT Converter.

Select the monitor screen data for GOT800.

g ’£â ƒ “ ‚ð ƒ

Refer to (2).

Convert it to the monitor screen data for GOT900 and store the new data.

Refer to (3).

Refer to (4).

END

App - 1 App - 1

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

(1) Screen make-up of GT Converter

Menu bar

Tool bar

Main window

(2) Selecting the data to be converted

(a) Perform either of the following operations.

•

Click the icon on the tool bar.

•

Select the [Project] - [Open] menu.

(b) As the [Open] dialog box appears, select the file type.

•

A8GOT file: Screen data for GOT800 series

•

PRO file: "GP-PRO/PBIII (DOS version)" made by Digital

•

PRW file: "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows 95 (Ver 2.0/Ver 2.1)" made by

Digital

: "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows (Ver 3.0)" made by Digital

Select the file type.

POINT

The data of the Digital package that may be converted is only the data created by "GP-PRO/PBIII (DOS version)", "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows 95 (Ver 2.0/Ver 2.1)" and "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows (Ver 3.0)".

(c) Select the data to be converted and click the [Open] button.

1) Select the driver and folder which store

the data to be converted.

APP

2) Select the file name of the data to be

converted.

…

Switches the "Look in" indication to the folder one position above the current one.

…

Lists the "Look in" indication in terms of the folder names and data names only.

…

Lists further details of the "Look in" indication.

App - 2 App - 2

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

(d) The data selected is specified as a conversion source file and appears in the main window.

(3) Converting to the monitor screen data for GOT900

(a) Perform either of the following operations.

•

Click the icon on the tool bar.

•

Select the [Start conversion] menu.

(b) In the main window, specify the folder, which will store new data.

Enter the folder directly into "Save folder", or perform the following operation to specify it.

2) Select the folder.

1) Select the drive.

(c) Clicking the [OK] button converts the selected data to GOT900 series data.

On completion of the conversion operation, the conversion completion message appears.

The new data is stored into the specified folder.

POINTS

When the data of the Digital package is converted, some functions are not converted.

Re-set the unconverted functions using the GT Designer.

Also use the GT Designer for registration to the overlap screen, parts and comments

App - 3 App - 3

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

(4) Starting the GT Designer

Start the GT Designer from the GT Converter.

(a) Select the [Project] - [Option] - [Folder of GT Designer] menu.

(b) The [Setting folder of GT Designer] dialog box appears.

Since the execution file (wgot32.exe) of the GT Designer exists in the following folder, select it and click the [Open] button.

Drive name: \Installation destination folder\GT desig\wgot32.exe

…

Switches the "Look in" indication to the folder one position above the current one.

…

Lists the "Look in" indication in terms of the folder names and data names only.

…

Lists further details of the "Look in" indication.

(c) Perform either of the following operations.

•

Click the on the tool bar.

•

Select the [Project] - [Execute GT Designer] menu.

(d) The [Execute GT Designer] confirmation dialog box appears.

Click the [Yes] or [No] button.

[Yes] button

…

Ends the GT Converter and starts the GT Designer.

[No] button

…

Ends the GT Converter.

(The GT Designer does not start.)

App - 4 App - 4

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

Appendix2 Display Speed of Object (Reference Value)

The display speeds (reference values) of each object are as listed below.

The actual display speeds depend on the number of objects set on a screen, the shape of a figure drawn, and the frequencies of transient transmission.

Object name

Bus connection

Sequential device

Random device

CPU direct connection

Sequential device

Random device

Display speed

(Unit : s)

QnA

CPU

ACPU

Computer link connection

Bus connection

Sequential device

Random device

MELSECNET

/10 connection

Cyclic

Sequential device

Random device

Transient

Sequential device

Random device

CC-Link connection

(Remote device station)

Sequential device

Random device

CC-Link connection

(Intelligent device station)

Ethernet connection

Cyclic

Sequential device

Random device

Transient

Sequential device

Random device

Sequential device

Random device

Sequential device

Random device


Sequential device

Random device


Sequential device

Random device

QCPU

MELSECNET

/10 connection

Cyclic

Sequential device

Random device

Transient

Sequential device

Random device

CC-Link connection

(Remote device station)

Sequential device

Random device

Numeri cal display

ASCII display

Comment displayBit

User alarm

Drawing condition

6 digits,

16 bit

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

6 digits

0.15

0.15

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

10 characters

0.15

0.15

0.25

0.35

0.3

0.4

——

0.1

0.1

0.25

0.5

0.3

0.5

Parts display

(Bit)

Lamp display

(Bit)

48×48 dots

48×48 dots

Trend graph display

240×120 dots,

8 lines

Line graph display

240×120 dots,

8 lines,

10 points

Level display

160×160 dots

Touch key

(Bit momentary)

——

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.15

0.15

0.35

0.35

0.1

0.1

0.15

0.15

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.25

0.3

0.3

0.4

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

0.1

0.1

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

0.1

0.1

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.15

0.15

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

0.1

0.1

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.2

0.25

0.25

0.6

0.6

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.4

0.4

0.25

0.25

0.15

0.15

0.25

0.35

0.3

0.4

0.25

0.25

0.6

0.6

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.4

0.4

0.25

0.5

0.1

0.1

0.25

0.5

0.3

0.5

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.25

0.25

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.3

0.3

0.25

0.25

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.5

0.25

0.25

0.2

0.2

0.6

0.6

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.35

0.35

0.2

0.25

0.2

0.2

0.25

0.3

0.3

0.4

0.2

0.2

0.6

0.6

0.3

0.3

0.15

0.15

0.5

0.5

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.15

0.15

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.15

0.15

0.5

0.5

0.25

0.25

0.4

0.4

2.0

2.0

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

1.0

1.0

0.5

0.5

0.35

0.35

0.7

0.7

0.7

0.7

0.4

0.4

2.0

2.0

0.3

0.3

0.1

0.1

0.4

0.4

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.4

0.4

0.2

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.4

0.4

0.2

0.2

0.15

0.15

0.4

0.4

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.25

0.4

0.4

0.15

0.15

0.4

0.4

0.25

0.25

0.3

0.4

0.15

0.15

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

App - 5 App - 5

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

Object name

Numeri cal display

ASCII display

Comment displayBit

Drawing condition

6 digits,

16 bit

6 digits

10 characters

User alarm

——

Parts display

(Bit)

Lamp display

(Bit)

48×48 dots

48×48 dots

Trend graph display

240×120 dots,

8 lines

Line graph display

240×120 dots,

8 lines,

10 points

Level display

160×160 dots

Touch key

(Bit momentary)

——

QCPU

CC-Link connection

(Intelligent device station)

Ethernet connection

Cyclic

Sequential device

Random device

Transient

Sequential device

Random device

Sequential device

Random device

Sequential device

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.4

0.25

0.25

0.4

0.25

0.25

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.35

0.25

0.25

0.3

0.3

0.3

1.0

0.2

0.2

0.4

0.25

0.25

0.4

FXCPU


0.3

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.25

0.25

0.5

0.4

0.25

0.5

0.5

0.3

0.25

0.25

1.0

0.35

0.2

0.2

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.5

1.0

0.5

0.5

1.0

0.4

0.2

0.2

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.4

0.5

Random device 0.3

0.3

0.5

0.5

1.0

0.4

0.5

1.20

0.22

1.06

Display speed

(Unit : s)

Programmable controller by Omron

Programmable controller by Yasukawa

Sequential device

Random device

Sequential device

Random device

Programmable controller by Allen-

Bradley

Programmable controller by SHARP

Programmable controller by Toshiba

Programmable controller by SIEMENS

Programmable controller by Hitachi

Matsushita Electric

Works

Sequential device

Sequential device

Sequential device

Sequential device

Sequential device

Sequential device

0.20

0.20

0.21

1.09

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.20

0.20

0.30

0.68

0.3

0.5

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.20

0.20

0.35

2.34

0.5

0.6

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.50

0.50

0.70

10.40

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.7

0.5

0.8

0.30

0.36

0.35

2.42

0.4

0.7

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.30

0.30

0.35

2.20

0.4

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.25

0.30

0.27

0.53

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.3

0.4

0.60

0.80

0.8

5.72

1.0

1.0

0.9

1.2

0.8

0.8

0.26

0.27

0.2

0.46

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.35

0.35

0.3

2.50

0.5

0.5

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

App - 6 App - 6

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

<

=

;

:

>

?

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

0

1

/

.

-

,

*

+

)

(

Key

SP

!

"

#

$

%

&

,

Appendix3 List of Key Code

(1) List of key code for numerical and ASCII input

G

H

I

D

E

F

Key

@

A

B

C

V

W

X

Y

T

U

R

S

P

Q

N

O

L

M

J

K

Z

[

]

\

^

_

Key code

(H)

0020

0021

0022

0023

0024

0025

0026

0027

0028

0029

0032

0033

0034

0035

0036

0037

0038

0039

002A

002B

002C

002D

002E 1

002F

0030

0031

003A

003B

003C

003D

003E

003F

Key code

(H)

0040

0041

0042

0043

0044

0045

0046

0047

0048

0049

Key

` a b c d e f g h i

Key code

0060

0061

0062

0063

0064

0065

0066

0067

0068

0069

(H)

Key

(Clear)

Key code

0080 2

0081 2

0082

0083

0088

(H)

0052

0053

0054

0055

0056

0057

0058

0059

004A

004B

004C

004D

004E

004F

0050

0051 x y v w t u r s p q n o l m j k

0072

0073

0074

0075

0076

0077

0078

0079

006A

006B

006C

006D

006E

006F

0070

0071

005A

005B

005C

005D

005E

005F z

{

}

~

|

¦

007A

007B

007C

007D

007E

007F

1: Cannot be set only when the numerical input function is used on the GOT-F900 series.

2: Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.

App - 7 App - 7

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

(2) List of key code for objects

(a) Key code for numerical input

Key code

(H)

0008

000D

001B

002D

002E

0030 to 0046

0080

0081

0082

0083

0088

Application

Delete the bottom digit and shift to the right by one digit

Write to the destination device (Execute)/Move cursor

Delete cursor

“-”

“.”

Input value

Move cursor to the right

Move cursor to the left

Move cursor upward

Move cursor downward

Delete value being input

Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.

(b) Key code for ASCII input

Key code

(H)

0008

000D

001B

ASCII code

0080

0081

0082

0083

0088

Application

Erases the rightmost character and shifts the whole one character to the right.

Write to the destination device (Execute)/Move cursor

Delete cursor

Input characters

Move cursor to the right

Move cursor to the left

Move cursor upward


Delete value being input


(c) Key code for data list display function

Key code

(H)

00F2

00F3

Scroll up by one line

Scroll down by one line

Application


App - 8 App - 8

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

(d) Key code for alarm list display function

Key code

(H)

00F2

00F3

FFB0

FFB1

FFB2

FFB3

FFB8

FFBC

Scroll up by one line

Scroll down by one line

Show cursor

Hide cursor

Move cursor upward


Display detail information

Display ladder

Application


(e) Key code for alarm history function

Key code

(H)

FFB0

FFB1

FFB2

FFB3

FFB4

FFB5

FFB6

FFB7

FFB8

FFB9

FFBB

FFBC

Application

Show cursor

Hide cursor

Move cursor upward


Display date/time of selected data

Display date/time of all data

Delete selected alarm contents on display

Delete all alarm contents on display

Display detail information

Reset designated device

When using GOT-A900 series: Save alarm contents to PC card

When using GOT-F900 series: Reset designated device

Display ladder

Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used

FFB6 and FFB7 are compatible with the OS version 3.0 and later of the GOT-F900 series.

App - 9 App - 9

APPENDICES

Appendix4 Drawing Sheet

(1) For A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/A960GOT

MELSOFT

App - 10 App - 10

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

App - 11 App - 11

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

(2) For A95 GOT

0

0

16 32 48 64 80

16

96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 319

208

224

239

128

144

160

176

192

80

96

112

32

48

64

(3) For A956WGOT

0

0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 416 432 448 464 480

16

32

48

64

80

96

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

234

App - 12 App - 12

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

App - 13 App - 13

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

(4) For F940GOT

0

0

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220

240

260 280 300 319

20

40

140

160

180

200

100

120

60

80

220

239

(5) For F930GOT

0

0

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 239

20

40

60

79

(6) For F920GOT

0

20 40

0

60

20

80 100 120 127

40

60

63

There are no touch keys.

App - 14 App - 14

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

App - 15 App - 15

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

Appendix5 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function (Reference Value)

During printing, it is recommended that a monitor screen with fewer object functions is displayed.

When a screen with object functions (e.g. value display function) showing many variations is displayed on the GOT, the GOT gives priority to display of object functions. Therefore, the printouts take longer.

The following table shows the print out time (reference value) using the hard copy function while the monitor screen with value display function for 50 points is displayed.

GOT main unit Connection

A985GOT

A975GOT

A970GOT

A95 GOT-

SBA/SBD

A95 GOT-

LBA/LBD

A956WGOT


Bus connection

Computer link

MELSECNET connection (data link system)

MELSECNET connection (network system)


Bus connection

Computer link




Bus connection

Computer link




Bus connection

Computer link




Bus connection

Computer link




Bus connection

Computer link



*1 Either of the following printers was used to measure printing time.

•

ESC/P command-ready printer: Canon BJC-600J

•

PCL command-ready printer: HEWLETT PACKARD Laser Jet6L

Printer applicable for

ESC/P command

(16 colors)

30.5min.

30.3min.

30.7min.

31.5min.

33.6min.

19.3min.

20.9min.

19.1min.

22.1min.

21.6min.

37.2min.

36.0min.

36.9min.

35.7min.

36.7min.

1sec.40min.

1sec.39min.

1sec.39min.

1sec.42min.

1sec.37min.

1sec.08min.

1sec.09min.

1sec.07min.

1sec.09min.

1sec.09min.

1sec.10min.

1sec.08min.

1sec.07min.

1sec.08min.

1sec.08min.

Type of printer to be used 1

Printer applicable for

ESC/P command (black and white)

Printer applicable for PCL command

20.3min.

21.2min.

21.5min.

19.5min.

19.3min.

20.6min.

20.9min.

20.2min.

21.9min.

19.8min.

22.8min.

23.1min.

23.1min.

23.1min.

23.1min.

40.9min.

40.9min.

39.1min.

42.4min.

40.1min.

33.4min.

31.0min.

33.4min.

31.1min.

31.5min.

32.3min.

30.4min.

33.1min.

30.4min.

33.5min.

22.9min.

23.0min.

22.8min.

22.5min.

23.0min.

23.7min.

23.2min.

23.1min.

22.6min.

23.0min.

22.7min.

22.5min.

22.8min.

23.1min.

22.5min.

31.3min.

30.9min.

30.6min.

32.2min.

33.5min.

27.9min.

27.0min.

26.7min.

28.2min.

28.0min.

27.1min.

28.1min.

26.8min.

28.1min.

28.0min.

App - 16 App - 16

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

Appendix6 Relationships between Extended Functions OS Installation and User Area

(Memory Map)

The GOT's internal memory has 1152k bytes of space for the user area (area where screen data can be stored).

When the expanded or option functions are used in the GOT, the corresponding extended functions OSs must be installed in the GOT.

Since the extended functions OSs are stored in the user area, the free space of the user area changes with the number of OSs installed as indicated below.

Number of Extended functions OSs 1

2

3

0

1

4

5

6

Memory Space Used [k bytes]

0

256

384

640

768

1024

1152

User Area Free Space [k bytes] 2

1152

896

768

512

384

128

0

1 The MELSEC-QnA ladder monitor function, MELSEC-Q ladder monitor function, MELSEC-A list editor function, Gateway function and Servo amplifier monitor function are handled as two extended functions

OSs, respectively.

2 The above user area spaces assume that there are no additional memory boards. Therefore, increase the memory as required.

Since the A95 GOTBD-M3 has the built-in memory of 3200k bytes, the free space is the above value plus 2048k bytes.

App - 17 App - 17

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

Appendix7 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR

The following table indicates the colors and color numbers available when colors are

XORed in the drawing mode using the parts display function or like.

(1) GOT having 256 display colors

When XORing any colors other than the following, check them in the preview of

GT Designer.

Black

0

Blue

3

Black

0

Blue

3

Blue

3

Red

224

Purple

227

Green

28

Dark white

182

Dark black

109

Cyan

31

Yellow

252

White

255

Dark blue

2

Dark red

160

Dark purple

162

Dark green

20

Dark cyan

22

Dark yellow

180

Black

0

Purple

227

Red

224

Cyan

31

Green

28

White

255

Yellow

252

1

163

161

23

21

183

181

110

Black

0

Blue

3

Red

224

Purple

227

Green

28

Dark white

182

Dark black

109

Cyan

31

Yellow

252

White

255

Dark blue

2

Dark red

160

Dark purple

162

Dark green

20

Dark cyan

22

Dark yellow

180

Red

224

Purple

227

Red

224

Purple

227

Green

28

Purple

227

Black

0

Blue

3

Yellow

252

White

255

Green

28

Cyan

31

Red

224

Blue

3

Black

0

White

255

Yellow

252

Cyan

31

Green

28

Cyan

31

Yellow

252

White

255

Black

0

Blue

3

Red

224

Purple

227

226

64

66

244

246

84

86

225

67

65

247

245

87

85

Green

28

30

188

190

8

10

168

170

Cyan

31

Yellow

252

White

255

Cyan

31

Green

28

White

255

Yellow

252

Blue

3

Black

0

Purple

227

Red

224

Yellow

252

White

255

Green

28

Cyan

31

Red

224

Purple

227

Black

0

Blue

3

29

191

189

11

7

171

169

254

92

94

232

234

72

74

White

255

Yellow

252

Cyan

31

Green

28

Purple

227

Red

224

Blue

3

Black

0

253

95

93

235

233

75

73

1

226

225

30

29

254

253

Black

0

Dark cyan

22

Dark green

20

Dark purple

162

Dark red

160

Dark white

182

Dark yellow

180

Dark blue

2

Dark blue

2

141 142 113 114 145 146 111

Dark red

160

Dark red

160

163

64

67

188

191

92

205

Dark purple

162

Dark purple

162

161

66

65

190

189

94

93

Dark red

160

Dark blue

2

Black

0

Dark white

182

Dark yellow

180

Dark cyan

22

Dark green

20

95

Dark purple

162

Black

0

Dark white

182

Dark green

20

Dark blue

2

Dark yellow

180

Dark cyan

22

235

Dark cyan

22

Dark yellow

180

Dark white

182

Black

0

Dark blue

2

Dark red

160

Dark purple

162

207

Dark green

20

Dark green

20

23

244

247

8

11

232

121

Dark cyan

22

Dark cyan

22

21

246

245

10

7

234

Dark yellow

180

Dark yellow

180

75

Dark white

182

Dark green

20

Dark cyan

22

Dark red

160

Dark purple

162

Black

0

Dark blue

2

Black

0

Dark purple

162

Dark red

160

233

Dark green

20

Dark white

182

Dark yellow

180

Dark blue

2

Dark purple

162

Dark red

160

Dark blue

2

73

Dark yellow

180

Dark cyan

22

Dark green

20

Black

0

123

183

84

87

168

171

72

217

181

86

85

170

169

74

219

Dark white

182

Dark white

182

110

141

142

113

114

145

146

111

205

207

121

123

217

219

Black

0

Dark black

109

Dark black

109

App - 18 App - 18

APPENDICES

MELSOFT


Black

0

Black

0

Black

0

Blue

3

Blue

3

Blue

3

Red

224

Purple

227

Green

28

Cyan

31

Yellow

252

White

255

Dark yellow

180

Dark white

182

Dark green

20

Dark cyan

22

Dark black

109

Dark blue

2

Dark red

160

Dark purple

162

Blue

3

Red

224

Purple

227

Green

28

Cyan

31

Yellow

252

White

255

Dark yellow

180

Dark white

182

Dark green

20

Dark cyan

22

Dark black

109

Dark blue

2

Dark red

160

Dark purple

162

Red

224

Cyan

31

Green

28

White

255

Yellow

252

Dark blue

2

Black

0

Dark yellow

180

Dark black

109

Dark green

20

Dark white

182

Dark purple

162

Dark red

160

Dark cyan

22

Purple

227

Red

224

Dark purple

162

Black

0

Dark white

182

Dark green

20

Dark blue

2

Dark yellow

180

Dark cyan

22

Purple

227

Dark black

109

Blue

3

Red

224

Yellow

252

White

255

Green

28

Cyan

31

Dark red

160

Blue

3

Dark black

109

White

255

Dark cyan

22

Dark green

20

Dark white

182

Dark yellow

180

Red

224

Purple

227

Dark red

160

Dark blue

2

Black

0

Purple

227

Yellow

252

Cyan

31

Green

28

Dark purple

162

Green

28

Yellow

252

White

255

Dark black

109

Blue

3

Dark blue

2

Dark red

160

Dark purple

162

Cyan

31

Green

28

Dark cyan

22

Dark yellow

180

Dark white

182

Black

0

Dark purple

162

Dark red

160

Green

28

Cyan

31

Dark green

20

Dark white

182

Dark yellow

180

Dark blue

2

Black

0

Red

224

Purple

227

Dark green

20

Cyan

31

White

255

Yellow

252

Blue

3

Dark black

109

Purple

227

Red

224

Dark cyan

22

Yellow

252

Purple

227

Dark black

109

Blue

3

Dark yellow

180

White

255

Green

28

Cyan

31

Red

224

Blue

3

Dark black

109

Dark white

182

Red

224

Cyan

31

Green

28

White

255

Cyan

31

Green

28

Purple

227

Red

224

Yellow

252

Dark white

182

Dark yellow

180

Dark cyan

22

Dark green

20

Dark blue

2

Dark purple

162

Dark red

160

Blue

3

Yellow

252

Dark cyan

22

Dark red

160

Dark purple

162

Dark white

182

Dark green

20

Black

0

Dark blue

2

White

255

Yellow

252

White

255

Dark red

160

Dark blue

2

Dark green

20

Dark purple

162

Dark yellow

180

Dark cyan

22

Black

0

Dark blue

2

Dark blue

2

Dark black

109

Purple

227

Yellow

252

White

255

Green

28

Dark black

109

Blue

3

Dark red

160

Dark red

160

Purple

227

Cyan

31

Dark red

160

Black

0

Dark blue

2

Dark yellow

180

Dark white

182

Dark green

20

Dark cyan

22

Red

224

Yellow

252

Cyan

31

Dark cyan

22

Dark green

20

Dark white

182

Dark yellow

180

Purple

227

Green

28

Dark purple

162

Dark blue

2

Black

0

Dark purple

162

Dark purple

162

Red

224

Blue

3

Dark black

109

White

255

Yellow

252

Red

224

Dark green

20

Dark green

20

Cyan

31

White

255

Dark black

109

Blue

3

Dark blue

2

Dark red

160

Dark purple

162

Green

28

Purple

227

Dark green

20

Dark yellow

180

Dark white

182

Black

0

Dark cyan

22

Dark cyan

22

Green

28

White

255

Yellow

252

Blue

3

Dark black

109

Purple

227

Red

224

Purple

227

Dark yellow

180

Dark green

20

Dark cyan

22

Dark red

160

Dark purple

162

Black

0

Dark black

109

Blue

3

Dark blue

2

Yellow

252

Red

224

Dark cyan

22

Dark white

182

Dark yellow

180

Dark blue

2

Black

0

Dark purple

162

Dark red

160

Cyan

31

Dark yellow

180

Dark yellow

180

White

255

Green

28

Cyan

31

Dark white

182

Dark white

182

Yellow

252

Cyan

31

Green

28

Purple

227

Red

224

Dark black

109

Dark cyan

22

Dark yellow

180

Dark purple

162

Dark green

20

Dark white

182

Dark black

109

Dark blue

2

Dark red

160

Blue

3

Blue

3

Dark purple

162

Dark red

160

Dark blue

2

Dark black

109

Dark white

182

Dark cyan

22

Dark green

20

Black

0

Red

224

Purple

227

Green

28

Cyan

31

Yellow

252

White

255

White

255

Black

0

App - 19 App - 19

APPENDICES


Black

0

Blue

3

Red

224

Purple

227

Green

28

Cyan

31

Yellow

252

White

255

Blue

3

Blue

3

Black

0

Purple

227

Red

224

Cyan

31

Green

28

White

255

Yellow

252

Black

0

Black

0

Blue

3

Red

224

Purple

227

Green

28

Cyan

31

Yellow

252

White

255

Purple

227

Purple

227

Red

224

Blue

3

Black

0

White

255

Yellow

252

Cyan

31

Green

28

Red

224

Red

224

Purple

227

Black

0

Blue

3

Yellow

252

White

255

Green

28

Cyan

31

Green

28

Green

28

Cyan

31

Yellow

252

White

255

Black

0

Blue

3

Red

224

Purple

227

Yellow

252

Yellow

252

White

255

Green

28

Cyan

31

Red

224

Purple

227

Black

0

Blue

3

Cyan

31

Cyan

31

Green

28

White

255

Yellow

252

Blue

3

Black

0

Purple

227

Red

224

White

255

White

255

Yellow

252

Cyan

31

Green

28

Purple

227

Red

224

Blue

3

Black

0

MELSOFT

App - 20 App - 20

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

Appendix8 List of Functions Added by Version Update of GT Works Version5 / GT Designer

Version5

The following tables indicate the functions added to up to version 26C of GT Works

Version5/GT Designer Version5.

The symbols in each table have the following meanings.

SW

#

A to Z

Abbreviation for GT Works

Version • GT Designer Version

Abbreviation for GT Works

Version • GT Designer Version version name

Allowed for use

Allowed for use on the GOT-A900 series only

Allowed for use on the GOT-F900 series only

Not allowed for use

(1) GOT added

Corresponding Model

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U 26C

A985GOT

F940GOT

F930GOT(F930GOT-BWD)

A95 GOT

A970GOT-LBA/LBD

A951GOT-Q

A95 GOT-TBD

A950 handy GOT

A985GOT-V

F940GOT-RH

A956WGOT

GT SoftGOT

F940WGOT

F920GOT, F930GOT (F930GOT-BWD-K-E)

GOT Unit

Function

Utility

PC card

Extension of monitoring device range

Used device

Ladder monitor

(2) GOT unit functions added (extended, option and other functions)

Function Added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


Addition of brightness adjustment function

Addition of OS copy function

Supporting of Fsh PC cards

Extension of monitoring device range when the microcomputer is connected

Addition of SB and SW to monitor devices when the ACPU is connected

Addition of SS, SC, S, SB, SN and SW to monitor devices when the QnACPU is connected

Addition of TS and CS to monitor devices when the ACPU/FXCPU is connected

Addition of the GOT special register (GS) to the GOT's internal devices

The GOT internal devices (GD,

GB) have been increased from

1023 to 16383

"CC-Link G4 station number",

"base screen information",

"gateway common control",

"gateway information, common information 1" and "GT SoftGOT common information" have been added to the GOT special registers (GS)

Supports the monitoring of

QnACPU

Supports the monitoring of QCPU

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Supports monitoring of QCPU on

A956WGOT

Supports multi PLC system and

Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU as the monitor targets of the QCPU

1 1 1 1

1 1 1 1

App - 21 App - 21

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

GOT Unit

Function

Ladder monitor

Special module monitor

Network monitor

List editor

Base screen

System monitor

Motion monitor

Servo amplifier monitor

Gateway functions

Function Added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


Addition of the factor search/touch search function to

Q ladder monitor

Supports the monitoring of QCPU modules



Supports the monitoring of

QD75M

Supports the monitoring of QCPU

Addition of the function which displays/edits in the list mode the sequence program read from the

ACPU

The maximum number of screens increased from 1024 to

4096



Supports the monitoring Motion

Controller CPU (expect

Q172CPU, Q173CPU)

Addition of the function that performs the servo monitor/parameter setting of the motion controller CPU (Q172CPU,

Q173CPU)

Addition of the function that performs various monitor functions, parameter setting changes, test operation, etc. for the connected servo amplifiers

Addition of the function that can monitor each controller with one

GOT/personal computer

Addition of the function that can access the PC card of the GOT from the personal computer

Addition of the function that sends mail from the GOT to the personal computer/cellular phone at alarm occurrence

1 Unusable with the A95 GOT

2 Use the Ethernet communication module (A9GT-J71E71-T) whose hardware version is E or later.

2

2

2

(3) Connection forms added

Connection Form

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


Bus connection to CPU

Connection with QCPU supported

Connection with Motion controller CPU

(Q172CPU, Q173CPU)

Direct connection to CPU

Connection with QnACPU supported


Transparent function supported

Connection with FXCPU (FX(

2N

)-10GM/20GM series) supported

Supports connection with the FX-1NC

Connection with Motion controller CPU

(Q172CPU, Q173CPU)



1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Transmission speed change

(19200bps/38400bps) supported for connection of QC24N

Supports connection with the motion controller

CPU (Q172CPU, Q173CPU)

App - 22 App - 22

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

Connection Form

CC-Link connection

Q-compatible intelligent device station supported

Supports CC-Link master/local connection via

G4-S3


CPU (Q172CPU, Q173CPU) (With the exception of connection with the intelligent device station)

Omron PLC connection

Connection with C200H/HS/HX/HG/HE,

CQM1, C1000H, C2000H, CV1000 supported

Connection with CV500, CV2000, CVM1-

CPU01/11/21 supported

Connection with CS1 supported

Supports connection with C200H

Supports connection with the CJ1

Yaskawa Electric PLC connection

Connection with GL60S/60H/70H/120/130 supported

Connection with CP-9200SH supported

Connection with CP-9300MS and MP-920/930 supported

Connection with CP-9200(H) or PROGIC-8 supported

Supports connection with CP-9300MS (CP-

9300MC compatible)

Barcode connection

Allen-Bradley PLC connection

Connection with AB SLC500 supported

Connection with AB MicroLogix1000/1500 supported

Connection with AB MicroLogix1200 supported

Toshiba PLC connection

Connection with T3 and T3H supported

Connection with mode 13000 supported

Supports connection with the T2 series

SIEMENS PLC connection

Connection with SIMATIC S7-300 supported

Connection with SIMATIC S7-400 supported

Supports connection with SIMATIC S7-200 series

HITACHI PLC connection

Connection with multiple PLC system

Supports connection with MELSEC-Q series

Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


Ethernet connection


CPU (Q172CPU, Q173CPU)

Matsushita Electric Works PLC connection

Inverter connection

2 3 3 3 3

1 Only F940WGOT compatible

2 Only GT SoftGOT compatible

3 When using the Ethernet communication module (A9GT-J71E71-T) whose hardware version is E or later, use GT Works Version 5 26C or later or GT Designer Version 5 26C or later.

(The module cannot be used with GT Works Version 5 P to Y or GT Designer Version 5 P to Y.)

App - 23 App - 23

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

(4) GT Designer functions added

(a) Added figure drawing functions

Figure Drawn Description of Added Function

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


Circle

Rectangle

Character

Addition of fill pattern and fill background color setting function

Addition of fill pattern and fill background color setting function

Addition of the function which displays high-quality characters

Addition of the function which displays 6 8 dot characters

Addition of character decoration

"raised" setting function

(b) Object functions added

Object Function Description of Function Added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


Observe status

Line graph

ASCII display

ASCII input

Numerical display

Numerical input

Function which performs write to the PLC CPU when the specified condition holds

Addition of the word device value range as the observation condition

Addition of the function which specifies offset for the device set for the condition (for screenbased observation only)

The maximum number of set conditions + operations increased from 40 to 512

Addition of "BCD" to the data format of the written value for data SET operation when the condition holds

Addition of the function which copies the status observation settings

Addition of the function which sets undisplayed values

Addition of the function which displays a track

Addition of justification setting function

Addition of justification setting function

Addition of input triqqer device setting function

Addition of the function which displays values with decimal points after automatic adjustment made with the the object function

Addition of the function which can change display attributes according to the specified device status (ON/OFF, device value)

Addition of input triqqer device setting function

Addition of the function which displays values with decimal points after automatic adjustment made with the the object function

App - 24 App - 24

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

(b) Object functions added

Object

Function

Panel meter

Barcode

Statistics display

Touch key

Description of Function Added

Addition of the function which allows the panel meter shape to be selected

Addition of panel color specifying function

Connect the barcode reader to the GOT. Add the function that writes the data read with a barcode reader into the PLC

CPU.

Addition of the function which sets the display direction in a

Rectangle graph chart

Addition of the function which uses character strings created by the comment function in character string display

Addition of the touch key

(extended) function which displays the brightness adjustment screen of the GOT

Addition of the function which changes the comment of the reference destination according to the result of adding the specified device (up to 2 points) and fixed values in the function which uses on the character string display the character string created with the comment function.

Addition of initial value condition setting

Addition of the function which

XORs, reverses and paints the inside of a no-figure touch key

Addition of the touch key

(extended) function which shows the list editing screen of the

ACPU

Addition of auto repeat function

Addition of the function which specifies offset for the operation target device

Addition of the function which allows touch keys to be set as free figures

Addition of the function which can set quality characters for

ON, OFF and midway point in double pressing

The basic conversion figures from GOT800 are added as the basic figures of group 2

Addition of the function that can specify the station number switching destination according to the screen type (base/overlap window 1, 2/superimpose)

Addition of the function that keeps outputting the buzzer while the touch key is pressed at the output timing of the touch key sound.

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


App - 25 App - 25

APPENDICES

MELSOFT


Touch key

Lamp display function

Hard copy

System information

Operation panel

External I/O

Report

Password

Screen switching

Addition of the touch key (motion monitor) function that displays the motion monitor function

Addition of the touch key (servo amplifier monitor) function that displays the servo amplifier monitor screen

Addition of the function which allows lamps to be set as free figures

Addition of the function which can change display attributes according to the specified device status (ON/OFF, device value).

The basic conversion figures from GOT800 are added as the basic figures of group 2

Addition of the function which outputs the screen image of the

F940GOT to a printer.

Addition of the function which alllows data to be saved on PC card as JPEG format file

Addition of the function which can provide 256-color mode printer output

Addition of the Human sensor detection signal

Addition of the I/O signal area for external I/O equipment

Addition of the currently printed report screen area

Addition of the report output signal

Addition of hard copy signal

Allows selection of only the functions necessary for system information

Addition of key window output signal to system information 2

The following data are added to system information.

• Used recipe number

• Superimposed screen numbers 1, 2

• Input completion object ID

Addition of the function which allows an operation panel to be connected for operation from outside the GOT

Addition of the function which transfers signals to/from outside the GOT

Addition of the function which gathers and prints data per trigger

Addition of the function used to set level device for security setting

Addition of the function which enables selection of whetger message will be displayed or not if error occurs at password entry

Addition of the password used to change the parameter setting of the motion monitor function

Addition of the parameter setting changing password of the servo amplifier monitor function

Addition of the function use to select whether screen switching device is initialized or not at power-on of GOT

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


App - 26 App - 26

APPENDICES

MELSOFT


Overlap screen

Trend graph

Part display function

Part movement display

Comment function

Bar graph

Scatter graph

Time action

Sampling function


The maximum number of overlaps screens has been changed from five to no restriction.

Addition of the function which further calls the screen which uses the screen calling function

(hierarchical called screens)

Addition of window screens as the screens to be called and the screens which can use the screen calling function

Addition of the screen which allows overlap screen numbers to be batch-changed

Addition of the screen which displays overlap screens hierarchically.

Addition of "Rise", "Fall", "ON

Sampling" and "OFF Sampling" triggers to the display conditions

Addition of the function which can fix displayed parts (parts can be overlapped) and the function which can display the base screen as a part

Addition of the function which sets the starting number

Addition of the function which sets the preview number

Addition of the function which edits the object size

Addition of the function which can display window screens as parts



Addition of the function which sets the starting number

Addition of the function which changes the display starting line for multi-line comment.

Addition of the function which sets the display position of a scale

Addition of the function which gathers data stored in word devices associated with the X and Y axes and displays them as a scatter graph

Addition of the function which performs operation, such as device write, at the specified time of the day of the week

Addition of the function which collects data in the specified cycle or under the bit condition and displays them in a graph or the like.

Increase of the maximum monitor points that can be observed

Bit device:

Word device (16 bits):

3072 points

Word device (32 bits):

1024 points

512 points

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


App - 27 App - 27

APPENDICES

MELSOFT



Alarm list

Recipe function

Script function

Time action function

Video display

RGB screen display

Addition of the function which allows data to be saved on PC card as CSV format file

Addition of the function which sends the date and time, comment and others as electronic mail when the specified device turns on/off.

Increase in number of device points that can be set

Continuous: 8192 points

Random: 512 points

Addition of "most to least recent" and "least to most recent" as the orders of displaying the alarm list

Addition of the setting which does not create a recipe file automatically (does not set recipe device values) if the PC card has no recipe file.

Addition of the function which allows file reqister name to be specified with recipe device

Addition of the function which allows recipe operation to be copied

Addition of the function which allows the user to set the recipe file name

Addition of the function which can control the GOT display with the GOT side programs (scripts)

Addition of the function which automatically updates the path of the script file in the project data folder if the folder moves

Addition of the function which can use GOT internal devices

(GD, GB) for substitution processing without substitution delay.

Addition of the function that updates the script data read to

GT Designer to the latest script data.

Addition of the function which sends various data, e.g. alarm history data, recipe file and screen image, as electronic mail

(GT SoftGOT only)

Addition of the function which displays video image on the

GOT by connection of the video input interface unit

Addition of the function which displays personal computer screen on the GOT by connection of the RGB input interface unit

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


App - 28 App - 28

APPENDICES

MELSOFT


Station number switching

Addition of the function that can specify the station number switching destination for the station number change device according to the screen type

(base/overlap window 1,

2/superimpose)

Addition of the touch key, status monitoring and script functions to the object corresponding to the station number switching function

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


Only A985GOT-V may be used.

(c) Other functions added

Edit and Setting

Functions


Sub-setting of project unit

Screen-byscreen auxiliary setting

Key window

Addition of the function which sets display or non-display according to whether an action condition is filled or not.

Addition of serial communication setting function

Addition of setup setting function

Addition of menu call key setting function

Addition of language setting function

Addition of the function which sets the cursor display position and cursor input region table for screen switching

Addition of the function which allows specifying the screen number used as user-original key window

Addition of the function that sets portrait in the display format of the basic setting when F930GOT is used

Addition of the function which sets the cursor display position and cursor input region table for screen switching

Addition of the function which sets whether display is provided or not depending on whether operation condition is established or not on screen-byscreen basis, instead of projectby-project basis.

Addition of initial display position setting function for key window

Addition of the function which creates a user-original key window to use it instead of the standard key window.

Addition of the function which displays the window size at initial position setting

Addition of the function which allows you to select whether to display or hide the input enabled range shown for out of range input

Addition of the function that allows the key window to be used on the F930GOT

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


App - 29 App - 29

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

Edit and Setting

Functions


Object list

GPPW device comment reference function

"+" cursor display function

Enhancement of parts library

Enhancement of parts library

Device setting

Changing the

PLC type of project

Addition of the function which can display different objects classified by pages

Addition of the function which allows the device setting to be changed by direct input from inside the list

Addition of the function which can read and refer to the GPPW device comment data as another format data

Addition of the function which automatically changes the cursor indication (shape) when a figure is drawn

Addition of the special function keys having more complex functions to the parts library of touch keys

Addition of new figures to the parts library of touch keys/lamps

Addition of the function which allows setting to be made by direct input on the setting dialog box of each object, without using the [Device] dialog box

Addition of the connection target

CPU (QCPU) divides the conventional PLC type

"MELSEC-A, QnA" into two different types of "MELSEC-A" and "MELSEC-QnA, Q".

Grid display "Mesh" is added as a choice.

Travel "Mesh" is added as a choice.

Screen background color setting

Panelkit save/read function

Monochrome printer output compatibility

Upload

Device batchconversion

Addition of the function which sets a background color on a screen basis

Addition of the function which allows a panelkit to be saved/read as a file

Addition of the function which allows adjustment for output to a monochrome printer

Addition of the function which uploads the alarm history/alarm totalization/sampling function data from the GOT and saves them in a text file

Addition of the function which batch-converts only the devices of the selected object

Addition of the function which changes the commonly set devices

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


App - 30 App - 30

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

Edit and Setting

Functions


Window screen changing

CSV filebased comment read/write

Operating environment

Improvement in drawing setting/ operability

Toolbars/ icons

Communicati on setting

Addition of the function which allows selection of whether the move and close keys are displayed or hidden in overlap windows 1, 2

Addition of the function which can control the overlap window screen display position using the specified device value

Addition of the function which reads a CSV file as a comment and writes a comment as a CSV file

Addition of the function which leaves the previously saved data as backup at the time of project overwrite

Addition of the function which can change the toolbar display position

Addition of Microsoft

R

Windows

R

Millennium Edition Operating

System and Microsoft

R

Windows

R

2000 professional

Operating System to the operating environment of GT Designer

Addition of the functions which improve operability for figure drawing/editing (shortcut keys, right-click menu, mouse operation)

Addition of the function which defines the user settings as predetermined values in figure attribute setting

Addition of the function which browses through a list display to choose a screen, comment, part or the like

Addition of the function which shows the related setting item

(comment, print format, communication, auxiliary setting) setting screen from the corresponding object setting screen

Addition of the function which selects/deselects all data copied from the item list of another project on the [Import From

Project] screen

Addition of new toolbars (Main/

View/Figure • Object/Edit/Draw) and icons

Addition of the communication retry function which restarts communication if a communication error occurs during transfer of data to/from the GOT

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


App - 31 App - 31

APPENDICES

MELSOFT

(5) Added GT Converter data to be converted

Data to Be Converted

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


Digital's package

"GP-PR0/PBIII for Windows 95

(Ver 2.0/Ver 2.1)" data

L tag conversion supported

T, E tag conversion supported

W tag, D script and LS area conversion supported

Supports S tag conversion

PLC type: Memory link (SIO)/(Ethernet)

Addition of the conversion option function that selects whether the base screen is converted into the parts/window screen or not when

Digital package data is converted

Digital's package

"GP-PR0/PBIII for Windows (Ver 3.0)" data

Supports conversion of quality characters and basic touch key/lamp figures of GOT800 series.

(6) GT Manager function added


SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5


Project copy function

Addition of the function which performs cut/copy/paste on a project basis.

Enables backup onto multiple

FDs.

App - 32 App - 32

APPENDICES

MEMO

MELSOFT

App - 33 App - 33

INDEX

[A]

Additional function list................................App-15

Alarm history display function ....................... 5-18

Alarm list display function.............................. 5-24

Animation display function

Lamp display function................................ 5-33

Panelmeter display function ...................... 5-36

Part display function .................................. 5-27

Part movement display function................ 5-30

Arc (ellipse arc).............................................. 4-27

Arithmetical operation by expression.......... 5-127

ASCII display function .................................... 5- 8

ASCII input function....................................... 5-72

Attributes........................................................ 4-29

[B]

Base screen.................................................... 4- 1

Barcode function ........................................... 5-98

Bar graph display function ............................ 5-45

BMP file ......................................................... 4-27

[C]

CD-ROM drive................................................ 2- 1

Check box...................................................... 3-10

Circle (ellipse)................................................ 4-27

Clock display function ................................... 5-11

Command button........................................... 3-10

Comment display function............................. 5-14

CRT................................................................. 2- 1

[D]

Data arithmetical operation ......................... 5-123

Data capacity

Figure ......................................................... 4-33

Object function........................................... 4-37

PC card ...................................................... 4-42

Data display function

ASCII display function ................................ 5- 8

Clock display function................................ 5-11

Data list display function............................. 5- 5

Numerical display function ......................... 5- 2

Data input function

ASCII input function................................... 5-72

Numerical input function............................ 5-68

Data list display function .................................5- 5

Debugging......................................................6-12

Debugging of screen data .............................6-12

Dialog box ......................................................3-10

Display color...................................................4-29

Display speed of object.............................. App- 6

Download .......................................................6-11

Download of screen data...............................6-11

Drawing sheet ........................................... App-10

Drawing figures and attribute types...............4-27

Dropdown menu..............................................3- 6

DXF file...........................................................4-27

[E]

Extended function OS.....................................6- 4

[F]

Figures ...........................................................4-27

Floating alarm function ..................................5-24

[G]

Graph display function

Bar graph display function .........................5-45

Level display function.................................5-54

Line graph display function ........................5-42

Statistical graph display function ...............5-51

Trend graph display function .....................5-39

Scatter chart display function.....................5-54

[H]

Hardcopy function ..........................................5-98

Hard disk space ..............................................2- 1

How to use help .............................................3-17

[I]

Install

OS (personal computer GOT) ...................6-10

ROM_BIOS (personal computer GOT) ......6- 9

Installation of OS............................................6-10

Installation of ROM_BIOS ..............................6- 9

Index - 1 Index - 1

Ind

Ind

[K]

Keyboard ........................................................ 2- 1

[L]

Lamp display function ................................... 5-33

Level display function.................................... 5-54

Line ................................................................ 4-27

Line freeform ................................................. 4-27

Line graph display function ........................... 5-42

Line style........................................................ 4-29

Line width....................................................... 4-29

List box .......................................................... 3-10

List of key codes.........................................App- 7

Logging report ............................................... 5-76

[M]

Mask operation............................................... 5- 7

Memory........................................................... 2- 1

Menu bar......................................................... 3- 2

Menu configuration......................................... 3- 6

Message display function

Alarm history display function ................... 5-18

Alarm list display function.......................... 5-24

Comment display function......................... 5-14

Mouse ............................................................. 2- 1

[N]

Numerical display function ............................. 5- 2

Numerical input function................................ 5-68

[O]

Object function list ......................................... 4-34

Observe status function ................................ 5-85

Offset function ............................................. 5-122

Operation environment................................... 2- 1

Operation for creating a report screen........... 6- 3

Operations for drawing figures....................... 6- 2

Operations for object setting .......................... 6- 2

Operations for use of conventional model ................................App- 1

Operation panel function............................... 5-99

Operations to be set for the first time ............ 6- 1

Overlap

Figure and object....................................... 4-45

Objects....................................................... 4-45

Overlap window.............................................. 4- 4

[P]

Painting ..........................................................4-29

Painting background ......................................4-29

Painting color .................................................4-29

Painting pattern ..............................................4-29

Panel meter display function .........................5-36

Part display function.......................................5-27

Part movement display function ....................5-30

PC card ...........................................................2- 5

PC communication driver ...............................6- 4

Personal computer..........................................2- 1

Polygon ..........................................................4-25

Printer

(for connection with personal computer)........2- 1

[R]

Radio button...................................................3-10

Recipe function ..............................................5-91

Rectangle .......................................................4-27

Resolution .......................................................2- 1

Report function...............................................5-75

Report figures.................................................4-27

Real-time report .............................................5-75

Report screen.................................................4-10

RGB screen....................................................4-23

RGB window display function......................5-110

ROM_BIOS .....................................................6- 5

RS-232C cable................................................2- 4

Index - 2 Index - 2

[S]

Sampling function........................................ 5-104

Scale .............................................................. 4-27

Scatter chart display function........................ 5-51

Screen configuration ...................................... 3- 1

Security function.......................................... 5-118

Shift operation ............................................. 5-126

Sound function............................................... 5-95

Spin box......................................................... 3-10

Standard monitor OS ..................................... 6- 4

Station number switching function.............. 5-129

Statistical graph display function .................. 5-48

Status bar ....................................................... 3- 5

Superimpose window..................................... 4- 8

System configuration

System configuration of data transfer and document creation ...................................... 2- 2

System configuration of monitoring screen ................................... 2- 1

System information function.......................... 5-82

System program ............................................. 6- 4

[T]

Tab................................................................. 3-10

Template

Panelkit ...................................................... 3-12

Parts........................................................... 3-12

Parts display area...................................... 3-12

Parts library................................................ 3-12

Pasting method of parts ............................ 3-14

Tree display area....................................... 3-13

Test function .................................................. 5-59

Text ................................................................ 4-27

Text box ......................................................... 3-10

Time action function .................................... 5-101

Title bar........................................................... 3- 2

Tool bar........................................................... 3- 3

Tool palette

Attribute setting list box ............................. 3-16

Cursor button ............................................. 3-15

Figure drawing button................................ 3-15

Object setting button.................................. 3-16

Touch key function ........................................ 5-57

Trend graph display function......................... 5-39

[V]

Video display function..................................5-109

Video window.................................................4-11

[W]

Window screen

Display method ...........................................4- 3

Movement method ......................................4- 3

Overlap window...........................................4- 4

Setting range of screen size .......................4- 2

Superimpose window .................................4- 5

Index - 3 Index - 3

Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries.

Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.

Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

SPREAD

Copyright (C) 1998 Farpoint Technologies, Inc.


HEADQUARTERS

EUROPE B.V.

Gothaer Straße 8

D-40880 Ratingen

Phone: +49 (0) 21 02 / 486-0

EUROPE

Fax: +49 (0) 21 02 / 4 86-11 20 e mail: [email protected]

FRANCE

EUROPE B.V.

25, Boulevard des Bouvets

F-92741 Nanterre Cedex

Phone: +33 1 55 68 55 68

EUROPE B.V.

Travellers Lane

GB-Hatfield Herts. AL10 8 XB

Phone: +44 (0) 1707 / 27 61 00

Fax: +44 (0) 1707 / 27 86 95

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

EUROPE B.V.

Via Paracelso 12

I-20041 Agrate Brianza (MI)

UK

ITALY

Fax: +39 039 6053 312 e mail: [email protected]

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

EUROPE B.V.

Carretera de Rubí 76-80

E-08190 Sant Cugat del Vallés

SPAIN

Fax: +34 9 3 / 589 2948 e mail: [email protected]

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

CORPORATION

JAPAN

8-12,1 chome, Harumi Chuo-Ku

Tokyo 104-6212

Phone: +81 3 6221 6060

Fax: +81 3 6221 6075

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

AUTOMATION

Vernon Hills, IL 60061

Fax: +1 847 / 478 22 83

USA

EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES

Wiener Straße 89

A-2500 Baden

Fax: +43 (0) 2252 / 488 60 e mail: [email protected]

AUSTRIA

BELARUS

BY-220030 Minsk

Phone: +375 (0) 17 / 22 75 704

Fax: +375 (0) 17 / 22 76 669 e mail: [email protected]

Getronics b.v.

Control Systems

B-1731 Asse-Zellik

BELGIUM


BULGARIA

BG-1756 Sofia

Phone: +359 (0) 2 / 97 44 05 8

Fax: +359 (0) 2 / 97 44 06 1 e mail: —

INEA CR d.o.o.

Drvinje 63

CROATIA

Phone: +385 (0) 1 / 36 67 140 e mail: —

CZECHIA

Control Systems s.r.o.

Nemocnicni 12

CZ-702 00 Ostrava 2

Phone: +420 59 / 6152 111


EUROPE B.V. – Irish Branch

Westgate Business Park

IRL-Dublin 24

Phone: +353 (0) 1 / 419 88 00

IRELAND


LATVIA

Lienes iela 28

LV-1009 Riga

Phone: +371 784 / 22 80

Fax: +371 784 / 22 81 e mail: [email protected]

UAB UTU POWEL

Savanoriu pr. 187

LT-2053 Vilnius

Phone: +370 (0) 52323-101

Fax: +370 (0) 52322-980 e mail: [email protected]

LITHUANIA

MOLDOVA, REPUBLIC OF

MD-2061 Chisinau

Phone: +373 (0)2 / 562 263

Fax: +373 (0)2 / 562 263 e mail: [email protected]

Getronics b.v.

Control Systems

Donauweg 2 B

NL-1043 AJ Amsterdam

NETHERLANDS

Phone: +31 (0) 20 / 587 67 00


Beijer Electronics AS

Teglverksveien 1

N-3002 Drammen

Phone: +47 (0) 32 / 24 30 00

NORWAY


Darülaceze Cad. No. 43 KAT: 2

TURKEY

TR-80270 Okmeydani-Istanbul


UKRAINE

UA-02002 Kiev

Phone: +380 (0) 44 / 238-83-16

Fax: +380 (0) 44 / 238-83-17 e mail: [email protected]

AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE

Private Bag 2016

ZA-1600 Isando

Fax: +27 (0) 11/ 392 2354 e mail: [email protected]

SOUTH AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE

Box 6272

IL-42160 Netanya

ISRAEL

Phone: +972 (0) 9 / 863 08 91 e mail: [email protected]

EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVE

AVTOMATIKA SEVER

Krapivnij Per. 5, Of. 402

Phone: +7 812 / 1183 238

RUSSIA

louis poulsen industri & automation

DK-2670 Greve

Phone: +45 (0) 43 / 95 95 95


UTU Elektrotehnika AS

Pärnu mnt.160i

EE-11317 Tallinn

Phone: +372 (0) 6 / 51 72 80

DENMARK

ESTONIA

MPL Technology Sp. z o.o.

POLAND

Phone: +48 (0) 12 / 632 28 85


Sirius Trading & Services srl

ROMANIA

Bd. Lacul Tei nr. 1 B

RO-72301 Bucuresti 2

Phone: +40 (0) 21 / 201 7147


ACP Autocomp a.s.

Chalupkova 7

SLOVAKIA

SK-81109 Bratislava

Phone: +421 (02) / 5292-22 54, 55

Beijer Electronics OY

Ansatie 6a

FINLAND

Phone: +358 (0) 9 / 886 77 500 e mail: [email protected]

FINLAND

Teljänkatu 8 A 3

FIN-28130 Pori

Phone: +358 (0) 2 / 522 3300 e mail: —

GREECE

5, Mavrogenous Str.

GR-18542 Piraeus


Meltrade Automatika Kft.

HUNGARY

H-1105 Budapest

Phone: +36 (0)1 / 2605 602

Fax: +36 (0)1 / 2605 602 e mail: [email protected]

INEA d.o.o.

Stegne 11

Phone: +386 (0) 1-513 8100 e mail: [email protected]

Beijer Electronics AB

Box 426

Phone: +46 (0) 40 / 35 86 00


SWITZERLAND

Postfach 282

CH-8309 Nürensdorf


SLOVENIA

SWEDEN

Promyshlennaya St. 42

RU-198099 St Petersburg

Phone: +7 812 / 325 36 53 e mail: [email protected]

Fax: +7 095/ 261 3808 e mail: —

Fax: +7 095 / 786 21 01

RUSSIA

Ul Garschina 11

RUSSIA

RU-140070 Moscowskaja Oblast

RUSSIA

Ryazanskij Prospekt 8a, Office 100

RU-109428 Moscow

Phone: +7 095 / 232 - 0207 e mail: [email protected]

RUSSIA

Sverdlova 11a

RU-620027 Ekaterinburg

Fax: +7 34 32 / 53 27 45 e mail: [email protected]

RU-107005 Moscow

Phone: +7 095 / 786 21 00 e mail: [email protected]

RUSSIA


INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

Gothaer Straße 8 Phone: +49 2102 486-0 Fax: +49 2102 486-7170 www.mitsubishi-automation.de

D-40880 Ratingen Hotline: +49 1805 000-765 [email protected] www.mitsubishi-automation.com

GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Reference Manual

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

MELSOFT

Human Machine Interface

Reference Manual

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

•

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

•

(Always read these instructions before using this equipment.)

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.

The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system, please read the CPU module user's manual.

In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".

Note that the

CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances.

Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

•

During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system.

False output or malfunction can cause an accident.

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION

Related manuals

Mitsubishi Electric

GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5

Mitsubishi Electric

GOT-A900 Series

Mitsubishi Electronics

Frozen Dessert Maker SW1-GTD2-O-E

Mitsubishi Electric

GOT-A900 Series

Mitsubishi Electric

GOT-A900 Series

Mitsubishi

A8GT-50KBF

Mitsubishi Electronics

GOT-A900 Series

Mitsubishi Electric

GOT-A900 Series

Mitsubishi Electric

A8GT-J61BT13 Type CC-Link Communication Unit

Mitsubishi Electric

GOT-A900 Series

Mitsubishi Electronics

A8GT-J61BT15 Control Communication Link Communication Module